JP6653950B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

The start information is acquired by the game medium passing through the start area, a lottery is executed based on the start information, and a symbol is dynamically displayed based on the lottery result, and the stop result of the symbol becomes a predetermined mode. Gaming machines that provide a predetermined game value when a game is played are known. Such gaming machines are known to perform an effect of determining in advance the degree of expectation that the stop result of the symbol becomes a predetermined mode before starting the dynamic display of the symbol, and informing the player of the effect. and are (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2011-136047 A

In the gaming machine described above, the lottery is executed at the start of the dynamic display and at the time of the preliminary determination. However, since it is necessary to refer to different start information depending on the lottery execution timing, it is necessary to provide a process corresponding to the timing of determining the lottery result, and the game control may be complicated .

The problem to be solved by the present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to suppress the complexity of game control .

In a representative embodiment of the present invention, a random number value is obtained as start information from a generated random number based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, a lottery is executed based on the obtained start information, and dynamic display is performed. A first dynamic display means for starting dynamic display when passing through a first starting port, and starting a dynamic display when passing through a second starting port. a second dynamic display means for a first hold storage means for storing the start information within the limit of a predetermined number until the dynamic display is started in response to passage to the first start hole, the first (2) second holding storage means for storing the starting information up to a predetermined number until the dynamic display is started upon passage to the starting port, the first holding storage means and the second holding storage means a storage unit that is different from the said start information A start information storage means for storing, at the start dynamic display of the first dynamic display unit, remembers the start information for starting said dynamic display from the first holding memory means to said start information storage means, A first dynamic display time lottery determination means for executing the lottery based on the start information stored in the start information storage means; and starting the dynamic display when the first dynamic display means starts the dynamic display. the selecting dynamic display type from the dynamic display pattern table based on start information to the first pending serial from the storage means to the start information storage means憶, start information stored in the start-up information storing means for 1 a dynamic display time variation type determination means, the at the start of the dynamic display of the second dynamic display means, serial starting information for starting the dynamic display on the starting information storage means from said second holding storage means憶And the starting information storage means A second dynamic display when drawing judgment means for performing the lottery based on憶the start information at the start dynamic display of the second dynamic display means, wherein the start information for starting the dynamic display first 2 remembers the start information storage means from the holding memory means, second dynamic display during variations type selecting dynamic display type from the dynamic display pattern table based on the starting information stored in the start-up information storing means comprising a determining unit, a, before the dynamic display of the first dynamic display unit is started, remembers the start information in the start-up information storing unit, the start information stored in the start-up information storing means based comprising a first pre-drawing judgment means for performing the lottery, said starting information used in the first pre-drawing judgment means, before the first pre-drawing judgment means is executed, the first hold memory Stored in a predetermined area of the means, Before dynamic display of the first dynamic display unit is started, the dynamic display pattern table based the start information to the remembers the starting information storage means, starting information stored in the start-up information storing means comprising a first pre-change type determining means for selecting a dynamic display type from the said starting information used in the first pre-change type determining means, before the first pre-change type determining means is executed, stored in a predetermined area of the first holding storage means, before the dynamic display of the second dynamic display unit is started, remembers the start information in the start-up information storing unit, the start information storage a second pre-drawing judgment means for performing the lottery on the basis of the start-up information stored in the unit, said start information used in the second pre-drawing judgment means, before the second pre-drawing judgment means is executed And the second hold storage Stored in a predetermined area of the stage, before the dynamic display of the second dynamic display unit is started, remembers the start information in the start-up information storing means, stored in the start-up information storing means starting a second pre-change type determining means for selecting a dynamic display type from the dynamic display pattern table based on the information, wherein the start information used in the second pre-change type determination means, the second pre-change type Before the determination means is executed, the determination is stored in a predetermined area of the second hold storage means, and the first dynamic display time lottery determination means and the first preliminary lottery determination means are stored in the start information storage means. The process of executing the lottery based on the start information obtained is common, and the second dynamic display-time lottery determination means and the second preliminary lottery determination means determine whether the start information stored in the start information storage means is equal to the start information. Based on the lottery The first dynamic display time variation type determination means and the first prior variation type determination means determine the type of the dynamic display based on the start information stored in the start information storage means. The process to be selected and the dynamic display pattern table are common, and the second dynamic display variation type determination means and the second preliminary variation type determination means are based on the start information stored in the start information storage means. Thus, the processing for selecting the type of dynamic display and the dynamic display pattern table are common.

According to an embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to standardize the processing related to the game control and suppress the complexity of the game control .

It is a perspective view showing the state where the main frame was opened to the outer frame of the pachinko gaming machine, and the door frame was opened to the main frame. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is a front perspective view of a main-body frame. FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. It is a perspective view of a door frame. It is a front view of a game board. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. It is a front view which expands and shows the function display unit in a game board in the state attached to the pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 11. It is a block diagram showing the outline of peripheral control MPU. FIG. 3 is a block diagram around a sound source built-in VDP in a liquid crystal and sound control unit. 4 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 16 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 15. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of main control side power-on. 18 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control-side power-on processing in FIG. 17. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main control timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol and special electric auditors product control process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of starting mouth winning. It is a figure showing an example of a control data table at the time of a starting opening winning. It is a figure which shows an example of the area which stores the random number for special symbols. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a storage prefetch process. It is a figure which shows the table relevant to notice permission judgment data, (A) is an example of notice permission judgment data address table, (B) is an example of notice permission judgment data. It is a figure which shows the table relevant to the special symbol reservation ball number command, (A) is an example of a special symbol reservation ball number command address table, (B) is an example of a special symbol reservation ball number designation command creation table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol big hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol determination process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern selection judging processing. 30 is a flowchart illustrating a continuation of a variation pattern selection determination process in FIG. 29. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation type determination process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design change waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the special symbol change waiting process of FIG. 32. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol / flag setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design change pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of a gate passage. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol prefetching process. It is a figure showing an example of a general-purpose pre-reading judgment prohibition period. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol hit determination process. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a module configuration of a main control program. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of a peripheral control part. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part command reception interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control section power failure notice signal interruption processing. It is a figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a reception command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of effect control processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of decoration design change start processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of decoration design change processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a story reach setting process. It is a figure showing an example of an effect selection pattern in story reach. It is a figure which shows the change of the random number extraction range in time series order. It is a figure explaining the production example of story reach. It is a figure explaining the production example of story reach. It is a figure explaining the production example of story reach. It is a figure explaining the production example of story reach. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pseudo continuous fluctuation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pseudo continuous fluctuation control process. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect pattern table for selecting the scenario in the case of a pseudo continuous change. It is a figure explaining an example of a production of a pseudo continuous change. It is a figure explaining the timing of control of pseudo continuous change. It is a figure explaining the modification of the timing of control of pseudo continuous fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special figure pre-reading effect control process. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect of a normal prefetch effect. It is a figure showing an example of a continuous look-ahead production lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a continuous pre-reading effect setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the continuous look-ahead effect form selection table for selecting the form (specific effect) of a continuous look-ahead effect. It is a figure showing an example of a screen transition of a continuous look-ahead effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a general-purpose look-ahead production process. It is a figure showing an example of a general-purpose look-ahead production. 16 is an example of a table for explaining details of a command related to special figure pre-reading among commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and is a command modification of “8-10. Other” described above with reference to FIG. It is an example of a table showing an example. 16 is an example of a table for explaining details of a command related to special figure pre-reading among commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and is a command modification of “8-10. Other” described above with reference to FIG. It is an example of a table showing an example. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a storage prefetch process according to a modification. (A) is an example of a simplified flowchart in which the variation pattern selection determination processing (FIG. 29) is simplified by focusing on the variation distribution table described above, and (B) is a reach according to the correlation between the reach determination random number and the comparison value. It is an example of an execution possibility table. (A) is an example of a table showing conditions under which the main control board 4100 of the modified example prohibits prefetching, and (B) is a diagram for explaining the effect of prohibiting prefetching at the time of state transition. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a received command analysis process according to a first modification. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a prefetch inhibition count process in a received command analysis process according to a first modification. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a received command analysis process according to a second modification. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an input unknown flag setting process in a received command analysis process according to a second modification. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an unknown count process in a received command analysis process according to a second modification. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special figure prefetch execution determination process in a received command analysis process according to a second modification. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit opening display process. It is a figure showing an example of a production transition in a probable change time saving state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect mode shift process performed by the peripheral control MPU 450a. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure pre-reading effect control processing including the switching control of the special figure pre-reading effect. It is a table for selecting a scenario of a special figure look-ahead effect (reserved look-ahead effect). It is a table for selecting a scenario of a special figure look-ahead effect (background look-ahead effect). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure look-ahead effect control process which includes the switching control of the special figure look-ahead effect, and can execute the reserved look-ahead effect and the background look-ahead effect in parallel. It is a figure showing an example of a special figure look-ahead effect (background look-ahead effect). It is a figure which shows the example of an effect which changes the special figure look-ahead effect currently being performed (background look-ahead effect) to the special figure look-ahead effect based on the newly generated start memory. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in which the held prefetching effect and the background prefetching effect are executed in parallel, and the background prefetching effect being executed is switched to the background prefetching effect based on the newly generated start memory. It is a figure showing an example of the kind of variation pattern of modification 3 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation scenario corresponding to the execution pattern of the announcement effect in the variation display of the special symbol of the modification 3 of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the timing which performs the notice effect of each variation scenario of the modification 3 of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the contents of the notice of the lottery point of modification 3 of this embodiment. It is a figure for explaining the relation between the fluctuation pattern and the level of the modification 3 of this embodiment. It is a figure for explaining the relation between the fluctuation pattern of 3rd modification of this embodiment, and a game state. It is a figure showing an example of a table which sets up the propriety of execution of a notice effect for every level of the modification 3 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for selecting the content of the notice effect of the modification 3 of this embodiment, (A) is at the time of the first half fluctuation | variation, (B) is after a reach or at the time of a pseudo continuous occurrence, (C) is The first half of the development after the reach or the first half of the reach after the occurrence of the pseudo-sequence, (D) shows the set value of the production flag indicating the lottery probability of the announcement effect in the latter half of the development after the reach or the latter half of the reach after the occurrence of the pseudo-sequence. It is a figure explaining an example of the dialogue announcement effect of modification 3 of this embodiment, (A) is a selection table of a conventional dialogue announcement effect, and (B) is a selection table of a dialogue announcement effect of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the level setting process which performs the lottery which washes the notice effect of the modification 3 of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the pre-reading effect control processing in the modification 3 of this embodiment.

[1. Overall Configuration of Pachinko Machines]
Hereinafter, a pachinko gaming machine as a gaming machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, an entire pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main frame is opened with respect to an outer frame of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment, and a door frame is opened with respect to the main frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has an outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, and a box that is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and that is open on the front side. A game board 4 having a frame-shaped main body frame 3, a game area 1100 mounted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side and into which a game ball as a game medium is driven, and a front face of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 on the player side And a door frame 5 pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable so as to be closed. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a game ball disposed below the game window 101 and stored therein. A dish-shaped upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7), and a handle device 500 operated by a player to drive the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. , Is provided.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are each formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape extending in the up-down direction when viewed from the front. The main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2 with respect to the vertical dimension. At a position lower than the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, a decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. The outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged such that their upper ends are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are rotatable at a position in front of the left end of the outer frame 2. The main frame 3 and the right end of the door frame 5 are moved forward with respect to the outer frame 2 to be in an open state.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a game area 1100 into which game balls are driven through a substantially circular game window 101 when viewed from the front, and projects forward below the game window 101. As shown, two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged vertically. A handle device 500 for a player to operate is arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player operates the handle device 500 while game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. When the player rotates the game ball, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hitting ball strength corresponding to the rotation angle, so that the player can play a game.

  The game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590 so that the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100, but the player inserts his / her hand into the game area 1100 to play the game. It is not possible to touch game balls, obstacle nails, various prize holes, and other useful objects in the area 1100.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
Next, the outer frame 2 installed in the island facilities of the game hall will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front perspective view of the outer frame. As shown in FIG. 4, the outer frame 2 includes upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the horizontal direction, left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 extending in the vertical (up and down) direction, and respective frame plates. And four connecting members 14 for connecting the end portions of 10, 11, 12, 13 to each other. The connecting members 14 connect the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13 to each other to form a vertically long rectangular shape ( (Square shape). The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 are formed of a solid material having a predetermined thickness (for example, wood, plywood, or the like). Note that an upper support metal fitting 20, which will be described later, is attached to the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal mold material (for example, aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape. A plurality of grooves extending in the up-down direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in a pachinko island facility in a game hall, etc. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be easily held by the user's finger, and the design of the appearance can be enhanced.

  The outer frame 2 includes an upper support member 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10, and a lower portion fixed to a predetermined position inside the lower side of the left side frame plate 12 and arranged to face the upper support member 20. A supporting member 21; a reinforcing member 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower supporting member 21 and fixed to connect the left and right side frame plates 12, 13; and a decorative cover fixed to the front surface of the reinforcing member 22. 23. The upper support member 20 and the lower support member 21 support the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so as to be openable and closable. A support pin 633 (see FIG. 5) of an upper support 630 of the main body frame 3 to be described later is detachably engaged with the support hook hole 20c of the upper support 20. The main frame support formed on the main frame support 644 of the main frame 3 to be described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support 21 so that the support protrusion 21d of the lower support 21 is inserted. After the main frame 3 is inserted into the support hole of the main frame support 644 in the main frame 3, the support pin 633 of the upper support 630 of the main frame 3 is engaged with the support hook hole 20c to easily mount the main frame 3. It can be freely opened and closed.

  Further, the outer frame 2 has two closing plates 24 and 25 (see FIG. 1), which are arranged at a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, fixed inside the right side frame plate 13. These closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in plan view. The closing plates 24 and 25 are used by the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the lock device 1000 (locking device) attached along the open side of the main frame 3 when closing the main frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 (FIG. 1). The lock is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and is turned to one side, whereby the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are connected. The closed state of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 can be released by disengagement.

[3. Overall configuration of body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 provided on the front side of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the body frame, and FIG. 6 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the body frame. As shown in FIG. 5, the main body frame 3 forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and has a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding opening 601 for holding the game board 4. An upper bracket 630 and a lower shaft bracket 640 attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left end of the main body frame base 600 in front view and supported by the outer frame 2 and supporting the door frame 5, A ball launching device 650 attached to the lower front surface of the main frame base 600 for driving game balls into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, and a game to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 attached to the rear side of the main frame base 600. A prize ball unit 700 for dispensing a ball, and a prize ball unit 700 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 and moving from the prize ball unit 700 to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is opened relative to the main body frame 3. It includes a ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 to shut off the flow of skill sphere, the.

  Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and includes various control boards and power supply boards 851 for controlling electric parts provided on the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 excluding the game board 4. , A back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding opening 601 in the main frame base 600, and a side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main frame base 600 in front view. And a locking device 1000 attached to the right end of the main body frame base when viewed from the front to open and close the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and open and close the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[3-1. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 will be described. The main body frame base 600 is integrally formed of a synthetic resin, has a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5 when viewed from the front, and has a predetermined depth in the front-rear direction. Have been. The main body frame base 600 has a game board holding opening 601 through which a range of about 3/4 of the whole from the upper part to the lower part penetrates in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction and can fit and hold the outer periphery of the game board 4, and a main body frame. A U-shaped front end frame portion 602 that forms the outer periphery of the front end excluding the left side of the base 600 when viewed from the front, and is recessed rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602 to move rearward from the lower end of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5. The protruding door frame protrusion 110c (see FIG. 1), the upper bent protruding piece 167 (see FIG. 1) protruding rearward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153. An engagement groove 603 into which an open-side outer bent protruding piece 164 (see FIG. 1) protruding rearward is inserted and engaged.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding opening 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600 and is recessed rearward by a predetermined amount from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 and spreads in a left-right direction in a plate-like lower rear wall portion. 604, and a peripheral wall portion 605 projecting rearward inside the front end frame portion 602 and forming an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. The free end portions (upper and lower left ends in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 are connected to each other by the peripheral wall portion 605, so that the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 has a frame shape. It has become.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 forms a lower side of the game board holding opening 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall section 604 and has a game board placement section 606 on which the game board 4 is placed, and a game board placement section 606. A positioning projection 607 projecting upward from the substantially center in the left-right direction and engaging with the out-ball discharge groove of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, and a game board stop of the game board 4 formed at a predetermined position on the right inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 when viewed from the front. A game board engaging portion to which the tool 1120 is fixed, and a plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609 which are downwardly suspended from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and have a plurality of lower ends arranged in a left and right direction in a plate shape capable of contacting the upper end of the game board 4. And The positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 can be restricted from moving the lower end of the game board 4 in the left-right direction and the rearward direction by fitting with the out ball discharge groove of the game board 4. I have. In addition, the game board locking portion can restrict the front right side of the game board 4 from moving in the front-rear direction by locking the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4. . Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 in a front view will be described later, the movement of the side security plate 950 in the front-rear direction is regulated by the positioning member 956.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 has a lower rear wall portion 604 formed at a position depressed to the rear side from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602 by one step. The hit ball firing device 650 is attached from the front side so that the firing solenoid 654 of 650 is housed in the solenoid housing recess. In a state where the hitting ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, a foul space 626 extending leftward and downward is formed on the left side in front view of the upper end of the firing rail 660 of the hitting ball launching device 650. It has become. In the present embodiment, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e (see FIG. 1) of the foul cover unit 540 is located below the foul space 626. The game ball descending from the foul space 626 is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540, and is discharged to the lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7) of the plate unit 300.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 has an opening that penetrates in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left of the left and right centers of the lower rear wall portion 604 in a front view, and a plurality of openings formed on the upper side of the opening and on both left and right sides in a front view. And a through-hole 615 penetrating through the hole. The opening of the body frame base 600 is closed from the front by a relay terminal plate cover 692, and the board unit attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 through the opening 692 a of the relay terminal plate cover 692. The main door relay terminal plate 880 of 800 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 face the front side.

  The main body frame base 600 detects the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 at the lower front surface of the substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened) with respect to the main body frame 3, the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. It has become. The body frame base 600 is provided with a body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 on a rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached. When the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

[3-2. Upper shaft support and lower shaft support]
Next, the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 will be described. The upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 are respectively attached to the metal attachment portions on the upper and lower rear ends of the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front using predetermined screws, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the main body frame 3. The main frame 3 can be pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

  The upper shaft bracket 630 is attached to the upper bracket mounting portion of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like front extension extending forward from the upper end of the mounting portion 631. 7, a pivot pin 633 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extension 632, and a pivot pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side of the pivot pin 633 in a front view (FIG. 7). The vertical extension of the door frame shaft support hole 634 into which the door frame 5 is inserted, and the downward extension from the left end of the front extension portion 632 when viewed from the front, restricts the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. And a stopper. In the upper shaft bracket 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extension portion 632, and the stopper are integrally formed by bending and forming a single metal plate.

  The lower shaft support 640 is used to support the door frame 5, and a door frame support 642 is provided below the door frame support 642 to support the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. And a frame support 644 of the main frame. The door frame shaft support 642 of the lower shaft support 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and extends forward from the lower end of the mounting portion. A plate-shaped front extending portion 642b, a door frame shaft supporting hole 642c through which a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 7) of the door frame 5 is vertically inserted near the front end of the front extending portion 642b, and And a stopper 642d that stands upward from the left end of the extension 642b when viewed from the front and regulates the pivotal end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. In the door frame shaft support 642, the mounting portion, the front extension portion 642b, and the stopper 642d are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  In addition, the main frame support 644 of the lower support 640 is attached to a lower metal mounting portion of the main frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and extends forward from the lower end of the mounting portion. A front extension portion 644b that projects and a main frame support hole that penetrates in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extension portion 644b. In the main frame supporting member 644, the mounting portion and the front extension portion 644b are also integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower bracket support 640 is in a state where the mounting portion of the door frame support 642 and the mounting portion of the main body frame support 644 overlap (contact) in the front-rear direction. The front extending portion 642b and the front extending portion 644b of the main frame supporting member 644 are separated from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, and are attached to the lower metal mounting portion of the main body frame base 600.

  When the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 are attached to the main frame base 600, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support 630 and the main frame support hole of the lower shaft support 640 are coaxial. The main frame support hole of the main frame support 644 in the lower support 640 is fitted to the support protrusion 21d of the lower support 21 in the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 4). The front extension 644b of the body frame shaft support 644 is placed on the support protrusion 21c (see FIG. 4) of the lower support 21 so as to be inserted, and then the shaft of the upper shaft support 630 is inserted. By inserting the support pins 633 into the support hook holes 20c (see FIG. 4) of the upper support fitting 20 in the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. It has become.

  The upper bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 are attached to the main frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support holes 634 of the upper shaft bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support holes of the lower shaft bracket 640. 642c is positioned coaxially with the door frame so that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support 642 of the lower shaft support 640. 5 is placed on the front extension 642b of the door frame shaft support 642, and the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is connected to the door frame of the upper shaft support 630. By inserting the door frame 5 into the shaft support hole 634, the door frame 5 can be supported to be able to open and close with respect to the main body frame 3. In the present embodiment, the upper shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and when the upper shaft pin 630 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support 630, the shaft pin 155 is inserted. Is temporarily slid downward so that the upper shaft support 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension 632 of the upper shaft support 630 overlap vertically, and then the shaft pin 155 is slid upward. It can be inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634.

[3-3. Hit ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball firing device 650 will be described. The hitting ball firing device 650 is mounted on a main frame base 600 at a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604. The firing base 652 is formed of a metal plate. A launching solenoid 654, a hitting hammer 656 fixed to the rotation drive shaft 654 a of the firing solenoid 654 so as to be integrally rotatable, a hammer tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hammer 656, and a predetermined position on the movement locus of the hammering tip 658. A hammer tip 658 at the tip of a hitting hammer 656 passes between the firing rail 660 extending obliquely to the upper left from the position as the base end and attached to the front of the firing base 652 and the firing rail 660 above the base end of the firing rail 660. A ball stopper that forms a gap through which a game ball cannot pass at the same time as it is made possible, and that holds the game ball at the base end of the firing rail 660 662 and a stopper that regulates rotation of the hitting hammer 656 (hammer tip 658) toward the firing rail 660 from a hitting position at which the game ball held at the base end of the firing rail 660 by the ball stopper 662 can be hit. 664.

  Although not shown in detail, the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball firing device 650 is configured such that the rotation drive shaft 654a reciprocates with a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotation operation angle of the handle device 500. . The hitting hammer 656 of the hitting ball firing device 650 includes a fixed portion 656a fixed to the rotation drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, and a gently extending arc extending from the fixed portion 656a to a tip of the rotation drive shaft 654a. A rod portion 656b to which a hammer tip 658 is fixed at the tip in the normal direction, a stopper portion 656c extending to the opposite side of the rod portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a interposed therebetween and capable of contacting the stopper 664; It has. When the stopper 656c of the hitting hammer 656 abuts against the stopper 664, the tip 658 of the tip of the hitting ball 656 is rotated toward the firing rail 660 from the hitting position (rotational end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). It is being regulated.

  When the hitting ball firing device 650 is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, the upper end of the firing rail 660 is located substantially at the center in the left-right direction, that is, the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604, that is, the game board mounting portion. 606 (lower side of the game board holding opening 601), and a predetermined width in the left-right direction between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 held by the game board holding opening 601. Thus, a foul space 626 extending downward is formed. Then, the hit ball launching device 650 launches the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side in front view of the launch rail 660, so that the game ball can be driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. It has become. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5 is located below the foul space 626. A game ball which has not been driven into the area 1100 and has become a foul ball falls through the foul space 626, is received by the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

[3-4. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 will be described. In the pachinko machine at the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the game balls supplied from the pachinko machine to the pachinko machine 1 are stored, and then the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1 based on a predetermined payout instruction. To be paid out. The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball base 710 mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 and a prize ball tank mounted on an upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 for receiving and storing game balls supplied from the pachinko island equipment side. 720, a tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and arranged to send the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 to the downstream side, and a game ball arranged by the tank rail unit 730 to a predetermined position. The prize ball device 740 to be paid out based on the payout instruction and the game balls paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and are paid out when the upper plate 301 is full of game balls. And a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching the game ball to the lower plate 302 side.

  The prize ball unit 700 includes an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710, and an external terminal plate cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal plate 784.

[3-4-1. Prize ball tank]
In the prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by an outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. Also, the prize ball tank 720 is inclined such that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 becomes lower toward the discharge port 723, so that the game balls on the bottom wall portion 721 roll toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

  The prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 rotatably supported by the shaft portion 725. One end of the ball leveling member 727 is pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight therein, and the other end thereof is suspended by its own weight. The ball leveling member 727 hangs down in a tank rail unit 730 described below, and can level and align game balls flowing in the tank rail unit 730.

[3-4-2. Tank rail unit]
The tank rail unit 730 includes a tank rail 731 that is disposed below the prize ball tank 720 and extends in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a gutter-like shape having a predetermined depth with an open upper portion, and has a width (depth) in which game balls can be aligned in two rows in the front-rear direction. The bottom is inclined so that is lower.

  In addition, the tank rail unit 730 includes an aligning gear 732 rotatably supported above the outlet of the tank rail 731, a gear cover 733 covering the upper part of the aligning gear 732, and a tank that is continuous with the right end of the gear cover 733 in front view. A ball holding plate 734 for closing the upper part of the rail 731, a ball stopper 735 which can be advanced and retracted into the tank rail 731 and which can stop the game balls in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port side; , Is provided. The two aligning gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls divided in two rows by the partition wall of the tank rail 731.

[3-4-3. Prize ball device]
The prize ball device 740 is for paying out the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. The prize ball device 740 has a supply passage opening at the upper end and extending to a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction at a width slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball, and communicating with the lower end of the supply passage and having a predetermined width. A distribution space having a space, a prize ball passage which communicates with a lower end of the distribution space on the left side (open side) in a rear view, bends in a substantially rectangular shape and opens on the left side in the rear view, and a right side of the distribution space in a rear view. (A shaft support side), and a ball passage that extends downward and opens at the lower end in communication with the lower end. The supply passage, the distribution space, the prize ball passage, and the ball passage are formed to be open rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 is fixed to the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 so as to be integrally rotatable and disposed on a rear side of the motor support plate, a second gear meshing with the first gear, and meshing with the second gear. A third gear, a dispensing rotator that rotates integrally with the third gear and is disposed in the distribution space, and a dispensing rotator is fixed to the opposite side of the third gear so as to be integrally rotatable in the circumferential direction and the like. A rotation detection panel having a plurality of (three in this embodiment) detection slits formed at intervals, a ball out switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage, and a prize ball passage It holds a counting switch 751 for detecting a game ball flowing down, a rotation angle switch 752 for detecting a detection slit formed in a rotation detection board that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body, and a rotation angle switch 752. Rotation angle switch board 53, a payout motor 744, burn out switch 750, a counting switch 751, and the rotation angle prize balls casing substrate 754 that relays the connection between dispensing the below-described control board and the switch 752, the.

  The payout rotator includes three recesses each having a size capable of accommodating one game sphere at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and rotating the payout rotator allows one game ball supplied from the supply passage to rotate. The balls are accommodated in the recesses one by one and can be paid out to the side of the prize ball passage or the ball extraction passage. In addition, three detection slits formed in the rotation detection board that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body are formed at equal intervals (every 120 degrees) on the outer periphery of the rotation detection board, and correspond to the gaps between the recesses of the payout rotating body. The rotation position of the payout rotator can be detected by detecting the detection slit by the rotation angle switch 752. In the present embodiment, the rotation between the respective detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board (the payout rotating body) is designed to correspond to the rotation of the payout motor 744 in 18 steps.

  The prize ball device 740 is configured such that when the payout rotating body is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in rear view by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage are paid out to the prize ball passage. The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage by the rotation of the body are counted by the counting switch 751 one by one and then delivered to the prize ball passage. On the other hand, when the ball-pulling operation member is operated by a hall clerk or the like, the game balls in the supply passage are paid out to the ball-pulling passage. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be discharged from the lower end of the passage to the rear outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 through a full tank branching unit 770 described later.

[3-4-4. Full tank branch unit]
The full tank branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape such that the whole becomes lower from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward at substantially the center in the left-right direction at the upper end of the rear end, and the prize of the prize ball device 740 is provided. A prize ball receiving port for receiving game balls flowing down the ball passage, a branch space arranged below the prize ball receiving port and extending in the left-right direction, and a game from immediately below the prize ball receiving port in the branch space to the front side. A normal path for guiding the ball, a normal ball exit 774 that releases the game ball flowing through the normal path to the front and opens at the right end of the front end in front view, and is separated to the right in rear view from immediately below the prize ball receiving port in the branch space. And a full tank exit 776 that guides game balls from the position toward the front toward the front and discharges game balls flowing through the full tank passage to the front and opens the left side of the normal ball exit 774 in front view. ing.

  The full tank branching unit 770 has a ball receiving opening for receiving a game ball flowing upward through the ball discharging passage of the prize ball device 740 and opening upward at the left end of the upper rear end when viewed from the front. A ball passage that guides the game ball received by the mouth to the front side, and a game ball that has flowed through the ball passage is released forward and at the left end in front view at a position behind the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776. And an open ball outlet.

  When the full tank branch unit 770 has the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 are respectively connected to the first ball inlet 542 a of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The game ball discharged from the normal ball outlet 774 is opposed to and communicates with the second ball inlet 542c (see FIG. 1), and the game ball is discharged through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540. The game balls supplied to the upper plate 301 of the unit 300 and released from the full tank outlet 776 are supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. ing. Further, the ball outlet is formed so as to communicate with the upper right end of the main frame base ball extraction passage in rear view of the main frame base 600, and the game balls released from the ball outlet are connected to the main frame of the main frame base 600. It is handed over to the base ball passage.

  When the game balls are further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (prize ball device 740) in a state where the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is full of game balls, the ball is raised from the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540. The game balls that cannot be brought out to the plate 301 side stay in the first ball passage of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually the normal passage upstream of the full ball branch unit 770 becomes full through the normal ball outlet 774. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space from the prize ball receiving port cannot enter the normal passage, starts to move laterally in the branch space, and the game ball that has moved laterally becomes full. So as to be supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 from the full ball outlet through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540, the second ball passage, and the second ball outlet. Has become.

[3-5. Substrate unit]
Next, the board unit 800 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, the board unit 800 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the board unit base 810 when viewed from the front, A power supply board box holder 840 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 810; and a power supply board box attached to the rear surface of the power supply board box holder 840 and having a rear end formed to be substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820. 850, a payout control board box 860 attached to the rear faces of the power supply board box 850 and the speaker box 820, and a terminal board box 870 attached to the rear face of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the payout control board box 860 in front view. And the board unit base A main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is attached to the front surface 10, and a.

  The power supply board box holder 840 has a discharge ball receiving portion 841 that is open upward and receives a downwardly discharged game ball discharged from the out ball discharge portion of the game board 4 on the left front surface than the left and right center in front view; A discharge passage 842 that guides the game ball received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward and discharges the discharged ball, and is opened forward and upward at the front (right side in front view) of the discharge passage 842 and the discharged ball receiving portion 841. And a box accommodating portion that is formed so that the entire rear surface of the power supply board box holder 840 is depressed forward, and that can accommodate the front end of the power supply board box 850.

  Further, the power supply board box holder 840 is configured such that the open front end of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810, and the opening of the board unit base 810 faces the discharge passage 842. It flows through a body frame base ball passage formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall of the body frame base 600 and flows down to the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the opening of the board unit base 810. The game balls and the game balls discharged from the out ball discharge portion of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 can be discharged to the rear lower side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 through the discharge passage 842. Has become.

  The power supply board box 850 is formed in a horizontally long box shape open at the front, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and transfers heat from the electronic components and the like to the outside through a plurality of slits 850 a formed on the upper and lower surfaces. Can be released to The power switch 852 attached to the power board 851 faces the rear surface of the power board box 850.

  The dispensing control board box 860 includes a thin box-shaped box base 861 that is horizontally long and has a rear opening, a thin box-shaped cover 862 that is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side, and has a front opening, and a box base 861. And a payout control board 4110 that is attached to the rear surface and covered by the cover 862. The dispensing control board box 860 includes a plurality of separation and cutting portions 863 protruding outward from the left end in rear view and formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are caulked and fixed. As a result, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the box base 861 and the cover 862 cannot be separated without cutting the separation cutting section 863. When the dispensing control board box 860 is opened, the trace is left. . Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the payout control board box 860 has been illegally opened and closed. In this embodiment, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  In the payout control board box 860, the operation switch 860a (error clearing unit) attached to the payout control board 4110, the inspection output terminal 860c, and the like face rearward through the cover 862. In the payout control board box 860, various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like face rearward through the cover 862. The operation switch 860a is operated to clear the RAM built in the microprocessor of the payout control board 4110 and the RAM built in the microprocessor of the main control board 4100 when the power is turned on, or after the power is turned on. When an error is notified, an operation is performed to cancel the error. The function of clearing the RAM at the time of power-on and the function of clearing the RAM at power-on (the time period during which the function as the RAM clear has passed have passed. And a function for canceling the error in (2). A detailed description of this point will be described later.

  The terminal board box 870 includes a board base 871 attached to the rear face of the speaker box 820, a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 attached to the back face of the board base 871, and a peripheral panel relay terminal 872 fixed to the rear, and a board base. A game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 to which the CR unit relay terminal 873 is fixed rearwardly attached to the rear surface of the base unit 871 and a board such that the peripheral panel relay terminal 872 and the CR unit relay terminal 873 face the rear side. A substrate cover 874 that covers the rear side of the base 871. The peripheral panel relay terminal 872 is for connecting to a frequency indicator for displaying an operation state and the like of the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided on the pachinko gaming machine facility side where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. The terminal 873 is for connecting to a CR unit installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are provided on the peripheral control board 4140 provided on the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, the payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the door frame 5. It is for relaying connection with the handle device 500, each decorative board, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are attached to a substrate mounting portion formed on the front surface of the substrate unit base 810 so as to face the front from the front surface of the main body frame base 600. The wiring extending from the door frame 5 can be connected.

  The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are configured such that the front sides thereof are covered by a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. Only the connection terminal faces the front side through the opening 692a, so that the front surface of the main body frame 3 has a clean appearance.

  In addition, the main door relay terminal plate 880 is provided with a ball lending button 361, a return button 362, a lending remaining display portion 363, a potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, and a touch in the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. This is for relaying the connection between the switch 516, the firing stop switch 518, the full tank switch 550 of the foul cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. Note that the ball lending button 361, the return button 362, the remaining lending display section 363 of the ball lending unit 360, the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, the touch switch 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full tank switch 550 of the foul cover unit 540 are described. The description will be given later.

  In addition, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is provided on each of the decorative units 200, 240, and 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, each of the decorative boards provided on the plate unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and on the operation unit 400. For relaying a connection between a dial drive motor 414, various switches for respectively detecting operations of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and a peripheral control board 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. It is. The decorative units 200, 240, and 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, the decorative boards provided on the plate unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the dial drive motor 414 and the dial operation provided on the operation unit 400 A description of various switches for detecting operations of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 will be described later.

[4. Overall configuration of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the door frame. As shown in FIG. 7, the door frame 5 includes a door frame base unit 100 having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape); A right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to the left outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. A decorative unit 240, an upper decorative unit 280 attached to the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front of the door frame base unit 100, and a door frame base unit disposed below the lower ends of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. And a pair of side speaker covers 290 attached to the front surface of the speaker 100.

  In addition, the door frame 5 is mounted on the front of the door frame base unit 100 below the game window 101, the operation unit 400 mounted on the upper center of the plate unit 300, and mounted on the right side of the plate unit 300. The upper plate-side liquid crystal display device 470 penetrates the plate unit 300 and is attached to the lower right corner of the door frame base unit 100 to handle a game ball driving operation. A foul cover unit 540 arranged on the rear side of the plate unit 300 and attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100; a ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540; Attach to the back of the base unit 100 to close the game window 101 The glass unit 590 is provided with a.

[4-1. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 will be described. The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base main body 110 having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, penetrates in the front-rear direction, and whose inner periphery is formed in a vertically elongated substantially elliptical shape, and a door frame. An upper bracket 120 attached to the upper center of the gaming window 101 at the front of the base body 110 to fix the upper decorative unit, and a pair of sides attached to the lower left and right outer sides of the gaming window 101 at the front of the door frame base body 110 The speaker includes a speaker 130 and a handle bracket attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in front view to support the handle device 500.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 (see FIG. 1) fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and a game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. A security cover 180 (see FIG. 1) attached so as to cover the lower portion, and a glass unit locking member 190 (see FIG. 1), and a firing cover 191 (see FIG. 1) which is disposed on the left side (open side) from the center in the left-right direction in rear view and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the gaming window 101. A main control board attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 below the firing cover 191 and attached to a potentiometer 512 of a handle device 500 described later and a game board 4 described later. 100, a handle relay terminal plate cover 193 (see FIG. 1) covering the rear side of the handle relay terminal plate 192, and a center in the left-right direction. A frame decorative drive amplifier board 194 that is disposed on the opposite side (right side (axial support side) than the center in the left-right direction in rear view) from the firing cover 191 and the handle relay terminal plate 192 and attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body. (See FIG. 1), and a frame decoration drive amplifier board cover 195 (see FIG. 1) that covers the rear side of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is electrically connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and is also electrically connected to a peripheral control board 4140 provided in the game board 4 described later. And an amplification circuit for amplifying the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control board 4140 and outputting the amplified signal to each speaker 130. Although not specifically shown, in the present embodiment, each of the decorative units 200, 240, and 280, each of the decorative substrates provided in the plate unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the dial drive motor provided in the operation unit 400. And switches, handle relay terminal plate 192, wiring for electrically connecting ball unit 360 of dish unit 300 and the like, payout control board 4110 and peripheral control board 4140, etc., when viewed from the back of frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. After being collected and bundled at a position on the right side (supporting side), it extends rearward and is connected to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 of the main body frame 3.

[4-1-1. Door frame base body]
The door frame base main body 110 is formed in a vertically long frame shape by a synthetic resin, and is formed in such a manner that the game window 101 having a vertically long inner shape and a substantially elliptical shape penetrating in the front-rear direction is generally upwardly offset. Have been. In the gaming window 101, the left and right inner edges are formed in a continuous smooth curved shape, while the lower inner edge is formed in a straight line extending left and right. In addition, a square notch is formed at the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the gaming window 101 in the door frame base body 110 on the pivot side (left side in front view) so that the first ball outlet of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted. A speaker mounting portion disposed on the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the game window 101 for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130, a right (open side) end of a front surface which is disposed at a lower right corner in front view and bulges forward. A handle mounting portion for mounting a handle bracket that is inclined obliquely so as to retreat, a wire passage opening through which a wire from the handle device 500 can pass through in a front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle mounting portion, and above the handle mounting portion A lock hole 116 is formed in the shape of a cylinder that extends short forward, and through which a cylinder lock 1010 described later can be inserted. In the door frame base main body 110, the upper side formed by the gaming window 101 and the width of the left and right sides are the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151, the pivot side supporting sheet metal 152, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 described later. , And the gaming window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body in a front view.

[4-1-2. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 (see FIG. 1) attached along the back surface of the upper side of the door frame base body 110 and a pivot attached along the back surface of the pivot side of the door frame base body 110. The side reinforcing sheet metal 152 (see FIG. 1), the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 (see FIG. 1) attached along the open side back surface of the door frame base body 110, and the gaming window 101 of the door frame base body 110 And a lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 (see FIG. 1) attached along the lower surface of the lower side, and these are formed in a square shape by being mutually fastened with screws or rivets.

  An upper support 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided in the upper and lower directions on the upper surface of the upper and lower ends of the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and a lower support 158 having a shaft pin 157 on the lower surface thereof. It is provided integrally. Then, the upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are supported by the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 formed on the upper and lower support sides of the main body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is moved relative to the main body frame 3. It can be freely opened and closed.

  Further, a hook cover 165 is provided at the rear lower portion of the open-side reinforcing metal plate 153 in contact with the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the hook cover 165 engages with the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 (locking device) attached along the open side of the main body frame 3. By inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and rotating it in one direction (rotating in the direction opposite to the direction in which the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2), the door frame hook portion is formed. The engagement between the hook 104 and the hook cover 165 is released, and the closed state of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released.

[4-2. Dish unit]
Next, the plate unit 300 will be described. The plate unit 300 includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls dispensed from the prize ball device 740, and fires the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 via a ball sending unit. It can be supplied to the device 650.

  The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 is formed in a curved shape so as to protrude forward from the left to the center in a front view, and linearly forward from the center to the right. It is formed to protrude. An operation unit mounting portion to which the operation unit 400 is mounted is formed in the upper center of the plate unit 300, and a liquid crystal mounting portion 314d for mounting the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is formed on the right side of the operation unit mounting portion. . The shape of the upper plate upper panel 314 in which the liquid crystal mounting portion 314d is formed is formed in a plate shape, and this portion bends downward when the player presses it downward with a hand, for example. When the pressing force exceeds a predetermined force, the upper plate upper panel 314 is broken. This is because the upper plate-side liquid crystal display device 470 is expensive, and when the player presses his hand on the screen of the upper plate-side liquid crystal display device 470, the force is received by the upper plate upper panel 314. By bending the upper plate upper panel 314, the upper liquid crystal display device 470 is prevented from being damaged. That is, a structure is adopted in which the upper plate upper panel 314 is broken before the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is broken. When the upper plate upper panel 314 is damaged, the plate unit 300 is replaced. In this case, the upper-panel-side liquid crystal display device 470 is removed from the broken upper-panel upper panel 314 and attached to the upper-panel upper panel 314 of the tray unit 300 to be replaced and reused.

  In addition, the plate unit 300 includes an upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 for removing game balls stored in the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 in response to operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341, and a lower plate ball removing button 354. The lower bowl extracting mechanism 350 for pulling down the game balls stored in the lower bowl 302 through the lower bowl removing hole 324b in response to the operation of the lower bowl 302 and a pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown) And a ball rental unit 360 for operating the CR unit.

[4-2-1. Operation unit]
The operation unit 400 is disposed on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at substantially the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and includes a dial operation unit 401 (operation unit) that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 405 (pressable by the player). Operation unit), and can accept the operation of the player according to the game state, can move the dial operation unit 401, not only the operation of hitting the game ball to the player, , So that the user can also participate in the effects during the game. The rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 is detected by a rotation detection switch provided in the operation unit 400, and the operation of the press operation unit 405 is detected by a press detection switch provided in the operation unit 400.

  The operation unit 400 can rotate the dial operation unit 401 clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial driving motor 414. Further, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 in a step-by-step manner by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, It is possible to assist rotation, prevent rotation, or add a click feeling to rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by alternately repeating the rotation for rotating the dial drive motor 414 in small increments forward and the rotation for reverse rotation.

[4-2-2. Ball rental unit]
The ball lending unit 360 includes a ball lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and a lending remaining display section 363 between the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362. When the ball lending button 361 is operated, it is detected by the ball lending switch 365a, and when the return button 362 is operated, it is detected by the return switch 365b. The display content of the remaining number display 365c can be visually recognized through the remaining lending display section 363. Note that a CR unit lamp 365d is arranged adjacent to the remaining frequency indicator 365c, so that the light emission mode of the CR unit lamp 365d can be visually recognized through the lending remaining display unit 363. The ball rental switch 365a, the return switch 365b, the remaining power indicator 365c, and the CR unit lamp 365d are mounted on the frequency display board 365, and the frequency display board 365 is mounted inside the ball rental unit 360. . The ball lending unit 360, when cash or a prepaid card is inserted into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and when a ball lending button 361 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in a plate unit. 300 can be lent (paid out) into the upper plate 301, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the remaining cash and the prepaid card inserted after subtracting the remainder of the borrowed amount are returned. ing. In addition, the remaining lending display section 363 displays the number of cash and prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine.

[4-3. Ball sending unit]
Next, the ball feeding unit 580 will be described. The ball feeding unit 580 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 to the hit ball launching device 650 one by one, and also converts the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the upper plate balls. The lower tray 302 can be pulled out by operating the upper tray ball pullout button 341 of the pulling mechanism 340.

  The ball feeding unit 580 is an entrance where game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port of the upper plate 301 and the ball feeding opening of the door frame base body 110 and penetrate in the front-rear direction. , And a box-shaped front cover that has a ball outlet opening below the entry port and is open at the rear, and a box shape that closes the rear end of the front cover and is open at the front, and penetrates in the front-rear direction. A rear cover having a hit ball supply port 582a for supplying a game ball which has entered from the entrance of the front cover to the hit ball launching device 650, and a rotation about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover and the front cover. A ball-pulling member that is pivotally supported and has a partitioning part that separates between the entrance and the ball outlet at the rear side of the front cover, and a game ball on the partitioning part of the ball-pulling member that is hit by the rear cover one ball at a time. Feeding to supply port 582a, between upper and lower covers before and after cover And Tamaoku member rotatably supported around an axis extending to, and a Tamaoku solenoid 585 to rotate the Tamaoku member.

  When the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member receives one ball, and when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member receives the ball. The game balls are sent (supplied) to the hitting ball firing device 650 side.

[4-4. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 will be described. The handle device 500 includes a handle base fixed to a handle bracket attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 and having a cylindrical front end bulging round in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and a handle base rotatable relative to the handle base. The front of the rotary handle main body 506 fixed to the front of the rear of the rotary handle main body and fixed to the front of the rear of the rotary handle main body and rotatable integrally with the rear of the rotary handle main body, and the front of the rotary handle main body 506 is disposed. And a front end cover 508 fixed to the handle base and cooperating with the handle base to rotatably support the front of the rotary handle main body 506 and the rear of the rotary handle main body.

  Further, the handle device 500 is attached to and fixed to the rotation center in front of the rotary handle body so as to protrude from the front side to the rear side, and has a non-circular bearing portion at the rear end, and is fitted with the bearing portion of the shaft member. A potentiometer 512 having a detection shaft portion that is rotatable and fitted to the front surface of the handle base in a non-rotatable manner; A switch support member having a through hole through which the shaft portion can pass, a touch switch 516 attached to the rear surface of the switch support member, and a firing stop switch 518 attached to a different position on the rear surface of the switch support member. , A single-shot button rotatably supported by the switch support member to operate the firing stop switch 518 And a handle disposed so as to cover the outer periphery of the shaft member, and for urging the front of the rotary handle body 506 and the rear of the rotary handle body to return to the original rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). A return spring. The potentiometer 512 is for electrically adjusting the strength at which the game ball is launched toward the game area 1100 in accordance with the rotational position of the rotary handle main body 506. Further, the front of the rotary handle body 506 and the rear of the rotary handle body are rotated from the original rotation position to a limit rotation position which is a maximum rotation position in a clockwise direction in a front view (a rotation end in a clockwise direction in a front view). I do.

  In the handle device 500, the potentiometer 512 is a variable resistor, and when the front of the rotary handle main body 506 and the rear of the rotary handle main body are rotated, the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 is rotated via the shaft member. . Then, the internal resistance of the potentiometer 512 changes according to the rotation position (rotation angle) of the detection shaft portion, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the hit ball firing device 650 changes according to the internal resistance of the potentiometer 512, and A game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a firing intensity corresponding to (a commensurate with) the rotation angle before the main body 506 and after the rotary handle main body, that is, the rotation position after the rotary handle main body 506 and after the rotary handle main body. I have.

[4-5. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 will be described. The foul cover unit 540 is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 below the gaming window 101, and the game ball is paid out from the prize ball unit 700 or the game is fired by the hit ball firing device 650. The game balls (foul balls) that have not reached the area 1100 are guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 includes a cover base having a front side opened and a flow path for a plurality of game balls therein, and a front cover for closing a front end of the cover base.

  The cover base of the foul cover unit 540 is arranged at the upper right corner in rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction. Inside the cover base communicating with the one ball passage, the second ball passage 542c disposed outside (the right side in rear view) of the first ball inlet 542a and larger than the first ball inlet 542a, and the second ball passage. And a second ball inlet 542c extending downward and inclined so as to become lower toward the lower right corner in front view. The first ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are connected to the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. The height of a portion of the second ball passage extending in the left and right direction along the lower end of the cover base is set to be about three times as high as the outer diameter of the game ball. An accommodation space capable of accommodating is formed.

  Further, the cover base 542 is disposed at a substantially central upper portion in the left-right direction and is provided with a foul ball inlet 542e that opens upward, and a foul that can communicate with the foul ball inlet 542e and guide the game ball to an upper portion near the downstream of the second ball passage. A ball passage. In addition, the cover base includes an opening / closing operation piece for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the rear surface below the second ball entrance. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing operation piece contacts the spherical contact portion of the opening / closing crank in the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, thereby rotating the opening / closing crank and opening the opening / closing shutter 792. It can be opened.

  The front cover of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base, and is disposed at the upper left corner in a front view, communicates with the first ball passage of the cover base, and penetrates in the front-rear direction. An outlet and a second ball outlet disposed at the lower right corner in front view and communicating with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 542 and penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided. The first ball outlet of the front cover is connected to the upper ball supply port of the plate unit 300 through the notch of the door frame base unit 100. The second ball outlet is connected to the rear end of the lower dish ball supply gutter in the dish unit 300 through the ball passage opening of the door frame base body 110.

  The foul cover unit 540 transfers the game balls supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a through the first ball passage to the dish unit 300 from the first ball outlet. Can be supplied to the upper plate 301 via the upper plate ball supply port. Further, the foul cover unit 540 transfers the game ball supplied to the second ball inlet 542c from the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 from the second ball outlet through the second ball passage. The plate unit 300 can be supplied to the lower plate 302 via a lower plate ball supply gutter and a lower plate ball supply port.

  When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul cover unit 540 is configured such that the foul ball entrance 542 e is located below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3, and When the game ball fired by 650 does not reach the inside of the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball entrance 542e. Then, foul cover unit 540 can discharge (supply) the game ball received at foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet to lower plate 302 of plate unit 300 through the foul ball passage and the second ball passage. I can do it.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 forms an upstream (left side in front view) side surface of the accommodation space in the second ball passage, and is pivotally supported by the cover base so as to be capable of swinging by game balls stored in the accommodation space. It includes a member, a full tank switch 550 for detecting swing of the swing member, and a spring for urging the swing member in a direction in which the swing member is in a non-detection state by the full switch 550. The swinging member has a lower end pivotally supported with respect to the cover base, and an upper end that rotates leftward when viewed from the front. The left side wall of the housing space is held substantially vertically. Is formed. The swing member is urged by a spring to a position where the swing member is substantially vertical. Further, the swinging member has a detection piece projecting outward on a side surface opposite to the accommodation space side, and this detection piece is detected by the full tank switch 550. That is, based on the detection signal from the full switch 550, it can be determined whether or not the accommodation space is full with the stored game balls.

[5. Overall configuration of gaming board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is a front view of the game board, and FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. The game board 4 has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, as shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9, and a game area 1100 into which a game ball as a game medium is driven by a player operating the handle device 500. A frame-shaped front component 1110 that defines the outer periphery, and a position at which the front component 1110 can be viewed from the gaming window 101 of the door frame 5 to the player side when attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the lower right corner in a front view. And a plurality of openings 1158 which are attached to the rear side of the front component member 1110 so as to close the game area 1100 and penetrate in a predetermined shape at a position corresponding to the game area 1100 in the front-rear direction. A plate-shaped gaming panel 1150, a front unit 2000 attached to the opening 1158 of the gaming panel 1150 from the front side, and a gaming panel A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface 150, and a.

  Further, the game board 4 is arranged between the game panel 1150 and the back unit 3000, and is inserted from the rear side of the game panel 1150 into a plurality of light emitting decoration holes formed so as to penetrate the game panel 1150. A panel lens member 2500, a liquid crystal display device detachably attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image visually recognizable by a player according to a game state, and a lower portion of the back unit 3000 And a main control board box 1170 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1160 so as to cover the game panel 1150 from the rear side.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1110 will be described. The front component member 1110 has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape can be inserted into the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The outer periphery of the area 1100 is partitioned. An outer rail 1111 extending in an arc shape from the lower left edge to the left in the left-right direction in the front view and extending in the clockwise circumferential direction from the center in the front view and passing through the upper center in the left-right direction in the front view to the upper right diagonal; An inner rail 1112 that is arranged substantially inside the outer rail 1111 and inside the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left corner in front view, so that the inner rail 1112 smoothly continues from the lower end thereof. An inner rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along a counterclockwise circumferential direction in a front view, the end (upper end) of the inner rail 1113 and the outer rail 1111. And an inner rail 1112 and an inner peripheral rail 1113 that allow the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1111 to come into contact with the end (upper end) of the inner rail 1111. At the lower end of the game area 1100 at the lower end of the game area 1100, and is lowered rearward, and is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112 to close between the outer rail 1111. As described above, it is possible to rotate only between the closed position extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and the open position opened clockwise in the front view to open the outer rail 1111. A backflow preventing member 1116 urged by a spring to return to the closed position side.

  When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the front constituent member 1110 is configured such that the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 has a firing rail 660 (see FIG. ) Is located on the extension line. Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the firing rail 660, a space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed, and a game ball hit along the firing rail 660 of the hit ball firing device 650 is formed. , Jumps over the space and is driven into between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow preventing member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 is moved. By rotating to the open position side against the urging force, it is possible to enter the gaming area 1100.

  Also, when a game ball is strongly hit with the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 is brought into contact with the stop 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. The rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed by the contact of the game ball with the stop portion 1114, and the game ball continuously rolls from the outer rail 1111 to the inner peripheral rail 1113. It can be prevented from moving. Even if a game ball that has entered (has been driven into) the game area 1100 attempts to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the urging force before that. In this way, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

  In addition, when the game balls hit into the game area 1100 are not received in the starting ports 2101 and 2102 and the winning ports 2103, 2104 and 2201, etc. of the front unit 2000, they flow down to the lower end of the game area 1100, An out-port guiding surface 1115 at a boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113 guides the player to the out-port 1151 of the game panel 1150, and is discharged from the out-port 1151 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. .

  On the other hand, when the game ball fired from the hitting ball firing device 650 cannot enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 Rolling downward in the opposite direction, a foul space 626 (formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. 1), and is received by the foul ball inlet 542e (see FIG. 1) of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5 located at the lower part of the foul space 626. It is configured to be discharged to the lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7).

  The outer rail 1111 of the front component 1110 has a metal plate attached to the surface thereof, so that the wear resistance due to the rolling of the game ball is enhanced and the game ball rolls smoothly. ing. In addition, the impact portion 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin disposed on a surface thereof, so that even if a game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides, the impact is reduced. And the game ball can be repelled inward.

  In addition, the front component 1110 is arranged at the left end in front view in the vertical direction and is depressed from the front to the rear, and a pair of positioning recesses 1119 opened to the left end, and separated vertically in the right end in front view. A pair of game board stoppers 1120 disposed, a fixed recess 1121 which is disposed on the left side in front view of the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and is opened downward, has an arcuate upper side and is recessed from the front side, and a lower end in front view And a ball passage notch 1122 which is elongated in the left-right direction upward from the lower end near the left end of the ball passage. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component member 1110 is fitted with a positioning member 956 (see FIG. 5) attached to the inside of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 so that the game board holding opening 601 (see FIG. 5). ) Can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction of the left end of the game board 4 inserted in the front view. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion of the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 is attached to the game board. By locking to the stop, the right end in the front view of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3 can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction.

  The fixing recess 1121 of the front component 1110 is provided with a game board fixture 690 (see FIG. Is rotated clockwise in front view, the fixing piece 690a (see FIG. 5) of the game board fixing tool 690 is inserted, and the game board 4 is fixed by the game board fixing tool 690. The lower end is restricted from moving forward. The ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110 has a similar ball passage notch 1152 formed at the same position of the game panel 1150. In this state, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 5) is inserted into the cutouts 1122 and 1152 for ball passages.

  In addition, a function display unit 1180 described later is arranged at the lower right of the front component 1110 in a front view.

[5-2. Table unit]
Next, the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 will be described. The front unit 2000 includes an attacker unit 2100 disposed above the out port 1151 at a substantially lower center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 and supported on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and an outer periphery of the game area 1100 to the left of the attacker unit 2100. Winning side member 2200 which is arranged along the front of the game panel 1150 and is supported at the center of the game area 1100 and is supported by the game panel 1150. I have.

  The front unit 2000 is inserted from the front into an opening 1158 formed at a position corresponding to the game area 1100 in the game panel 1150, and is attached to the front of the game panel 1150. A portion protruding forward from the game panel 1150 is located in the game area 1100. Accordingly, the front unit 2000 comes into contact with the game ball driven into the game area 1100 at an appropriate position, and together with the obstacle nails implanted on the front surface of the game panel 1150, the front unit 2000 can prevent the movement of the game ball. That is, it is possible to make a change. Further, the table unit 2000 can decorate the inside of the game area 1100.

[5-2-1. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described. The attacker unit 2100 has a plurality of entrances (winning openings) through which game balls driven into the game area 1100 can be received. Specifically, the attacker unit 2100 is arranged substantially at the center in the left-right direction. A starting port 2101, a lower starting port 2102 disposed below the upper starting port 2101, and a rectangular disposed below the lower starting port 2102 and extending in the left-right direction more than the upper starting port 2101 and the lower starting port 2102. A large winning opening 2103 having a shape, and a general winning opening 2104 arranged on the left and right sides and slightly above the large winning opening 2103 are provided. The game balls received by the upper starting port 2101, the lower starting port 2102, the special winning port 2103, and the general winning port 2104 are guided from the front side to the rear side of the game panel 1150.

  The upper starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is open at the upper side, so that game balls can always be received (winning). On the other hand, a pair of movable pieces 2106 that can be expanded by a starting port solenoid 2105 (see FIG. 99) is arranged between the lower starting port 2102 disposed below the upper starting port 2101 and the upper starting port 2101. In a state where the pair of movable pieces 2106 stand substantially vertically, the upper starting port 2101 and the pair of movable pieces 2106 make it impossible to receive a game ball into the lower starting port 2102, whereas the pair of movable pieces 2106 When the piece 2106 is expanded in the left-right direction, a game ball can be received in the lower starting port 2102. That is, the lower starting port 2102 is a variable winning opening (variable winning device) by the pair of movable pieces 2106. In addition, the pair of movable pieces 2106 are opened and closed by driving the starting port solenoid 2105 based on detection of the passage of the game ball by the gate switch 2352 of the gate unit 2350 in the center role 2300 described later.

  The big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 can be opened and closed by a horizontally long rectangular opening and closing member 2107 that can close the opening. The opening / closing member 2107 is rotatably supported on the lower side. When the opening / closing member 2107 is substantially vertical, the large winning opening 2103 can be closed to make it difficult to receive a game ball, and the upper side moves forward. , The large winning opening 2103 is opened so that game balls can be easily received. The opening / closing member 2107 has a special winning opening 2103 closed in a normal game state, and is specially selected when a game ball is received (starts winning) by the upper starting opening 2101 or the lower starting opening 2102. In response to the lottery result (when the result of the special lottery is “big hit” or “small hit”), it is opened and closed by driving the attacker solenoid 2108 (see FIG. 99), and a variable winning opening (variable winning device) Is composed.

  Further, the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened upward, so that game balls can be always received (winning).

  Although not shown in detail, the attacker unit 2100 includes a lower starting port switch 2109 for detecting a game ball received by the lower starting port 2102 and a count switch for detecting a game ball received by the special winning port 2103. 2110, and the game balls detected by the lower starting port switch 2109 and the count switch 2110 are discharged onto the bottom wall of the substrate holder 1160. The back unit 3000 includes an upper starting port switch 3022 for detecting a game ball received by the upper starting port 2101 and a general winning port switch 3020 for detecting a game ball received by the general winning port 2104. .

[5-2-2. Side winning port member]
Next, the side winning opening member 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described. The side winning opening member 2200 is inserted from the front side into an opening 1158 formed on the left side of the opening 1158 where the attacker unit 2100 is inserted and fixed at a lower left portion from the center in the left-right direction of the gaming panel 1150. Above, two fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and arranged to face each other along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 so as to line up with the general winning opening 2104 on the left side in the front view of the attacker unit 2100. A general winning port 2201 is provided. These two general winning openings 2201 are opened upward so that game balls can be always received (winning), and the game balls received by the general winning opening 2201 are guided from the front side to the rear side of the game panel 1150. After that, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 3020 provided in the back unit 3000 described later.

  In addition, the side winning opening member 2200 has a left end located at an upper left end thereof at a position substantially in contact with the outer periphery of the game area 1100, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right end. The shelf part 2202 and the first shelf part 2202 are arranged on the opposite side and lower side of the two general winning openings 2201, and at the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 (the lower starting opening 2102 and the big winning opening of the attacker unit 2100). (2103 side), and a second shelf portion 2203 which is lowered toward the center of the game area 1100 by the first shelf portion 2202. I can do it.

  Note that the two general winning openings 2201 are arranged on the right side of the right end of the first shelf 2202, and even if the game ball is brought to the center of the game area 1100 by the first shelf 2202, There is a possibility that a prize will be made to the general prize port 2201. In addition, a third shelf 2204 that is inclined so as to become lower toward the center of the game area 1100 is provided above the two general winning openings 2201.

  The side winning opening member 2200 is formed so as to have translucency as a whole, and although not shown in detail, a side winning opening decorative board is provided on the rear side of the second shelf 2203. At the same time, a side lamp decoration board 3014 of the back unit 3000 described later is arranged behind the side winning opening member 2200, and the side winning opening member 2200 is formed by the side winning opening decorative board and the side lamp decoration board 3014. Are light emitting decorations.

[5-2-3. Center role]
Next, the center role 2300 of the front unit 2000 will be described. The center role 2300 is inserted from the front into an opening 1158 which is formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 1150, and is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150. It is formed in a frame shape with a size occupying most of the area 1100, and the outer peripheral surface on the right side in front view is formed in an arc shape so that a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball is formed between the outer peripheral surface of the game area 1100 and the outer peripheral surface. In addition, the outer peripheral surface on the left side is formed on a substantially straight line that hangs down so that a region of a predetermined width is formed between the outer peripheral surface of the left side and the outer periphery of the game region 1100.

  The center role 2300 is an upper shelf 2301 that is inclined so as to become lower toward the left side from the slightly rightward center position in the left and right direction on the upper outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion located in front of the game panel 1150 so as to become lower leftward. When the game ball hit into the upper part in the game area 1100 flows down to the upper shelf 2301, it flows down through the left side of the center role 2300, and at the right side of the upper shelf 2301. The game ball that has flowed down (invaded) flows down to the lower part of the game area 1100 at a stretch through the right side of the center item 2300. That is, when the game balls are driven so that the game balls enter the right side of the upper shelf 2301 in the center role 2300, the chance of enjoying the flow of the game balls is reduced. The length of the game can be adjusted as appropriate, and a sense of tension can be maintained to prevent the game from becoming a loose game.

  Also, the center role item 2300 has entered the warp entrance 2302 and the warp entrance 2302 in which a game ball flowing down the game area 1100 can enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located in front of the game panel 1150. A warp exit (not shown) for discharging game balls into the frame, and a center ball for discharging the game balls discharged from the warp outlet into the game area 1100 on the upper side of the attacker unit 2100 after rolling in the left-right direction. And a stage 2310 formed on the upper surface of the lower side in the frame of 2300.

  Although not shown in detail, the stage 2310 in the center role 2300 includes a first stage to which the game balls discharged from the warp exit are supplied, and a game ball from the first stage arranged in front of the first stage. A second stage that is supplied and capable of releasing a game ball into the game area 1100. The stage 2310 is formed in a curved surface shape such that the approximate center in the left-right direction becomes lower. Further, a chance entrance 2313 through which a game ball can enter is formed at a rear side of a substantially center in the left-right direction of the first stage. It is configured to be discharged from the exit 2314 into the game area 1100. The chance exit 2314 is disposed immediately above the upper starting port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100, and the game ball released from the chance exit 2314 is received (wins) in the upper starting port 2101 with a high probability. ing.

  Note that the stage 2310 in the center role item 2300 is formed of a transparent member, and through this stage 2310, a decorative body disposed below the stage 2310 in the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the player side. Has become.

  In addition, the center accessory 2300 has a transparent outer side extending from the left outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150 above the warp entrance 2302 so as to substantially contact the inner rail 1112 in the left direction. An arch 2315 is further provided. The arch portion 2315 extends in a thin plate shape from substantially the front end of the front wall portion, and forms a space through which game balls can pass between the arch portion 2315 and the front surface of the game panel 1150. Thus, a game ball driven into the upper portion of the game area 1100 and guided to the left of the center role 2300 by the upper shelf 2301 flows downstream through the rear side of the arch portion 2315. .

  Further, the center accessory 2300 is provided with a gate portion 2350 for detecting the passage of a game ball near the arch portion 2315 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located in front of the game panel 1150. The gate portion 2350 detects a gate entrance located above the arch portion 2315 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion and through which game balls flowing down the game area 1100 can enter, and a game ball entering the gate entrance. A gate switch 2352 for performing the game, and a gate exit for discharging the game ball detected by the gate switch 2352 from the outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion to the game area 1100. In the present embodiment, although not shown in detail, the gate exit of the gate portion 2350 is formed at the same height as the arch portion 2315, and the game ball detected by the gate switch 2352 is connected to the arch. The part 2315 is made to look as if diving.

[5-3. Panel lens member]
Next, the panel lens member 2500 of the game board 4 will be described. The panel lens member 2500 has a plurality of light-emitting portions formed in the game area 1100 on the game panel 1150 at positions outside the opening 1158 into which the center role object 2300 is inserted so as to penetrate in a circular or X shape in the front-rear direction. The decorative holes are used for light-emitting decoration. The panel lens member 2500 includes a transparent upper panel lens 2510 corresponding to a plurality of light-emitting decoration holes formed on the upper left side on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2300, and a plurality of rear panel lenses 2510 disposed on the rear side. An upper panel lens substrate on which the LED is mounted, a transparent lower panel lens 2520 corresponding to a plurality of light emitting decoration holes formed on the lower left side on the outer periphery of the center role 2300, and a rear panel lens 2520 disposed behind the lower panel lens 2520. A lower panel lens substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

  The upper panel lens 2510 and the lower panel lens 2520 in the panel lens member 2500 protrude forward from the plate-shaped lens base portion, and have a plurality of rod-shaped insertion light guides having substantially the same shape as the light emitting decoration hole to be inserted. It has a part. When the insertion light guide portion is inserted into the light emitting decoration hole of the game panel 1150 from the rear side, its tip is formed so as to substantially coincide with the front surface of the game panel 1150, and the game flowing down the front surface of the game panel 1150 is formed. It does not affect the sphere as much as possible.

  The panel lens member 2500 can light and decorate the area where the game ball flows down by using the opaque game panel 1150 such as veneer plywood by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the upper panel lens substrate and the lower panel lens substrate. In addition, it is possible to show the player the decoration of the gaming panel 1150, which has not been seen before, and to distinguish the pachinko gaming machine 1 from other pachinko gaming machines by making the pachinko gaming machine 1 stand out.

[5-4. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 will be described. The back unit 3000 is fixedly attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, and supports a liquid crystal display device 1900 at a position away from the game panel 1150 by a predetermined distance, and a liquid crystal display in the back box 3001. An upper unit 3100 arranged on the upper side of the device 1900, a character unit 3400 arranged on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001, and a gear decoration arranged on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001. And a body unit 3500.

  The back unit 3000 is arranged at a position corresponding to the side winning opening member 2200 in the front unit 2000 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1150 near the lower left front end of the back box 3001, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface. A game ball attached to the side lamp decoration board 3014 and the lower front end of the back box 3001 and received in the general winning opening 2201 of the side winning opening member 2200 and a game received in the general winning opening 2104 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100. A left guiding member 3016 for guiding the ball downward, and a right for guiding the game ball downward, which is arranged on the right side of the left guiding member 3016 and is received by the upper starting port 2101 and the right general winning port 2104 on the attacker unit 2100. And a guiding member 3018.

  Further, although not shown in detail, the back unit 3000 is disposed in the lower rear part of the back box 3001 and has a horizontally long rectangular lamp driving board box 3423 that accommodates the lamp driving board 4170, and a lower part of the lamp driving board box 3423. And a motor drive board box 3430 having a horizontally-long rectangular shape that accommodates the motor drive board 4180 and a lamp drive board box 3423 fixed to the rear side of the back box 3001 and disposed on the left side when viewed from the rear of the motor drive board box 3430. Panel relay terminal plate 4161, a horizontally long rectangular upper resistance substrate arranged on the rear upper part of the back box 3001, and a lock member attached to the rear side of the back box 3001 and detachably holding the liquid crystal display device 1900. Is further provided.

  In this embodiment, the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2300 in the front unit 2000, and each unit 3100, 3400 formed into a predetermined shape. , 3500, etc., the concept of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be characterized. Further, the back unit 3000 is configured such that the units 3100, 3400, and 3500 move independently or in cooperation with each other according to the game state, and the movement changes the game state to the player. And the arrival of a chance can be suggested, and the player can be entertained.

[5-4-1. Back box]
Next, the back box 3001 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The back box 3001 is formed in a box shape whose front side is open, and is provided with a plurality of flange-shaped fixing portions 3001a protruding outward at the front end, and is provided on the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the fixing portions 3001a. It is fixed. In the back box 3001, a rectangular opening is formed substantially at the center of the rear wall, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 supported on the rear side can be visually recognized from the player side through the opening. Further, in the back box 3001, mounting portions for mounting and fixing the units 3100, 3400, and 3500, the substrates 3014, and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

  Although not shown, the back box 3001 inserts and locks one fixing piece 1902 (right side in rear view) that protrudes outward from both left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1900 to the right of the opening in rear view. A liquid crystal supporting portion is provided, and a lock member is attached to the left side of the opening when viewed from the rear, and the lock member supports the other fixed piece 1902 (the left side in the rear view) of the liquid crystal display device 1900, so that the liquid crystal is supported. The display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear side of the back box 3001.

[5-4-2. Guide member]
Next, the left guiding member 3016 and the right guiding member 3018 will be described. The left guiding member 3016 guides and discharges the game balls received in the general winning opening 2201 of the side winning opening member 2200 and the general winning opening 2104 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 through different flow paths. Each of the flow paths is provided with a general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting the passage of a game ball. On the other hand, the right guiding member 3018 guides and discharges the game balls received in the upper starting port 2101 and the right general winning port 2104 on the right side of the attacker unit 2100 through different flow paths to the vicinity of the lower end. The flow path corresponding to the upper starting port 2101 is provided with an upper starting port switch 3022, and the flow path corresponding to the right general winning port 2104 is provided with a general winning port switch 3020. The right guiding member 3018 is provided with a magnetic detection switch 3024 capable of detecting magnetism.

  The game balls guided downward by the left guiding member 3016 and the right guiding member 3018 are discharged onto the bottom wall of the substrate holder 1160, and discharged from the out ball discharging portion 1161 of the substrate holder 1160 to below the game board 4. It has become so.

[5-4-3. Upper unit]
Next, the upper unit 3100 will be described. The upper unit 3100 is formed to be horizontally long as a whole, and is attached and fixed above the opening facing the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001. The upper unit 3100 is arranged at the front in the approximate center in the left-right direction, and is a rotary decorative body unit 3200 having a circular shape when viewed from the front. 3250, a swing decorative body unit 3300 disposed at the approximate center in the left-right direction behind the elevating mechanism 3250, and a movable ceiling unit 3350 disposed on the left and right sides of the swing decorative body unit 3300. ing.

  The rotating decorative body unit 3200 can be moved vertically by a lifting mechanism 3250 between a rising position located above the liquid crystal display device 1900 and a lowering position located substantially at the center of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It has become. In this rotating decorative body unit 3200, a rotating decorative body formed in a shuriken shape arranged on the front surface rotates, and the rotating radius of the rotating decorative body increases due to the centrifugal force of the rotation. It has become.

  In addition, since the rotary decorative body unit 3200 not only rotates the rotary decorative body at the end but also protrudes outward in the radial direction, the rotation radius of the entire rotary decorative body increases, and the appearance changes greatly. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player, it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest in the game, and to strongly attract the interest of the player The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be easily differentiated from other pachinko gaming machines, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko gaming machine.

  The swing decorative body unit 3300 includes swing decorative bodies disposed on the left and right sides of the rear side thereof so as to be adjacent to the rotary decorative body unit 3200 positioned at the ascending position. You can swing your body all the way to the left and right.

  The movable ceiling unit 3350 is provided with a plate-shaped ceiling decoration body extending horizontally at both left and right ends of the upper unit 3100. The ceiling decorative body is formed so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the left-right direction with the front end side as a center. Has become.

[5-4-4. Character unit]
Next, the character unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The character unit 3400 has a three-dimensionally shaped character body that schematically represents a ninja, and moves in the left-right direction from the rightmost position to a position closer to the center side according to a game state. Is available. Also, when the character body of the character unit 3400 moves in the left-right direction, it rotates by a predetermined angle around an axis extending in the up-down direction along with the movement.

  In addition, the character body of the character unit 3400 is configured so that the head can reciprocate around an axis extending in the left-right direction, and the right arm reciprocates around an axis extending in the vertical direction. Is available. Thus, by reciprocating the head, it is possible to perform a motion as if the character is nodding. In addition, by reciprocating the right arm in the horizontal direction, it is possible to perform an operation as if the character is throwing a shuriken.

[5-4-5. Gear decoration unit]
Next, the gear decoration unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The gear decoration unit 3500 is provided with a plurality of gear-shaped gear decorations rotatable about an axis extending in the left-right direction and arranged in a plurality of vertical directions. It is designed to rotate.

[5-4-6. Liquid crystal display]
Next, the liquid crystal display device 1900 of the game board 4 will be described. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 of the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to a game state. The liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a fixing piece 1902 protruding outward from both left and right sides, and is attached to the back box 3001 via the fixing piece 1902.

  Although not shown in detail, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a peripheral board box 1905 that accommodates a peripheral control board 4140 on the rear side.

[6. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIG. The function display unit 1180 is attached to a predetermined position of the front component 1110 and arranged. FIG. 10 is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit in a game board in a state where the function display unit is attached to a pachinko game machine.

  The function display unit 1180 is a game state display including one LED for displaying a game state changed by a game ball driven into the game area 1100 at the left end in front view, as shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. Device 1183, upper special symbol storage display 1184 comprising two LEDs arranged in the vertical direction on the right side of the game status display 1183, and displaying the number of reserves for accepting game balls to the upper starting port 2101; An upper special symbol composed of one 7-segment LED arranged on the right side of the special symbol memory display 1184 and displayed as a first special symbol a first special lottery result selected by receiving game balls into the upper starting port 2101. A display 1185 and a second lottery that is arranged diagonally above and to the right of the upper special symbol display 1185 and that has been drawn by receiving game balls into the lower starting port 2102. A lower special symbol display 1186 composed of one 7-segment LED for displaying another lottery result as a second special symbol, and a lower starting port composed of two LEDs vertically arranged on the right side of the lower special symbol display 1186. And a lower special symbol storage display 1187 for displaying the number of reserves relating to the acceptance of the game ball to the game ball 2102.

  The display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 displays the number of reserves related to the passage of the game balls through the gate portion 2350 which are arranged in a circular arc substantially along the inner rail 1113 from directly above the lower special symbol display 1186. And a normal symbol storage display 1188 composed of four LEDs for displaying the normal lottery result as a normal symbol, which is arranged below the normal symbol storage display and drawn by passing a game ball through the gate unit 2350. Opening and closing of the special winning opening 2103 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is arranged alongside the normal symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED and the diagonal upper right of the ordinary symbol storage display 1188 when the result is "big hit". A round indicator 1190 made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions of the pattern (the number of rounds).

  The game state display 1183 is a full-color LED whose color can be changed between red, green, and orange, and can be changed in various game states (e.g. For example, a probability variation state, a time reduction state, a probable variation reduction time state, a big hit game state, a small hit game state, etc.) can be displayed.

  The upper special symbol storage display 1184 holds the start of the variable display when the game ball is received in the upper starting port 2101 when the first special symbol cannot be displayed in a variable manner on the upper special symbol display 1185 ( The stored number of the stored first special symbols (the number of stored) is displayed. The upper special symbol memory display 1184 has an upper special symbol memory lamp 1184a composed of a predetermined LED and an upper special symbol memory lamp 1184b. The upper special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on / off by a lighting / flashing pattern. , The number of holds can be displayed. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the upper special symbol storage lamp 1184a is turned on and the upper special symbol storage lamp 1184b is turned off. When the number of reservations is two, both the upper special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on. When the number of reservations is three, the upper special symbol storage lamp 1184a blinks and the upper special symbol storage lamp 1184b is turned on. When the number of reservations is four, both the upper special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b blink. I have. In the present embodiment, up to four are reserved.

  When the lower special symbol display 1187 cannot display the second special symbol in the lower special symbol display 1186 in a variable manner, the start of the variable display is suspended when a game ball is received in the lower starting port 2102 ( The stored number of the second special symbols (stored) is displayed. The lower special symbol memory display 1187 has a lower special symbol memory lamp 1187a composed of a predetermined LED and a lower special symbol memory lamp 1187b. The lower special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are illuminated and blinked. , The number of holds can be displayed. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the lower special symbol storage lamp 1187a is turned on and the lower special symbol storage lamp 1187b is turned off. When the number of reservations is two, both the lower special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. When the number of reservations is three, the lower special symbol memory lamp 1187a blinks and the lower special symbol memory lamp 1187b is turned on. When the number of reservations is four, both the lower special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b blink. I have. In the present embodiment, up to four are reserved.

  The upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol indicator 1186 display the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result which are drawn by receiving game balls into the upper starting port 2101 and the lower starting port 2102. The 7-segment LED stops after fluctuating for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are played according to the light emission pattern (special symbol) of the stopped 7-segment LED. Can be recognized by the player (variable display game).

  The normal symbol display 1189 is a full-color LED capable of changing its emission color in red, green, and orange colors. A normal lottery result drawn by passing a ball can be displayed. The display of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display 1189 is, similarly to the special symbol, changed and displayed for a predetermined time and then stopped and displayed in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ordinary lottery result.

  The normal symbol storage display 1188 is a normal symbol in which the start of the variable display is suspended (stored) when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2350 when the normal symbol cannot be changed and displayed on the normal symbol display 1189. Is displayed on the screen. The ordinary symbol storage display 1188 includes four ordinary symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED. By sequentially lighting 普通 1188d, the number of reserved symbols can be displayed. In this embodiment, up to four variable displays of the ordinary symbols are held (stored).

  The round indicator 1190 includes a two-round indicator lamp 1190a composed of a predetermined LED and a 15-round indicator lamp 1190b, and when each lamp is turned on, the number of rounds in the “big hit” game can be displayed. It has become.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the function display unit 1180 can be visually recognized from the player side through the gaming window 101 of the door frame 5 in a state where the gaming board 4 is attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1. I have. Gaming state display 1183, upper special symbol storage display 1184, upper special symbol display 1185, lower special symbol display 1186, lower special symbol memory display 1187, ordinary symbol memory display 1188, ordinary symbol indicator 1189, and The round display 1190 is attached to the front of the function display board 1191. A connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the function display unit 1180 at the rear end thereof.

  In the present embodiment, since the function display unit 1180 is provided on the front component 1110 of the game board 4, compared with the case where the function display unit 1180 is provided on the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the game panel 1150, The function display unit 1180 can be diverted as the basic configuration of the gaming board 4, and the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost. Even if the detailed structure of the game board 4 embodied by the unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 and capable of characterizing the model of the pachinko game machine 1) is different, the position of the function display unit 1180 does not change. It is possible for a hall clerk or the like to recognize the position of the function display unit 1180 without being confused. So that the can.

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board, FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 11, and FIG. 13 is a block diagram schematically showing a peripheral control MPU. Reference numeral 14 is a block diagram around the liquid crystal and the sound source built-in VDP in the sound control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly includes a main control board 4100, a payout control board 4110, and a peripheral control board 4140, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board will be described, and then the payout control board, the power supply board, and the peripheral control board will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 11, the main control board 4100 that controls the progress of the game controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and is executed after a predetermined time elapses from the power-on and performs the game operation. A main control MPU 4100a, which is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various control programs such as a main control program for controlling and various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and detection signals from various detection switches are input. A main control input circuit 4100b, a main control output circuit 4100c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, a main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d for driving various solenoids, and a power failure or momentary interruption of a predetermined voltage. And a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e for monitoring the sign of a power failure.

  The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”), a built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are built in.

  The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in nonvolatile storage unit. A unique ID code (a code having only one in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 4100a is stored in advance in the non-volatile storage means. . Since the once assigned ID code is stored in the non-volatile storage means, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 4100a can take out the ID code from the non-volatile storage means and refer to it.

  The main control input circuit 4100b is not provided with a reset terminal at its various input terminals for forcibly resetting information input with detection signals from various detection switches, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 4100b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the main control input circuit 4100b outputs various signals based on the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches, which are input to the various input terminals, by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 4100c is configured as an open collector output type whose emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to various input terminals thereof. Main control output circuit 4100ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the reset information, and main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function without a reset terminal and having no reset function And, it consists of. The main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. In other words, the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca outputs the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by a main control system reset described later, and thereby outputs the information. , Is configured as a circuit in which no signal is output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit without reset function 4100cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the main control output circuit 4100cb without the reset function outputs the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by not being reset by a main control system reset described later. A signal based on the output signal is output from the various output terminals.

  The upper starting port switch 3022 for detecting a game ball entering the upper starting port 2101, the lower starting port switch 2109 for detecting a game ball entering the lower starting port 2102, and a general winning port 2104 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting the entered game ball and a signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e are input to a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b. I have. Also, as shown in FIG. 8, a gate switch 2352 for detecting a game ball passing through the gate portion 2350, a general winning port switch 3020 for detecting a game ball entered into the general winning opening 2201, and a ball entering the large winning opening 2103 are shown. The detection signals from the count switch 2110 for detecting game balls and the magnetic detection switch 3024 attached to the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 9 and used to detect cheating using a magnet are transmitted to a panel relay attached to the game board 4. The signal is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the terminal board 4161 and the main control input circuit 4100b.

  The main control MPU 4100a outputs a drive signal to the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function from an output terminal of a predetermined output port based on the detection signal from each of these switches, so that the main control output circuit with a reset function is provided. A control signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d from the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100ca, and a drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d to the starting port solenoid 2105 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay terminal plate 4161, or a predetermined output thereof. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the port to the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca, the upper special symbol display is output from the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca via the panel relay terminal board 4161 and the function display board 1191. 1185, Drive signals are sent to the special symbol display 1186, upper special symbol memory display 1184, lower special symbol memory indicator 1187, ordinary symbol indicator 1189, ordinary symbol memory indicator 1188, game status indicator 1183, and round indicator 1190. Output.

  The main control MPU 4100a outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca. By outputting various information (game information) to the board 4110 or outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, the main control output with reset function is performed. A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the circuit 4100ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e.

  In the present embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the upper starting port switch 3022, the lower starting port switch 2109, the gate switch 2352, and the count switch 2110. For the winning opening switches 3020, 3020, contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switches are used. This is because the game ball frequently enters the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102 and frequently passes through the gate section 2350, so that the upper starting port switch 3022, the lower starting port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 are used. Detection of game balls also frequently occurs. Therefore, long-life proximity switches are used for the upper starting port switch 3022, the lower starting port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352. In addition, when a big hit game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the special winning opening 2103 is opened and the game ball enters frequently, so that the detection of the game ball by the count switch 2110 frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is also used as the count switch 2110. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2104, 2201 where the game ball does not frequently enter, the detection by the general winning opening switches 3020, 3020 does not occur frequently. For this reason, as the general winning opening switches 3020, 3020, mechanical switches having a shorter life than proximity switches are used.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit without reset function 4100cb, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit without reset function 4100cb. Various commands are transmitted to the board 4110 as serial data. Upon normal completion of receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, the payout control board 4110 outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 4100. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b.

  The main control MPU 4100a also receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the payout control board 4110 as serial data in the main control input circuit 4100b, so that the main control input circuit 4100b sends the predetermined serial input port Various commands are received at the input terminal as serial data. When the various commands from the payout control board 4110 are normally received as serial data, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output with reset function. The main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to the payout control board 4110.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands relating to control of the game effect and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function as serial data. Accordingly, various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit without reset function 4100cb to the peripheral control board 4140.

  Here, the main serial transmission port for transmitting various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 as serial data will be briefly described. The main control MPU 4100a mainly includes a main control CPU core 4100aa. In addition to the main control built-in RAM, a main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae, which is one of various main control serial I / O ports, connects the bus 4100ah. The circuit is connected via The main serial transmission port 4100ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 as main serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 4100aea, a transmission buffer register 4100aeb, a serial management unit 4100aec, and the like. When the main control CPU core 4100aa sets the command in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and outputs the transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec, the serial management unit 4100aec transmits the command set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb from the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 4100aea and is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 as main serial data. In the present embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 4100aeb has 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 4100aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 4140 by outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec after setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. The transmission of various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 is not limited to a method of transmitting as serial data, but may be a method of communicating as parallel data. When transmitting as parallel data, a dedicated process for transmitting as parallel data is provided as a program process, and is executed at a predetermined timing (for example, at a timing when a command is stored in the ring buffer or on condition that the command is stored). Thus, each command may be transmitted at a necessary timing.

  The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 4100 is provided with an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. It is provided with BC0. The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even in a power-off process even when the power is turned off. Various kinds of information stored in the main control built-in RAM are provided when an operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 described later is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, and an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 860a. Is output from the payout control board 4110 and is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b, and with this as a trigger, the main control MPU 4100a completely erases the data from the main control built-in RAM. (Cleared).

[7-2. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150 that performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 4100, and a game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 and an upper plate-side liquid crystal display device 470. A liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 which performs drawing control and sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 shown in FIG. And a real-time clock (hereinafter, referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying hours, minutes and seconds, and a speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. For adjusting the volume of music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the speaker housed in the door frame 5 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 by rotating the knob. It comprises an adjusting volumes 4140A, a.

[7-2-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral control unit 4150 that performs the effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor and the power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on, and after a lapse of a predetermined time from the power-on. A peripheral control ROM 4150b that stores various control programs such as a sub-control program that is executed and controls a staging operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a liquid crystal and a sound source built-in VDP 4160a of a sound control unit 4160 described below. Various types of information (for example, schedule data defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and light emission of various LEDs, etc., continuing over the peripheral control unit regular processing executed each time the V blank signal is input) Manage schedule data that defines aspects Peripheral control RAM 4150c for storing information for managing a history of occurrence of a jackpot game state, information for managing a special effect flag, and the like. ) And a peripheral control external watchdog timer 4150e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 4150e”) for monitoring whether the peripheral control MPU 4150a is operating normally or not. Have.

  The peripheral control RAM 4150c cannot hold the stored contents only for the time when the power is restored immediately after the momentary power failure occurs, and the power is cut off for a long time (when the power is cut off for a long time). ) Loses its contents, whereas the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 851 (hereinafter, referred to as “SRAM electrolytic capacitor”). Thus, the stored contents can be held for about 50 hours. When the gaming board 4 is removed from the pachinko gaming machine 1 by providing the SRAM electrolytic capacitor on the power supply board 851, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Can no longer keep and lose its contents.

  The peripheral control external WDT 4150e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a runs out of control. When this timer expires, it is reset by hardware. That is, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset when a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e is not output to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period (until the timer expires). When outputting a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, so that the reset is not performed.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like, and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 4100, based on these various commands, each decorative board of the game board 4 A game board-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on a lamp from a serial I / O port for a lamp driving board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 or outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 is serialized for the motor drive board. A signal is transmitted from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, Motor output data for outputting a drive signal to the dynamic drive source from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port to the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 And the door-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5 through the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 via the The frame decoration drive amplifier board transmits data from the LED serial I / O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882.

  Various commands from the main control board 4100 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 provided on the operation unit 400 and a detection signal from a press detection switch for detecting operation of the press operation unit 405 are provided. The detection signal is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame. The signal is input to the operation unit detection serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via the peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral control input circuit.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photo sensors, etc.) for detecting the original position, the movable position, and the like of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 are transmitted to a game board (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. The serialized transmission data is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and the serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the motor control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via the peripheral control input circuit. I have. The peripheral control MPU 4150a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 4140 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching input / output of the motor drive board serial I / O port.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter, referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”). Diagnose whether or not.

[7-2-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, the peripheral control MPU 4150a has a peripheral control CPU core 4150aa as a center, a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviated Direct Memory Access) controller 4150ac, a peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and various peripheral control serial I / Os. / Peripheral control WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 4150ak, and the like.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads and writes various data from and to the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac via the internal bus 4150ah, while the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, The peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak read and write various data via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 4150b via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h. Various data are read and written via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d; A dedicated controller for independently transferring data between an I / O port 4150ag and an input / output device such as a peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak without passing through the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. To DMA3.

  Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes a storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, a peripheral control various serial I / O port 4150ae built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and a built-in peripheral control WDT 4150af. In order to perform data transfer independently between the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag and an input / output device such as the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak without passing through the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. In addition, while reading from and writing to the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150 g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 4150Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and peripheral bus 4150Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d, which are externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Without input / output devices such as the O port 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak, without passing through the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. In order to perform data transfer independently, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and the external bus 4150h are connected to storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Then, while reading and writing, the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak Reading and writing are performed via the control bus controller 4150ad and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

  The peripheral control bus controller 4150ad controls the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral bus 4150ai, and the external bus 4150h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa, the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, the peripheral control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control. Various devices such as a storage device such as an SRAM 4150d and peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, a peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, a peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and a peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak. It is a dedicated controller for exchanging various data between them.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae include a serial I / O port for a lamp driving board, a serial I / O port for a motor driving board, a serial I / O port for a frame decoration driving amplifier board motor, and a frame decoration driving amplifier board LED. Serial I / O port, a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, a main control board serial I / O port, and a serial I / O port for obtaining operation unit information.

  The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 4150af is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is running out of control. It has become. That is, when the watchdog timer is started, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa resets when the clear signal for clearing the timer is not output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af within a certain period (until the timer is up). Will be taken. When the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af within a predetermined period, the timer count can be restarted, so that the reset is not performed.

  The peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag output various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal, a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, etc., and also output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position and the movable position of the various movable bodies provided on the board 4 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and A movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is output, and an upper decoration on the door frame 5 is provided. For example, a lighting signal of an LED mounted on the upper decorative board of the unit 280 is output. This LED is a high-luminance white LED, and is a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big hit game state has been confirmed. In this embodiment, the path between the LED and the various parallel I / O ports 4150ag is shortened by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the various parallel I / O ports 4150ag are electrically connected directly. As a result, noise countermeasures can be taken for the lighting control of the LED, which has a significant meaning in the game. Note that the lighting control of the LED is executed in a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like except this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak is electrically connected to the volume control volume 4140a, and the resistance value is changed by turning the knob of the volume control volume 4140a, so that the resistance at the rotational position of the knob portion is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into 1024 levels of values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. The volume is set to mute for the board volume 0, the maximum volume is set for the board volume 6, and the volume is set so that the volume increases from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (a sound source built-in VDP 4160a to be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and the speaker and the door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 are controlled. Music and sound effects are played from the speaker 130 provided. In this way, music and sound effects can be played from the speakers contained in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130 provided on the door frame 5 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob. .

  In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk of the hall of occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a wrongdoing with respect to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and contents relating to a game effect, etc. (For example, the screen displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is rendered more powerful, or the player is informed that there is a high possibility of shifting to a gaming state advantageous to the player, etc.). ) Also flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, but the notification sound and the notification sound are adjusted by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob. The sound flow from the mute to the maximum sound volume is programmed by the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (a sound source built-in VDP 416 described later). So that the it can be adjusted by controlling the a). The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-described seven-stage board volume, and can smoothly change from mute to the maximum volume. Thus, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume control volume 4140a to set the volume to a low level, the speaker and the door accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 are set. Although the effect sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 130 provided in the frame 5 is reduced, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is malfunctioning or when the player is performing wrongdoing, the sound volume is large (this embodiment). In the mode, the notification sound set to (maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the sound volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk in the hall from becoming difficult to notice a malfunction or a player's misconduct due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to disturb the music and sound effects, It is possible to increase the volume at which the sound is played, and in addition to music and sound effects, to produce a more powerful screen displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, or to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player. You can even tell them you are expensive.

[7-2-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 4150b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating various LED light emission modes, and music. , Sound generation schedule data for generating sound and sound effects, and electric drive source schedule data for generating a drive mode of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines a screen configuration in a time-series manner, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. Have been. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured such that light emission data defining the light emission mode of various LEDs is arranged in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in chronological order, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels of a built-in sound source of a sound source built-in VDP 4160a of a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, which will be described later, and a sound source built-in VDP 4160a. And a track number for designating which of the plurality of tracks in the internal sound source to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  The various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be read directly from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and executed, or may be copied to various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later when the power is turned on. Some are read out and executed. Also, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, or when power is supplied to various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later. In some cases, the copied data is read out.

  The peripheral control ROM 4150b includes one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, for correcting the brightness of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the usage time of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. A brightness correction program is included. This luminance correction program corrects a decrease in luminance due to aging of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is mounted with an LED type backlight. The date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, the current date and time, luminance setting information, and the like are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165 described later, and the acquired luminance setting information is obtained based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b in advance. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. It includes the set brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. For example, the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on and the current date and time are included. Thus, if six months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and the brightness is obtained. When the backlight of the game-board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on with the brightness of the LED included in the setting information being 75%, the correction information acquired for the 75% is used. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 80%, which is further increased by 5%. If 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the LED included in the brightness setting information is acquired. When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on at a luminance of 75%, the luminance setting is made such that the luminance becomes 85%, which is further added by 10% which is the correction information acquired to the 75%. The backlight of the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the information, and the backlight is turned on.

[7-2-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 13, a peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a stores a backup target that exclusively stores, among various information updated by execution of various control programs, information to be backed up. A management target work area 4150ca, a backup first area 4150cb and a backup second area 4150cc for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, and a peripheral control ROM 4150b. Various control program copy areas 4150cd for exclusively storing copied various control programs, various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. A various control data copy area 4150ce for exclusively storing the copied data, and a backup non-management target for exclusively storing, among the various information updated by executing the various control programs, those not to be backed up. A work area 4150cf is provided.

  Note that when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (including a momentary power failure or a power recovery due to a power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 4150cf and is cleared to zero, Regarding the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, a power-on command from the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 15) starts RAM clear effect. (For example, to instruct the start of an effect when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 11 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on). ) Is cleared to zero.

  The backup management target work area 4150ca is effect information (various information updated in the peripheral control unit regular processing executed each time a V blank signal is input from the liquid crystal and sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the sound control unit 4160 described later). Bank0 (1fr) that exclusively stores 1fr) as a backup target, and effect information (1ms), which is various information updated in a peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt described below occurs. Bank 0 (1 ms) that is exclusively stored as a backup target. Here, the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit indicating the size of a storage area for storing various information. Subsequent “0” means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area from the backup first area 4150cb to the backup second area 4150cc, which will be described later, are the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. “(1fr)” indicates that when the sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the peripheral control MPU 4150a Is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a indicating that the screen data can be received from the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Therefore, each time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame) Each time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, it is appended to “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” (effect information (1fr) and effects described later). The same applies to the backup information (1fr).) "(1 ms)" will be described later. As described above, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated, and therefore, “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” are respectively appended. (The effect information (1 ms) and the effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, a reception command storage area 4150cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and a schedule data storage area 4150cae. Are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, game board side emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 4. Is set in the transmission data storage area 4150cab for the LED on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side. Lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting for a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5 are stored in the storage area. This is a storage area in which door-side emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set. In a reception command storage area 4150cac, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 are received, and the received various commands are stored. The RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad includes an RTC control unit 4165 (for an RTC 4165a described later). This is a storage area in which various information obtained from the TC built-in RAM 4165aa) is set. The schedule data storage area 4150cae corresponds to the received command based on the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). This is a storage area in which various schedule data is set. In the schedule data storage area 4150cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 4150b to the various control data copy area 4150ce are read and set. Other schedule data are read directly from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Some are set.

  Bank0 (1 ms) is provided with a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, an operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, and the like. Have been. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 is stored. The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is used to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 4. This is a storage area in which the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. The movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah is provided in the game board 4 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 4. An operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150ca, which is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies is set. Includes various kinds of information (for example, the operation unit 400 receives the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405, etc., based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400). This is a storage area in which rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401 and operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, which are created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided, are set.

  It should be noted that the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa of Bank0 (1fr) and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf of Bank0 (1ms). The motor drive board-side transmission data storage area 4150cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

  In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, when the peripheral control unit regular processing described later is executed, the game board side emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the game board side light-emitting data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. Each time the process is executed, the game board side light-emitting data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150ca in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, the previous peripheral area is set. When the control unit regular process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab stores the door-side emission data STL in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab when the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. −DAT is set, and when the next peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, the door-side emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. The door-side emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab each time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. You. When the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, for example, when the door-side emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab in the current peripheral control unit regular processing, When the previous peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the processing proceeds based on the door-side emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. Has become.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf stores a door in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. −DAT is set, and each time the 1 ms timer interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit is executed, the door data is stored in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. The motor drive data STM-DAT is set alternately. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the present peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. When set, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed is set. The processing proceeds based on the processing.

  When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmit data storage area 4150cag. When the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board-side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board-side transmission data storage area 4150cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board-side motor drive data SM-DAT is set alternately in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board-side transmission data storage area 4150cag. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. Sometimes, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board-side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board-side transmission data storage area 4150cag. It has become.

  Next, the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc for exclusively storing a copy of presentation information, which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, will be described. In the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, two pairs each having two banks as one pair are managed as one page. The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, the effect information (1 ms) which is the content copied at high speed to the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank 0 (1 ms). When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated as the effect backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control DMA controller 41 is stored in the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc. It is copied to the high speed by 0ac. The consistency of one page is determined based on whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, the backup first area 4150cb is managed as one page, with Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in the bank 0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, every time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated, every time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the data to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined based on whether the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  The backup second area 4150 cc is managed as one page with two pairs of Bank3 (1 fr) and Bank4 (1 fr) as one pair, and Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in the bank 0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, every time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated, every time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the data at high speed to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms). The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 4150cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), for a total of two pairs. It is an area for managing as a page, and the backup second area 4150 cc has two pairs, Bank3 (1 fr) and Bank4 (1 fr) as one pair, and Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) as one pair. This area is managed as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc.

  In the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as the effect backup information (1fr) as the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame). Every time the regular processing is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1 ms). The effect information (1 ms) is a backup first area 4150 cb and a backup second area 4150 cc each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs as effect backup information (1 ms). Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 4150Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 4150Ac are common. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr) and the effect information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-2-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes a backup management target work area 4150da for exclusively storing backup information among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 4150db and a backup second area 4150dc for exclusively storing a copy of various types of information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da are provided. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d include a power-on command from the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 15) when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (including a momentary power outage or a power recovery due to a power outage). The instruction to start the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, to instruct the start of the effect when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 11 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, or the like) Is not cleared to zero. This is completely different from the above-described point that the backup management work area 4150ca, the first backup area 4150cb, and the second backup area 4150cc of the peripheral control RAM 4150c are cleared to zero. When the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. It is supposed to be. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 in accordance with the screen of the setting mode, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d (for example, a history of occurrence of a big hit game state, etc.) .) While the contents can be cleared, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. Also in this point, the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d are completely different.

  The backup management work area 4150da is used for effect information (SRAM), which is various information continued over the day (for example, information for managing a history of occurrence of a big hit game state or for managing a special effect flag). Information) is stored as a backup target exclusively for Bank 0 (SRAM). Here, the name of Bank 0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, “Bank” is a minimum management unit that indicates the size of a storage area for storing various information, and “Bank” is Subsequent “0” means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area from a backup first area 4150db to a backup second area 4150dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. “(SRAM)” is “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3” because various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a is to be backed up. , And "Bank 4" (the effect information (SRAM) and the effect backup information (SRAM), which will be described later, are also used in the same sense).

  Next, the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc for exclusively storing the effect information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da, will be described. The backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc are managed with one pair of two banks as one page. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the data to the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined based on whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 4150db, one pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) every time peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The page is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined based on whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

  In the second backup area 4150dc, one pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The page is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined based on whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 4150db is an area for managing one pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one page, and the backup second area. 4150 dc is an area for managing one pair as one page, with Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) as one pair. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc.

[7-2-2. LCD and sound control unit]
Drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, and the music and sound effects from the speakers contained in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130 provided on the door frame 5 As shown in FIG. 12, the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 that performs sound control incorporate a sound source for performing sound control such as music and sound effects (hereinafter, referred to as “built-in sound source”). A VDP (Video Display Processor) 4160a with a built-in sound source for performing drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, and the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 are displayed. A liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b for storing various sound data such as music and sound effects in addition to various character data of the screen to be displayed; Includes the audio data transmission IC4160c to be transmitted towards the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 Al of music and sound effects and the like as audio data. In the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b, the suggestion display object image data used for displaying the suggestion display object for urging the user to operate the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the operation unit 400, the main body frame as viewed from the player The body frame back image data used for displaying the body frame back image in which the position of each part on the back of 3 is visible, the service mode screen image data used for displaying the service mode screen, and the break timer setting used for displaying the break timer setting screen Screen image data and screen image data during a break used for displaying a screen during a break are stored.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. 4150cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the first screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various types of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. After being extracted from the control data copy area 4150ce and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the schedule data is triggered by the input of a V blank signal described later. According to the screen generation schedule data set in the storage area 4150cae, the next screen data following the first screen data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c to incorporate the sound source. Output to VDP 4160a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, converts the screen data arranged in time series into the screen generation schedule data every time a V blank signal is input. Then, the data is output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a one by one from the top screen data.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a transfers the first sound command data of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. The extracted sound command data is set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the first sound command data of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral control ROM 4150ca. After extracting from the various control data copy area 4150ce of the RAM 4150c and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the schedule data storage is triggered by the input of the V blank signal. The next sound command data following the first sound command data is extracted from the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control unit 4150 according to the sound generation schedule data set in the area 4150cae. Output to built-in VDP 4160a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data and the V blank signal according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae. In each case, the data is output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a one by one from the head sound command data.

[7-2-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, in addition to the above-described built-in sound source, the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source, as shown in FIG. The side character data and the upper plate side character data are extracted to create sprite data, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is generated. A VRAM for performing the operation is also provided (hereinafter referred to as “built-in VRAM”). The sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 out of the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 from the channel CH1 and outputs the image data for the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. By outputting the image data from the channel CH2 to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 are synchronized. In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a becomes: Based on the input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b to create sprite data, which is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 for one screen (1). Frame data) is generated in the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and The image data for the liquid crystal display device 470 is shifted upward from the channel CH2. And outputs to the side the liquid crystal display device 470. In other words, “screen data for one screen (one frame)” refers to one screen (one frame) of drawing data to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. The data to be generated above.

  The sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and also outputs image data for the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 from the channel CH2. When output to the dish-side liquid crystal display device 470, a V blank signal is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 4150a indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be accepted. In the present embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a later-described peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process when the V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output slightly varies depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. Further, even in a manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 4140 on which the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may be slightly changed.

  The VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source employs a frame buffer system. This “frame buffer method” means that one screen (one frame) of drawing data to be drawn on the screens of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM). In this system, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470.

  Further, when the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a based on a command from the main control board 4100, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a stores the music stored in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 4160b as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as sound and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, the sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the tracks according to the track numbers specified in the sound command data and used according to the output channel numbers. The output channels are set, and the music and sound effects flowing from the speakers housed in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130 provided on the door frame 5 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. .

  Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of a track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a include effect sounds such as music and sound effects. Sound data and a sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, and sound data and the sound volume of a notification sound for notifying a clerk of a hall or the like of occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or misconduct with the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is incorporated. Specifically, for the effect sound, the above-described board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a is set as a sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob of the volume 4140a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 to shift to a setting mode described later.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of a channel to be output. A plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source include a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is Actually, it is amplified to a master volume value which is a volume flowing from the speaker contained in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5, and the amplified effect sound is serialized as audio data. The data is output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the volume is amplified to the master volume value, so that the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 is amplified. Are set so that the volume flowing from the speaker housed in the door frame 5 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 becomes the allowable maximum volume. Specifically, for the production sound, among a plurality of tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used are The set volume control volume 4140a is combined with the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob, and the volume of the combined effect sound is actually transmitted to the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3. Amplified to a master volume value that is a volume flowing from the speaker to be housed and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5, serialize the amplified effect sound and output it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160 c, and Indicates the sound data of the notification sound embedded in the track used and the sound of the notification sound embedded in the track used. And the maximum volume without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound. Amplify to a master volume value which becomes a volume flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, and serialize the amplified notification sound to make audio data as audio data. Output to the transmission IC 4160c.

  Here, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 occurs or the pachinko gaming machine 1 Briefly describing the control of playing a notification sound to notify a hall clerk of fraudulent acts, first, forcibly set the sub-volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated to mute, and this production sound is incorporated. The sound data of the track, the sub-volume value set to mute the sound, the sound data of the track incorporating the notification sound, and the sub-volume value set to the maximum volume of the notification sound are synthesized. The volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually compared with the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. Amplified to a master volume value as the volume flowing from 130, and outputs the amplified effect sound and alarm sound as an audio data to the audio data transmission IC4160c Serialize.

  That is, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the sound does not flow from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5, but the effect sound is generated as described above. Progressing according to schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the speaker contained in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). After the elapse of the period, the volume of the effect sound that has progressed in accordance with the sound generation schedule data that has been compulsorily set to mute until now is equal to the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. It is set again as a volume value (at this time, if the operation is shifted to the setting mode by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 and adjusted, the sub- Volume value), the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the body frame 3, and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. So that the flow from mosquitoes 130.

  As described above, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, the failure of the pachinko gaming machine 1 occurs and the pachinko gaming machine 1 When the notification sound flows to notify the clerk of the hall, etc., of the wrongdoing to the player, the volume of the production sound is muted, and the notification sound is provided on the speaker and the door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3. Although the sound produced from the speaker 130 has flowed according to the sound generation schedule data, the sound produced from the speaker 130 is stored in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 after a predetermined period of time. When the sound stops flowing from the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5, the production sound does not start flowing again from where the notification sound started flowing. So that the start flowing again from where the notification sound is beginning to flow to proceed according to the schedule data for generating sound until after the lapse of a predetermined period of time.

[7-2-2b. LCD and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 14, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b is used to draw in the game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and to draw in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. , And various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are stored in advance.

[7-2-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When serialized audio data is input from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the audio data transmission IC 4160c transmits the right audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data in which the right audio data is a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data in which the left audio data is a plus signal and a minus signal. Thereby, music and sound effects matched to various effects are stereo-reproduced from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5.

  Note that the audio data transmission IC 4160c outputs audio data as serial data of a differential system between the right and left sides of the board from the peripheral control board 4140 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, so that, for example, a plus signal of left audio data, Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component riding on the plus signal and the noise component riding on the minus signal are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 into one left audio data, Since noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-2-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 12, the RTC control unit 4165 that stores calendar information for specifying the year, month, and day and time information for specifying hours, minutes, and seconds is configured around an RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa for holding calendar information and time information (hereinafter referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa"). The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is employed in this embodiment) as a drive power supply and a backup power supply for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1) without supplying any power from the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1). Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold the calendar information and the time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets the calendar information and time information in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the above-described peripheral control RAM 4150c, and stores the acquired calendar information and time information in the RTC information. The effect based on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 can be developed. As such an effect, for example, on December 25, the screen of a Christmas tree or a reindeer is unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, or on New Year's Eve, the New Year countdown is performed. A screen to be executed is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  Note that the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds not only calendar information and time information but also LED luminance setting information when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 has an LED-type backlight. I have. The peripheral control MPU 4150a obtains the luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the luminance of the backlight by PWM control when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is mounted as an LED type. . The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and the currently set game. The brightness of the LED which is a backlight of the panel side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is included.

  The RTC built-in RAM 4165aa includes calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information, as well as calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information as information on the date, hour, minute, and second that is first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date and time information is also stored.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a performs ON / OFF control of the backlight or ON only when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is a cold cathode tube type. It is supposed to.

  Various types of information such as calendar information, time information, luminance setting information, and input date and time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa are set in the production line of the gaming machine maker. In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the date when the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on is inputted. It is set to the date and time of manufacture, which is the hour, minute, and second.

  As described above, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa includes, in addition to the calendar information and the time information, the luminance setting information and the input date and time information when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is mounted with the LED type. The information that needs to be maintained can be stored and held independently of the model information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a probability of a big hit game state occurring at a low probability or a high probability).

  In addition, depending on the environment of the hall in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, the luminance setting information and the like stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright with the backlight luminance of the gaming panel side liquid crystal display device 1900 set at the date and time of manufacture depending on the environment. Or too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, the mode shifts to the setting mode, and the luminance of the backlight can be adjusted to a predetermined luminance. After turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are operated during the period in which the demonstration is being performed by the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900 in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. The screen is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. The calendar information and the time information are reset by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of the setting mode, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is set to a desired value. Or adjust the brightness. The adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the above-described brightness correction program, and when the gaming panel side liquid crystal display device 1900 has an LED-type backlight, the gaming panel side liquid crystal display device 1900 The luminance decrease due to the aging of the display device 1900 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 4150a obtains the input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, and the calendar information and the time to specify the date. The current date and time is specified by acquiring the time information specifying the minute and second, and the range of the brightness of the LED as the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 from 100% to 70% is adjusted in 5% steps. Brightness setting information including the brightness adjustment information for performing the setting and the brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 which is currently set. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b.

  For example, based on the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on and the current date and time, if six months have already passed from the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on, the 75% The brightness of the backlight of the game-board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 80% further increased by 5%, which is the correction information acquired for. If 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on, the peripheral control ROM 41 When the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from 0b and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on with the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information being 75%, the 75% The luminance of the backlight of the game-board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance becomes 85% further increased by 10% which is the correction information acquired. Light.

  Note that the current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, or the peripheral date and time described later. The current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140, and the current date and time may be specified.

[7-2-4. Volume control volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 4140a is used to rotate the knob for controlling the volume of music or sound effect from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 by turning the knob. By doing so, it can be adjusted. As described above, the volume of the volume adjustment volume 4140a is variable when the knob is rotated, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak is connected to the knob. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into 1024 values from value 0 to value 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the value of 1024 levels is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. The volume is set to mute for the board volume 0, the maximum volume is set for the board volume 6, and the volume is set so that the volume increases from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (sound source built-in VDP 4160a) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volumes 0 to 6, and the speaker and the door frame 5 are provided in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. Music and sound effects are played from the speaker 130.

  In this way, music and sound effects can be played from the speakers contained in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130 provided on the door frame 5 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob. . Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a salesclerk of a hall or the like of occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or an illegal act on the pachinko gaming machine 1, Inform the player about the game effects (for example, an announcement that the screen displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is more powerful or that the player is likely to shift to a game state advantageous to the player). Sound from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, but the notification sound and the notification sound are made by rotating the knob. The sound flow from the mute to the maximum sound volume is controlled by a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (with a sound source built-in VDP4). So that the it can be adjusted by controlling the 60a).

  The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-described seven-stage board volume, and can smoothly change from mute to the maximum volume. Thus, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume control volume 4140a to set the volume to a low level, the speaker and the door accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 are set. Although the effect sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 130 provided in the frame 5 is reduced, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is malfunctioning or when the player is performing wrongdoing, the sound volume is large (this embodiment). In the mode, the notification sound set to (maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the sound volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk in the hall from becoming difficult to notice a malfunction or a player's misconduct due to the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to disturb the music and sound effects, while In addition to music and sound effects by increasing the volume at which the sound is played, the screen developed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is rendered more powerful, and is advantageous to the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of transition to the gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 and the pressing By operating the operation unit 405, the mode is shifted to the setting mode, and the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted. After turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are operated during the period in which the demonstration is being performed by the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900 in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. The screen is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of the setting mode, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a from an analog value to a digital value, and converts the converted value to a digital value. By adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, the value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased. . The adjusted sound volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the internal sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, and the effect sound is updated. , But is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound or the notification sound.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of the music or the sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are controlled. There are two methods of adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation. Since the volume control volume 4140a is mounted on the peripheral control board 4140, it is necessary to keep the main frame 3 open from the outer frame 2. Then, it is the hall clerk who can turn the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. However, the sound volume adjusted by the hall clerk may be small for the player and difficult to hear the music and sound effects, or may be large for the player and feel noisy for the music and sound effects. Therefore, within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are operated, and a customer waiting state is set, and a demonstration by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed. When the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the operation is being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Thereby, the player can adjust the volume of the music and the sound effect to a desired volume. Therefore, when it is difficult to hear the music and the sound effect because the volume adjusted by the clerk of the hall is small, it is difficult to hear the music and the sound effect. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 to increase the volume to a desired level, and when the clerk of the hall feels loudly and feels loud music and sound effects, the operation unit 400 The volume can be reduced to a desired volume by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not play a game for a predetermined period of time, enters a customer waiting state, and repeatedly performs a demonstration using the gaming board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 (for example, ten times). ), The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and playing a game last time is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. Accordingly, when the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and playing the game last time feels that the volume adjusted by the player is low and it is difficult to hear the music and sound effects, this time, A player sitting and playing a game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 to increase the volume up to a desired volume, and previously sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to play the game If the player who performed the game feels loudly the volume adjusted by the player and feels the music and sound effects noisy, the player who sits on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and performs a game this time uses the dial operating unit of the operation unit 400. The volume can be reduced to a desired volume by operating the 401 or the pressing operation unit 405.

[8. Various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 15 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and FIG. 16 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. .

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, a status indicating the type of a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), And a mode indicating an effect variation having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In addition, these various commands include an effect-related command for controlling an effect performed by the peripheral control board 4140, a notification-related command for notifying occurrence of an error, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. 16, various commands are related to special figure 1 tuning effect related, special figure 2 tuning effect related, big hit related, power-on, ordinary figure synchronized effect related, ordinary power acting related, information display, state Classified into indications and others.

[8-1. Special Figure 1 Synchronization production related)
The special figure 1 tuning effect relation is based on the detection signal from the upper starting port switch 3022 shown in FIG. 11, and the division includes the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. 11 as shown in FIG. The upper special symbol display 1185 is composed of commands such as special figure 1 change pattern, special figure 1 symbol type, special figure 1 tuning effect end, and change state designation. To these various commands, “A * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is specifically shown in FIG. 15).

  The special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is for instructing the start of the special figure synchronizing effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special figure 1 design type command is for specifying the outlier, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. The special figure 1 tuning effect end command is for instructing the end of the special figure 1 tuning effect, and the changing state designation command is a game state (high probability state, time saving This is a command indicating a game state. The change state designation command has a value corresponding to the game state and the mode value, and is transmitted at the start of the change or when the game state is switched. Other special figure 1 tuning effect-related commands include a special figure 1 change type command (status “A3H”, mode “01H to 10H”) for specifying a change type corresponding to a change pattern.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is transmitted at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation, the special figure 1 pattern type command is transmitted immediately after the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command, and the special figure 1 tuning is performed. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 fluctuation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is determined). Further, the fluctuation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special figure 1 symbol type command. The special figure 1 change type command is transmitted after the special figure 1 change pattern command. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing described later.

[8-2. Special Figure 2 Synchronized production related]
The special figure 2 entrainment effect-related is based on the detection signal from the lower starting port switch 2109 shown in FIG. 11, and the division includes the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. 11 as shown in FIG. The lower special symbol display 1186 is composed of a special figure 2 variation pattern, a special figure 2 symbol type, and a command named special figure 2 tuning effect end. To these various commands, “B * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is specifically shown in FIG. 15).

  The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is for instructing the start of the special figure synchronizing effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special figure 2 pattern type command is for specifying the outlier, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. The special figure 2 tuning effect end command instructs the end of the special figure 2 tuning effect. Further, similarly to the special figure 1, a special figure 2 fluctuation type command (status “B3H”, mode “01H to 10H”) for specifying the fluctuation type corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is included.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is transmitted at the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation, and the special figure 2 pattern type command is transmitted immediately after the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern, and the special figure 2 tuning effect The end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is determined). Further, as described above, similarly to the case of the special figure 1, in the case of the special figure 2, the change state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special figure 2 symbol type command. The special figure 2 change type command is transmitted after the special figure 2 change pattern command. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[8-3. Jackpot-related]
As shown in FIG. 15, the categories of jackpot-related are, as shown in FIG. , A small hit open display, a small hit count display, and a small hit ending. To these various commands, “C * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is, for example, as shown in FIG. 15).

  The big hit opening command instructs the start of the big hit opening, and the big win opening 1 opening N-th display command starts during the opening of the big winning opening 1 of the 1st to 16th rounds (the attacker unit 2100 shown in FIG. 8). The special winning opening 2103 is instructed during opening of the N-th round of the special winning opening 2103 or the opening of the special winning opening 1 is executed. 2103 round). The large winning opening 1 count display command indicates that 0 to 10 counts have been counted (detected by the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 11). The number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening 2103) is transmitted. Is intended to instruct the start, big hit symbol display command is for instructing the big hit symbol information display.

  Although only one type of status and mode is set in the big hit ending command shown in FIG. 15, a mode value may be set according to the game state after the big hit. For example, when the gaming state after the big hit is the low probability non-time saving game state, the mode value is set to “01H”, and when the gaming state after the big hit is the high probability time saving game state, the mode value is “04H”. The ending may be designated on the main control board 4100 side by setting or the like. Further, a plurality of endings may be designated even if the gaming state after the big hit is the same. For example, when the gaming state is a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, it is difficult for the player to grasp the winning probability of the special lottery, so that the main control board 4100 side has a high-probability ending or a low-ending ending. May be specified. At this time, the ending may be selected on the peripheral control board 4140 side without specifying the ending with the big hit ending command.

  The small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is started during the small hit opening (while the small winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is open or small at the time of the small hit). The small hit count display command is a small hit medium and large winning opening winning effect (in the case where a game ball entering the big winning opening 2103 during the small hit is detected by the count switch 2110). Effect), and the small hit ending command instructs the start of the small hit ending.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot opening, and the big win opening 1 opening N-th display command is issued when the big winning opening 1 of the 1st to 16th rounds is opened (the big hit of the attacker unit 2100). The special winning opening 1 closing display command is transmitted at the time of opening the N-th round of the special winning opening 2103, and is transmitted when the special winning opening 1 is closed (the closing of the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100). The mouth 1 count display command is issued when the special winning opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the special winning opening 1 (when the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened, and when the game ball entering the special winning opening 2103 is counted by the count switch). The jackpot ending command is transmitted when the jackpot ending is started. Transmitted, big hit symbol display command is sent during the special winning opening open (when opening the special winning opening 2103 attacker unit 2100).

  The small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is transmitted at the time of the small hit opening (at the time of the small hit, when the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened). The hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning a small hit medium-high winning opening (when a game ball entering the big winning opening 2103 during the small hit is detected by the count switch 2110), and the small hit ending command is Sent at the start of the small hit ending. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[8-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 15, the section of power-on includes various commands named power-on. In this power-on command, “D * H” is assigned as the status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is, for example, as shown in FIG. 15).

  The power-on command is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, for instructing the start of the effect when the operation switch of the payout control board 4110 is operated when the power is turned on). is there).

  The transmission timing of the power-on command is transmitted at times other than the RAM clear and the RAM clear when the main control board is powered on. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, when power is restored from a power failure or momentary power failure, a main control-side power-on process described later is executed, and around step S92 in the main control-side timer interrupt process. A power-on command is transmitted in the control board command transmission process.

[8-5. Related to zuzu productions]
The general figure synchronizing effect-related is based on the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. 11, and is divided into the normal pattern display of the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. 11 as shown in FIG. It is composed of commands related to the box 1189, such as start of general figure synchronizing effect, specification of general pattern effect, end of general figure synchronizing effect, and specification of state at the time of change. To these various commands, "E * H" is assigned as the status and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is, for example, as shown in FIG. 15).

  The general figure synchronizing effect start command is for instructing the general figure synchronizing effect start with the effect pattern specified in the mode. The general figure synchronizing effect end command instructs the general figure synchronizing effect end, and the fluctuation state designation command instructs the probability and the time reduction state.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the general figure synchronizing effect start command is transmitted at the start of the normal symbol 1 change, the general symbol designating command is transmitted immediately after the general symbol synchronizing effect starts, and the general figure synchronizing effect end command is Is transmitted when the normal symbol fluctuation time elapses (when the normal symbol is determined), and the fluctuation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the ordinary symbol omission information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[8-6. Ordinary electric production related)
The ordinary electric production effect-related relates to a pair of movable pieces 2106 shown in FIG. 8 which are opened and closed by driving the starting port solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. The command is composed of commands called opening per figure, open display of ordinary electric power, and ending per ordinary figure. To these various commands, “F * H” is assigned as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is, for example, as shown in FIG. 15).

  The opening command per day is a command to start the opening per day, and the opening command for opening the day is started during the opening of the day. The ending command per ordinary figure is an instruction to start the ending per ordinary figure.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per ordinary figure is transmitted at the start of opening per ordinary figure, and the opening command for ordinary power is indicated at the time of opening the ordinary power (when the pair of movable pieces 2106 is driven by the starting port solenoid 2105 by driving the starting port solenoid 2105). (When expanding in the left-right direction), and the ending per-figure-ending command is transmitted when the ending per-figure-end is started. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[8-7. Notification]
As shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. 16, the notification display section is composed of commands named winning award display, connection abnormality display, disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door open, and door close. ing. To these various commands, “6 * H” is assigned as a status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is, for example, shown in FIGS. 15 and 16).

  The winning prize abnormal display command indicates that a game ball enters the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 when the player wins the special winning opening other than during the big hit (during operation of the condition device), and the game ball is inserted. (When the count switch 2110 detects), the start of the prize abnormality notification is instructed. The connection abnormality display command is, for example, an electric connection in a path between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. When there is an abnormality, it is instructed to start the connection abnormality notification. The disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display command includes, for example, the main control board 4100, the upper start switch 3022, the lower start switch 2109, the count switch 2110, and the like. When a disconnection or short circuit occurs in the electrical connection of the unit, it indicates the start of disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display. Display command is for instructing the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 11.

  In addition, the door opening command is used to open the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 based on a detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch input via the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. When the door frame is closed, the door frame closing command is issued, and the door frame closing command is used to close the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch. If it is in the state, the instruction to end the door opening notification is issued. On the other hand, based on a detection signal (opening signal) from the body frame opening switch input via the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. When the main frame 3 is in the opened state, the main frame opening command is issued. The main frame closing command is used to close the main frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal from the main frame opening switch. In this state, the end of the body frame release notification is instructed.

  As a transmission timing of these various commands, a winning prize display command is transmitted when a big prize hole is won other than during a big hit (during operation of the condition device). The command is transmitted when there is no ACK response (ACK signal) from the payout control board 4110 at the time of sending the command to the controller. Are transmitted when any one of them is disconnected or short-circuited, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is detected. The door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch), The closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch). The body frame opening command is transmitted when the body frame opening is detected (when the body frame 3 is open to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch), The close command is transmitted when the main body frame is closed (when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[8-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 16, the division of the status display is composed of commands called frame state 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), error release navigation command (corresponding to an error release command), and frame state 2 command. I have. To these various commands, “7 * H” is assigned as a status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is, for example, as shown in FIG. 16).

  The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 4110, respectively, and a detailed description thereof will be described later. . Note that the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives “7 * H” as shown in FIG. 16 when receiving the frame state 1 command, the error canceling navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110. The command is set as a status, and the received command is set as a mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 4100a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, the main control MPU 4100a adds “7 * H” as additional information to the received commands. Thus, the command is formed into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The shaped frame state 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the frame state changes, and during error release navigation, the error release navigation command is transmitted during the error release navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted when the power is restored. , And when the frame state changes. In addition, these shaped frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[8-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 16, the test-related section is composed of various commands named “test”. This test command is assigned “8 * H” as the status and “** H” as the mode (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number) And is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, as shown in FIG. 16).

  The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 4140 (for example, the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame shown in FIG. Inspection of various substrates such as the decorative drive amplifier substrate 194).

  The test command is transmitted at a timing other than the RAM clear and the RAM clear when the main control board is powered on. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, when the power is restored from a power failure or a momentary power failure, and when the operation switch of the payout control board 4110 is operated, the main control-side power-on processing described later is performed. The test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing that is executed.

[8-10. Others]
The other divisions include, as shown in FIG. 16, a start opening prize, a fluctuation shortening operation end designation, a high probability end designation, a special symbol 1 memory, a special symbol 2 memory, a normal symbol memory, a special symbol 1 memory prefetching effect, and It is composed of a command named special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect. To these various commands, “9 * H” and “5 * H” are assigned as the status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” indicates a specific number). , Which is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is, for example, as shown in FIG. 16).

  The starting opening winning command is for instructing the start of a starting opening winning effect. When a game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 based on a detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022, or the lower starting opening When a game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 based on a detection signal from the switch 2109, an instruction to win the starting port is issued. The fluctuation shortening operation end designation command instructs a state transition from the fluctuation shortening operation state to the fluctuation reduction non-operation state. The high probability end designation command instructs the state transition from the high probability state to the low probability state. The special symbol 1 storage command is a special symbol 1 hold 0 to 4 (a game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 shown in FIG. 8 and the special symbol display 1185 on the function display board 1191 displays the variation of the special symbol). The number of balls that have not been used yet (number of reserves). The special symbol 2 storage command is a special symbol 2 hold 0 to 4 (a game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 shown in FIG. 8 and the special symbol display 1186 is displayed on the lower special symbol display 1186 of the function display board 1191. The number of balls that have not been used yet (number of reserves). The normal symbol storage command is a normal symbol 1 reserved 0 to 4 (a game ball passes through the gate portion 2350 shown in FIG. 8 and is still used for the variable display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191. The number of balls not held (number of reserves).

  The special symbol 1 reserve number designation command is transmitted when the number of special symbol 1 operation reserve balls increases (when the number of reserves increases when a game ball enters the upper starting port 2101). The special symbol 2 reservation number designation command is transmitted when the number of special symbol 2 operation reservation balls increases (when the number of reservations increases when a game ball enters the lower starting port 2102). The special symbol 1 reserved number designation command and the special symbol 2 reserved number designation command are prefetched when the upper 4 bits of the mode value are “1”, and prefetched when the upper bit of the mode value is “0”. Represents none. When the special symbol 1 hold number designation command is prefetching, before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the special symbol display on the special display 1185 on the function display board 1191, the special symbol is read ahead and the special symbol is reserved. An instruction to start a look-ahead effect for notifying a notice of a display result by the upper special symbol display 1185 based on 1 hold is provided. Similarly, when the special symbol 2 reservation number designation command is prefetching, the prefetching is performed before the special symbol 2 reservation is used for the special symbol change display on the special symbol display 1186 below the function display board 1191. An instruction to start a look-ahead effect for notifying a notice of a display result by the lower special symbol display 1186 based on the special symbol 2 reservation is given. The symbol type prefetch command, the variation pattern prefetch command, and the variation type prefetch command are transmitted when transmitting the special symbol reservation number designation command. It should be noted that these commands may be transmitted only when the special symbol reservation number designation command is prefetched.

  The symbol type pre-reading command is used to designate a miss at the time of pre-reading, a specific jackpot, and a non-specific jackpot. The variation pattern prefetch command specifies an effect pattern (variation pattern) in a mode at the time of prefetching. The variation type prefetch command specifies the variation type in the mode at the time of prefetch.

  The ordinary symbol type pre-reading effect command is read in advance by the ordinary symbol display 1189 based on the ordinary symbol reservation before the ordinary symbol hold is used for the variable display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191. This is for instructing the start of a pre-reading effect for notifying a notice of the display result. In addition, as for the ordinary symbol, an ordinary symbol storage command, an ordinary symbol type prefetch command, and an ordinary symbol variation pattern prefetch command corresponding to prefetching may be prepared. Unless otherwise specified, the term "look-ahead" refers to the look-ahead of a special symbol.

  In addition, when performing the pre-reading determination, as described later, the same processing as at the start of the fluctuation is performed to generate a command including an effect pattern or a symbol. Since it becomes impossible for the peripheral control board 4140 that has received the command to distinguish between the start of the change and the winning of the starting opening, only the status value is changed with the same mode value.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting port winning command is a starting port winning command (when a game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 based on a detection signal from the upper starting port switch 3022, or a lower starting port switch). When a game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 based on the detection signal from 2109), the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 and the door frame shown in FIG. 5 is mainly transmitted by voice to notify the user of the change, and the command to specify the end of the fluctuation shortening operation is performed at the end of the suspension period after the fluctuation has been determined after the reduction of the specified number of fluctuations has been completed. After). The high-probability-end designation command is transmitted at the end of the stop period (after the elapse of the stoppage period) after the change is determined after the number of high probabilities has been exhausted in the case of “high-probability N times”.

  The special symbol 1 storage command is used for changing the number of special symbol 1 operation reserve balls (the game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 and the special symbol display 1185 on the function display board 1191 is still used for the special symbol change display. In the state where there is a number of reserves not yet used, when a game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 and the number of reserves increases, or when the number of reserves is increased, the upper special symbol display 1185 is used to display a special symbol change. Sent when the number of suspensions decreases). The special symbol 2 storage command is used when the number of special symbol 2 operation-reserved balls changes (when a game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 and the special symbol indicator 1186 on the lower display of the function display board 1191 changes the special symbol). In a state where there is no pending number, when a game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 and the retained number increases, or when the reserved number is increased, the lower special symbol display 1186 is used to display a special symbol from the retained number. Sent when the number of suspensions decreases). The ordinary symbol storage command is used when the number of ordinary symbol 1 operation pending balls changes (the number of pending balls not yet used for the variation display of ordinary symbols on the ordinary symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191 when the game ball passes through the gate 2350). In a certain state, when the game ball further passes through the gate unit 2350 and the number of reserves increases, or when the number of reserves is reduced from the number of reserves by using the normal symbol display 1189 for the variable display of the normal symbol. ). As with the special symbol, a normal symbol reservation number designation command that changes depending on the presence or absence of pre-reading may be transmitted for the ordinary symbol. As with the special symbol, the presence or absence of prefetching is indicated by hitting the upper 4 bits of the mode value.

  The normal symbol type pre-reading effect command is transmitted when the number of the ordinary symbol 1 operation reserved balls increases (when the number of reserved balls increases after the game balls pass through the gate 2350). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

  Further, instead of the normal symbol type prefetch effect command, the normal symbol variation pattern and the standard symbol type prefetch command, such as the normal symbol variation pattern prefetch command, may be separately transmitted to the normal symbol variation pattern and the standard symbol type prefetch command. . In the present embodiment, the normal symbol type pre-reading effect command is transmitted immediately after the transmission of the normal symbol reservation number designation command.However, it is not necessary to limit the command to the normal symbol type pre-reading effect command. It may be transmitted prior to the symbol hold number designation command. The same applies to the case of transmitting a prefetch command relating to a normal symbol variation pattern (ordinary symbol variation pattern prefetch command) and a symbol type of a normal symbol (normal symbol type prefetch command) instead of the normal symbol type prefetch effect command.

  By the way, as described above, the starting opening winning command is a starting opening winning (when a game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 based on a detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022, or from the lower starting opening switch 2109). (When a game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 based on the detection signal of), the speaker mainly provided by the speaker contained in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5 mainly outputs the sound. However, how the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 12 uses the start-up winning command may vary depending on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to sound notification from the speaker contained in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 also monitors for the presence or absence of fraud. It is a specification that it is also used for. On the other hand, in other pachinko gaming machines, the peripheral control board 4140 simply receives the start-up winning command, and the speaker contained in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. There is also a specification that does not notify by voice from 130.

  Further, in addition to the above-mentioned command, for example, a gaming machine related information command for transmitting gaming machine related information including model information of the gaming machine may be transmitted. The gaming machine related information command is transmitted from the main board to the peripheral board as a predetermined opportunity. The peripheral control board 4140 that has received the gaming machine related information command can execute effect control according to the model information included in the gaming machine related information. For example, the main control board is configured to always transmit the normal symbol type prefetch effect command to the peripheral control board 4140 when there is a model that executes the prefetch effect based on the normal symbol hold and a model that does not execute the prefetch effect. If the peripheral control board 4140 determines that the model is capable of executing the prefetching effect based on the normal symbol hold based on the gaming machine related information command, the normal symbol type prefetching effect transmitted from the main control substrate 4100 is performed. While the command is processed as a valid command to enable the general-purpose prefetching effect, if it is determined that the model does not allow the general-purpose prefetching effect, the command is discarded as an invalid command. With this configuration, it is possible to standardize the processing in the main control board 4100 even when there is a model that can execute the pre-reading effect and a model that cannot.

  Note that the main control board 4100 may transmit the gaming machine related information command at a predetermined timing such as a process executed only once when the power is turned on (one before S10 to S46 in FIG. 17). Or, a plurality of times during the game (when the starting mouth winning, the start of the change, the big hit (hit if the usual figure), the game state changes, etc., when the predetermined conditions such as the change of the game state, etc., the execution of the timer interrupt processing (Periodic timing). The transmission at the time of power-on is not limited to the transmission during the power-on process, as long as the process is performed at the time of power-on. For example, when the power is turned on, a gaming machine related information command is generated and stored in the command buffer in advance, and is stored in the command buffer while the normal processing (main processing, timer interrupt processing) after the power-on processing is completed is executed. The transmission of the gaming machine related information command is also included.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, based on the command transmitted from the main control board 4100, if the effect is executable on the peripheral control board 4140, it is processed as a valid command. It is configured to discard the command as an invalid command. Therefore, even when the effect to be executed differs depending on the model of the gaming machine, the control program for the main control board 4100 can be shared, and the control program for the main control board 4100 can be developed for each model. This eliminates the need to perform the test, and shortens the development period and the test period in a testing organization.

[9. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 4100 in accordance with the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, various random numbers used in the game control will be described, and subsequently, processes of an initial value update type counter, main control-side power-on processing, main control-side timer interrupt processing, and the like will be described.

[9-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used in the game control, a big hit determination random number for use in determining whether to generate a big hit game state or a small hit game state, and a big hit for use in determining an initial value of the big hit determination random number. A random number for determining an initial value for determination, a random number for reach determination for use in determining whether or not to generate a reach (out of reach) when a big hit game state is not generated, an upper special symbol display 1185 and a lower special symbol The random number for the variable display pattern to be used for determining the variable display pattern of the special symbol that is variable displayed on the display 1186, and derived by the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 when the big hit game state is generated. For the big hit symbol used to determine the big hit symbol to be displayed, and for the big hit symbol used to determine the initial value of this big hit symbol random number Period value determination for the random number, and the like are available. The above-mentioned random number for the big hit symbol is a random number for the small hit symbol used for determining the small hit symbol which is derived and displayed on the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 when generating the small hit game state. Also used as. On the other hand, the above-described random number for determining a jackpot symbol initial value is also used as a random number for determining a small hit symbol initial value for use in determining an initial value of the small hit symbol random number. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining a normal symbol hit determination used for determining whether or not the pair of movable pieces 2106 are opened and closed, and an initial value of the random number for determining the normal symbol hit determination are used. A random number for determining an initial value for determining a normal symbol hit, a random number for a normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like used for determining a variation display pattern of the ordinary symbol variably displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1189 are prepared.

  For example, the counter for updating the random number for jackpot determination is constituted by hardware (random number generation circuit) built in the chip, and a predetermined fixed numerical value range (from a minimum value to a maximum value by a predetermined arithmetic expression) In the present embodiment, the value is updated according to a certain rule so that all values appear within the value 0 as the minimum value and the value 32767 as the maximum value. Thereby, an unbiased random value can be extracted. Further, the random number value is updated based on a 10 MHz internal system clock obtained by dividing a 20 MHz clock output from the crystal oscillator into two by the main control MPU 4100a. Further, when the updating of the random number sequence for one cycle is completed, the random number array of the new cycle is updated so as to be different from the random number strings of the other cycles. As described above, since the arrangement of the random number sequence generated in each cycle is different, it is difficult for the player to obtain an incorrect random number.

  The above-mentioned random numbers are so-called hardware random numbers, but may be random numbers (software random numbers) updated (generated) by software. Specifically, the counter for updating the random number for jackpot determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in this embodiment, the minimum value is 0 and the maximum value is 32767). Then, the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by incrementing the value by one each time a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. This counter counts up from the random number for determining the jackpot determination initial value to the maximum value, and then increases from the minimum value (value 0) to the initial value determined based on the random number for determining the jackpot determination initial value. Count up. Each time one cycle of the jackpot determination random number is updated, the start value (initial value) of the next cycle of the jackpot determination random number is determined based on the jackpot determination initial value determination random number, and the determined start value The update is sequentially repeated again from. Such a counter updating method is referred to as an “initial value updating type counter”. The random number for determining a jackpot determination initial value is obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for selecting one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination. On the other hand, the above-described normal symbol hit determination random number and the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number are also updated by the same method as the above-described method of updating the big hit determination random number.

  In the present embodiment, the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number is determined by the counter for updating the big hit determination random number. The start value (initial value) of the next cycle of the jackpot determination random number is determined based on the random number, and the update is sequentially repeated again from the determined start value, but the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 is operated when the power is turned on. If the game information is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as a numerical value in a main control-side power-on process described later, a checksum value (sum Value does not match the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (when the power is turned off). When clearing the area, the jackpot determination random number is extracted for each main control MPU 4100a, and an ID code having a different value is set for each main control MPU 4100a, and the big hit determination random number is determined based on the extracted ID code. The random number is set as a start value of the random number, and the big hit determination random number is updated from the start value. Therefore, an initial value deriving process for always deriving the same fixed value (ID code) is performed, and the derived fixed value is set. That is, the big hit determination random number is always updated by overwriting the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process. As described above, the value set in the jackpot determination random number is derived using the ID code, and the ID code is mainly stored in the nonvolatile storage means built in the main control MPU 4100a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 4100a. The first security countermeasure that the ID code is not rewritten even when an external device is used and the initial value derivation process is executed when the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared are stored as individual information for each control MPU 4100a. In this way, the analysis is performed by taking two-step security measures by the second security measure that the start value of the random number for jackpot determination always derives the same fixed value for each main control MPU 4100a based on the ID code. Is prevented. Note that instead of the ID code, the initial value of the random number for jackpot determination may be set by extracting the above-mentioned hardware random number. As a result, when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, it is possible to set a different start value of the big hit determination random number every time even for the same game board, thereby further enhancing security.

  Here, the advantage of extracting the ID code from the non-volatile storage means incorporated in the main control MPU 4100a and using the extracted ID code as the initial value of the random number for big hit determination will be described. For example, a person who tries to illegally obtain a game ball paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 4 by some method, disassembles it, and stores an ID code previously stored in a nonvolatile storage means built in the main control MPU 4100a. Even if the value of the counter that updates the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot determination value can be grasped, the ID code is assigned a unique code to identify the individual. Therefore, the ID code is completely different from the ID code previously stored in the non-volatile storage means incorporated in the main control MPU provided in another game board. That is, in the other game boards, the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the big hit determination random number matches the big hit determination value is completely different from that of the obtained game board 4. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling the obtained game board 4 and analyzing it is useless at all in other game boards, that is, other pachinko gaming machines, so that the ID code obtained by disassembly and analysis is used. Even if an instantaneous stop is generated at intervals and a game ball is thrown into the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102 at predetermined intervals, a big hit gaming state cannot be generated.

[9-2. Movement of counter of initial value update type]
When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM (when clearing the RAM), the initial value update type counter takes out the ID code from the built-in nonvolatile storage means of the main control MPU 4100a, and based on the taken out ID code. An initial value deriving process for constantly deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the big hit determination random number is performed, and the derived fixed value is set. In the first cycle, the initial value update type counter counts up from the fixed value to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the fixed value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the random value for the jackpot determination is updated as a random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot determination. An initial value lottery process is performed, and the value obtained by this lottery is set. In the second cycle, the counter of the initial value update type counts up from the value obtained by lottery to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the value obtained by lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained in this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter is In the third cycle, the value is counted up from the value obtained by the lottery toward the maximum value. In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 is set as the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) in the low probability, and is read from the normal time determination table, whereas the value 31768 to the value is read in the high probability. 32767 is set, and is read from the probability change determination table. In the present embodiment, the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination updates a predetermined fixed numerical value range from a minimum value to a value 32767 as a maximum value. In other words, the range of the jackpot determination value (the jackpot determination range) is a range closer to the maximum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in both of the low probability and the high probability. Is set.

  Here, in the present embodiment, a case where the value 10 to the value 209 is set for the low probability and the value 10 to the value 339 for the high probability is set as the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range). That is, in the low probability, the number of random numbers (big hit determination random numbers) to be big hits is 200, and in the high probability, the number of random numbers to be big hits (big hit determination random numbers) is 330. Here, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent the plurality of random numbers to be counted and updated from being synchronized with each other, the number of other random numbers to be simultaneously acquired is 200, except when the random number acquisition time is different. In addition, for example, the number is a prime number. That is, in the present embodiment, if the timing of obtaining the random number value differs from the jackpot determination random number, the number of the random number value to be the jackpot can be prevented from being a prime number. In the present embodiment, the small hits described above are, for example, the number (50) of the big hits determined by dividing the number (200) of the big hit symbols with a low probability by 4 (50).

  Considering the case where such a big hit judgment value range is set, the big hit judgment value range (big hit judgment range) has a minimum value and a maximum value in both the low probability and the high probability. Is set to a range closer to the minimum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384) of the above. In such a case, a period from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the timing when the value becomes the first value 10 in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range), and this value 10 In comparison with the period from the next value 11 to the maximum value (value 32767), the probability of being drawn by the above-described initial value drawing process is much lower in the former period than in the latter period. In other words, the range from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the last value (value 209 for low probability, value 339 for high probability) in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) And the range from the value next to this last value (value 210 for low probability, value 340 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is better than the latter. The probability of the lottery being performed by the initial value lottery process is extremely low as compared with the range. Then, for example, the timing at which the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 is illegally acquired by some method, and the game ball is upwardly started by irradiating the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102 with radio waves. If a fraudulent act is performed as if the ball has entered the mouth 2101 or the lower starting port 2102, the value of the initial value update type counter is set to one of the values of the big hit determination value range (big hit determination range). Can be said to be high.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) is from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in both of the low probability and the high probability. If the value is set to a range closer to the maximum value side, the timing before the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 becomes a value before the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range). The period between the time when the value (value 32667 for low probability and the value 31767 for high probability) is reached, and the period from the first value (value 32668 for low probability and value 31768 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767) When compared with the above, the probability of being drawn by the above-described initial value lottery process is much higher in the former period than in the latter period. In other words, the value before the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability) And the range from the first value (value 32668 for low probability, value 31768 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is compared with the latter range. Thus, the probability of being drawn by the initial value drawing process is extremely high. Then, the counter of the initial value update type has a range from the value 0 to the value before the first value (the value 32667 for the low probability and the value 31767 for the high probability) in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range). Of these, one of the values becomes a value drawn by the initial value lottery process and is set in the random number for the jackpot determination initial value determination described above. It counts up, and then counts up from the minimum value to the value obtained by lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained by this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter is , From the value obtained in the lottery toward the maximum value.

  That is, as in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) is between the intermediate value between the minimum value and the maximum value (value 16384) and the maximum value side in both of the low probability and the high probability. When the value of the counter of the initial value update type becomes 0, the value before the first value (low hit determination range) in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 The period up to the time when the probability becomes the value 32667 and the value with the high probability becomes the value 31767) is irregular and rich in randomness. Thus, for example, the timing at which the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 is illegally acquired by some method, and the game ball is raised by radiating radio waves toward the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102. Even if a fraudulent act of pretending to be in the starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102 is performed, the value of the counter of the initial value update type is determined to be one of the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range). It can be said that the probability of becoming a value is low.

  The initial value update type counter is repeatedly updated in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value. From the initial value to the minimum value (initial value) of the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) until the counter reaches the minimum value (first value) of the big hit determination value range (big hit determination range) in the second cycle The required time is time T0. In the third cycle from time T0, the time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (initial value) of the big hit determination value range (big hit determination range) is time T1, and time T1 is shorter than time T0. . In the fourth cycle from time T1, the time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (initial value) of the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) is time T2, and time T2 is shorter than time T1. . As described above, in the counter of the initial value update type, the counter to be updated has a fluctuation with respect to the time when the updated value becomes the minimum value (initial value) of the range of the jackpot determination value (the jackpot determination range). (By removing the) from the player.

[9-3. Main control side power-on processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control-side power-on processing according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control-side power-on processing of FIG.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the above-described main control program executes a main control-side power-on process under the control of the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 as shown in FIGS. Do. When the main control-side power-on process is started, the main control program sets a stack pointer under the control of the main control MPU 4100a (step S10). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or temporarily indicates a return address of the present routine when the subroutine is terminated and the process returns to the present routine. It indicates an address on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S10, the main control program sets an initial address to a stack pointer, and from this initial address, loads the contents of a register, a return address, and the like on the stack. Then, the stack pointer is returned to the initial address by reading sequentially from the last stack to the first stack.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e (step S11). The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e includes a comparator MIC, which is a voltage comparison circuit, and a D-type flip-flop MIC. The comparator MIC, which is a voltage comparison circuit, outputs a comparison result by comparing a voltage between +24 V and a reference voltage or comparing a voltage between +12 V and a reference voltage. This comparison result indicates that the logic becomes HI when no power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, and is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC. In step S11, the output of the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC is started. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, through the main control output circuit 4100ca with the reset function, with its logic being LOW. Is done. As a result, the main control MPU 4100a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC, and changes the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC, until the latch state is set. The state can be inverted and output from the output terminal 1Q terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

  Subsequent to step S12, the main control program performs wait timer processing 1 (step S12), and determines whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S14). The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until the voltage reaches a predetermined voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notice voltage from when the power is turned on to a predetermined voltage, a power failure notice signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S12 is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage and stabilizes. In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (wait timer). ms) is set. In step S14, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal has been input. This determination is made based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC, as the power failure notice signal.

  In step S14, if there is no input of the power failure notice signal even after waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on, the main control program executes the power failure to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC. The output of the clear signal is stopped (step S15). Here, the power failure clear signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a, and the logic thereof is set to HI. Is entered. Thereby, main control MPU 4100a can set D-type flip-flop MIC to the latch state. The D-type flip-flop MIC outputs a power failure notice signal from its output terminal 1Q when it latches a state in which the logic is input to the preset terminal PR terminal as LOW.

  Subsequent to step S15, the main control program sets a state in which a RAM clear process for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on (when the game-side power is turned on). Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 has been operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs to the main control MPU 4100a an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on an operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 being operated. It depends on whether or not it has been done. The main control program determines, based on the logical value of the operation signal, that it does not instruct RAM clear when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is HI, and operates the operation switch 952. While it is determined that the operation switch 952 has not been operated, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is LOW, it is determined that the instruction indicates that the RAM is to be cleared, and the operation switch 952 is determined to be operated.

  In step S16, when the operation switch 952 is operated, the main control program sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 952 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute a RAM clearing process for initializing a RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 4100a for a predetermined time from power-on. (Game control side power-on operation control means). The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG determines whether or not to erase the game information related to the game such as the probability variation and the unpaid prize ball stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 4100a. The flag is set to a value of 1 when the game information is deleted, and to a value of 0 when the game information is not deleted. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Subsequent to step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait timer processing 2 (step S22). In the wait timer process 2, the system shown in FIG. 7 for performing the drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 by the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 of the peripheral control board 4140 is started (FIG. 7). Boot). In the present embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as the time until booting (boot timer).

  Subsequent to step S22, the main control program determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S24). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when the game information is erased, and the value 0 when the game information is not erased. When the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S24, that is, when the game information is not deleted, a checksum is calculated (step S26). This checksum is to calculate the sum of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S26, the main control program determines that the calculated checksum value (sum value) is the same as the checksum value (sum value) stored in the later-described main control-side power-off processing (power-off). It is determined whether they match (step S28). When they match, the main control program determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S30). The backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as game information, a checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in a main control side power-off process described later. This flag indicates whether or not the main control-side power-off processing has been completed normally, and is set to a value 1 when the main control-side power-off processing has not been normally completed.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S30, that is, when the main control-side power-off process has been completed normally, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as power recovery ( Step S32). This setting includes setting a value 0 to the backup flag BK-FLG, reading power recovery time information from a ROM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in ROM”) built in the main control MPU 4100a, and reading the power recovery time. The time information is set in a work area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, `` power recovery '' means, in addition to the state where the power is turned on from the state where the power is turned off, the state where the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure, the fact that high frequency has been irradiated, and reset, It also includes the status after returning.

  Subsequent to step S32, the main control program performs a power-on command creation process (step S34). In the power-on command creation processing, game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S24, that is, when erasing the game information, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S28. Or, if the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1 (it is the value 0) in step S30, that is, if the main control-side power-off processing has not been completed normally, the main control program executes the entire main control built-in RAM. The area is cleared (step S36). That is, the main control program executes the game control-side RAM clearing process triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 952 (payout control-side power-on operation control means). More specifically, the main control program is executed by writing the value 0 into the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. Also, the main control MPU 4100a performs processing when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 indicates that the game information is to be erased, when the game information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power supply is cut off. When the processing is not completed normally, the unique ID code stored in the nonvolatile storage means of the main control MPU 4100a is taken out, and the big hit determination random number is updated based on the taken out ID code. An initial value deriving process for always deriving the same fixed value is performed, and this fixed value is set as a jackpot determination initial value determining random number used for determining the initial value of the above described jackpot determination random number.

  Subsequent to step S36, the main control program sets a work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S38). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S38, the main control program performs RAM clear notification and test command creation processing (step S40). In this RAM clear notification and test command creation processing, a power-on command classified to power-on shown in FIG. Test commands for performing various inspections of the control board 4140 are generated as shown in FIG. 16 and are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S34 or step S40, the main control program performs an interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting is for setting an interrupt cycle when a main control timer interrupt process to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S42, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S44). With this setting, the main control timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set at step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S44, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, when the main control-side main processing is started, the main control program issues an error release navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 952 (operation switch). The execution of the game control-side RAM clear processing triggered by the receipt is regulated (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time-sharing to convert the detection signal input in response to the operation of the operation switch 952 into the error release navigation command for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on as described above. The RAM clear processing is executed upon the input (the game control side power-on operation control means), and the execution of the RAM clear processing is restricted after the predetermined time has elapsed even if the error canceling navigation command is input ( The game control side normal operation control means) is treated as a release switch for releasing an error notification associated with an error that has occurred. In other words, the operation switch 952 (error canceling unit), which should have been used to cancel the error that occurred in the payout operation, is replaced with a game storage unit for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on. Of the main control built-in RAM (and a payout control built-in RAM serving as a payout storage unit described later) as an operation unit for executing a RAM clearing process, or after a predetermined time elapses, It can be made to function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the ball payout operation.

  Next, the main control program sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S46). By setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in this watchdog timer clear register WCL in order, the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Subsequent to step S46, the main control program determines whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S48). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, or a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, if the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e as a power failure warning. The determination in step S48 is made based on the power failure notice signal.

  When there is no input of the power failure notice signal in step S48, the main control program performs a non-hit random number updating process (step S50). In the non-hit random number updating process, the above-described random numbers for reach determination, random numbers for variable display patterns, random numbers for initial value determination for large hit symbols, random numbers for initial value determination for small hit symbols, and the like are updated. As described above, in the non-hit random number updating process, random numbers that are not involved in the hit determination (big hit determination) are updated. The above-described random number for determining an initial value for normal symbol determination, the random number for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like are also updated by the non-hit number random number updating process.

  Subsequent to step S50, the process returns to step S46, where the main control program sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and determines in step S48 whether a power failure warning signal has been input. If there is no signal input, non-hit random number update processing is performed in step S50, and steps S46 to S50 are repeated. Note that the processing of steps S46 to S50 is referred to as "main control side main processing".

  On the other hand, when a power failure notice signal is input in step S48, the main control program performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

  Subsequent to step S52, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S53). Here, the same processing as the processing that started outputting the power failure clear signal in step S11 is performed. Thus, the main control program can release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC under the control of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Subsequent to step S53, the main control program includes a starting port solenoid 2105, attacker solenoids 2108A and 2108B, an upper special symbol display 1185, a lower special symbol display 1186, an upper special symbol memory display 1184, and a lower special symbol memory indicator. The drive signals output to 1187, the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the game status display 1183, the round display 1190, and the like are stopped (step S54).

  Subsequent to step S54, the main control program calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S56). This checksum is calculated by assuming that the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, is regarded as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S56, the main control program sets the value 1 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S58). Thereby, the storage of the game backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S58, the main control program performs a clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S60). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, as described above.

  Following the step S60, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, since the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer is not cleared. For this reason, the main control MPU 4100a is reset, and thereafter the main control MPU 4100a performs the main control-side power-on process again. Note that the processing of steps S52 to S60 and the infinite loop are referred to as “main control-side power-off processing”.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 (main control MPU 4100a) is reset when a power outage or a momentary power outage occurs, and performs power-on processing on the main control side by restoring power thereafter.

  In step S28, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal. Then, in step S30, it is determined whether or not the main control-side power-off process has been normally completed. Has been inspected. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is checked whether or not the game backup information has been stored due to fraud.

[9-4. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt processing will be described. The main control-side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at an interrupt cycle (4 ms in the present embodiment) set in the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIGS. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control timer interrupt process.

  When the main control timer interrupt process is started, the main control program sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register WCL under the control of the main control MPU 4100a in the main control board 4100 (step S70). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value A set in step S46 of the main control-side power-on process (main control-side main process).

  Subsequent to step S70, the main control program clears the interrupt flag (step S72). Clearing this interrupt flag allows other interrupts to occur. The clearing of the interrupt flag may be performed after all the processes in the timer interrupt process are completed. In this way, the management of the interrupt process is further simplified by preventing multiple interrupts due to the occurrence of another interrupt during the timer interrupt process.

  Subsequent to step S72, the main control program performs a switch input process (step S74). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 4100a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control program detects, for example, respective detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 for detecting game balls entering the general winning openings 2104 and 2201, and enters the special winning opening 2103. A detection signal from the count switch 2110 for detecting a game ball, a detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022 for detecting a game ball entering the upper starting port 2101, and a lower signal for detecting a game ball entering the lower starting port 2102. A detection signal from the starting port switch 2109, a detection signal from the gate switch 2352 for detecting a game ball passing through the gate portion 2350, a detection signal from the magnetic detection switch 3024 for detecting cheating using a magnet, and a prize ball described later. From the payout control board 4110 that informs the payout control board 4110 that the prize ball command transmitted in the control processing has been normally received. Reading 払主 ACK signal, respectively, stored in the input information storage area as the input information. Further, a detection signal from the upper starting port switch 3022 for detecting a game ball entering the upper starting port 2101 and a detection signal from the lower starting port switch 2109 for detecting a game ball entering the lower starting port 2102 are read. And the corresponding start port winning command shown in FIG. 15 and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. In other words, when there is a detection signal from the upper starting port switch 3022, the corresponding starting port winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and when there is a detection signal from the lower starting port switch 2109, The start port winning command corresponding to this is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  In the present embodiment, detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 for detecting game balls entering the general winning openings 2104 and 2201 and a count switch 2110 for detecting gaming balls entering the special winning opening 2103 are provided. , A detection signal from the upper starting port switch 3022 for detecting a game ball entering the upper starting port 2101, and a detection signal from the lower starting port switch 2109 for detecting a game ball entering the lower starting port 2102. , And a detection signal from the gate switch 2352 for detecting a game ball passing through the gate portion 2350 is read first as the first time when this switch input processing is started, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed. Are read again as the second time. Then, the result read for the second time is compared with the result read for the first time. It is determined whether any of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, the result is read again as the third time, and the result read in the third time is compared with the result read in the second time. It is again determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, the result is read again as the fourth time, and the result read in the fourth time is compared with the result read in the third time. It is again determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is treated as if there were no game balls.

  As described above, in the switch input processing, the main control program outputs the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020, 3020, the count switch 2110, the upper starting switch 3022, the lower starting switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 for the first time. By performing the reading twice, that is, the reading twice to compare the third time and the reading twice to compare the second to the fourth time, the erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering, noise, and the like is performed. Can be avoided, so that the reliability of detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020, 3020, the count switch 2110, the upper starting switch 3022, the lower starting switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 is improved. be able to.

  Subsequent to step S74, the main control program performs a timer subtraction process (step S76). In the timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol indicator 1186 are turned on in accordance with the special symbol and the variable display pattern determined in the special electric accessory control process described later, the normal symbol and the later described The payout control board 4110 normally sends various commands transmitted by the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) in addition to the time during which the normal symbol display 1189 is turned on according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined in the normal electric accessory control process. When it is determined whether or not a payer ACK signal notifying that the ACK signal has been received is input, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the ordinary symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption cycle is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction processing is performed, the fluctuation time is reduced by 4 ms. When the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In the present embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time the timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the result of the subtraction becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as time management information.

  Subsequent to step S76, the main control program performs a hit random number update process (step S78). In the hit random number updating process, the above-described large hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number, and small hit symbol random number are updated. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining a jackpot symbol initial value, which is updated in the non-hit random number updating process in step S50 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for initial value determination for small hit symbols is also updated. The random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control-side main process and the main control-side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby increasing the randomness. . On the other hand, the random number for the big hit determination, the random number for the big hit symbol, and the random number for the small hit symbol are random numbers related to the hit determination (big hit determination). Counts up.

  For example, as described above, the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is an initial value update type counter, and a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in this embodiment, the value It is updated within the value 32767) as 0 to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by adding 1 to the value every time the main control timer interrupt processing is performed. It counts up from the random number for initial value determination for jackpot determination toward the maximum value (value 32767), and then counts up from the minimum value (value 0) to the random number for initial value determination for jackpot determination. When the counter for updating the random number for jackpot determination finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for jackpot determination, the random number updating process for the jackpot determination updates the random number for jackpot determination initial value determination. The random number for determining a jackpot determination initial value can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for selecting one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination. The above-described random number for normal symbol determination and the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination described above are also updated by the hit random number updating process. The normal symbol hit determination random numbers and the like are the same as the above-described method of updating the big hit determination random numbers, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the jackpot determination initial value, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol, and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are processed by the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. The non-hit random number updating process in step S50 in the main main process) and the hit random number updating process in step S78 in the main control timer interrupt process of the main routine are updated. When the number of executions of the non-hit random number updating process in step S50 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the next interrupt timer is generated due to unevenness in the processing time of The random number for determining the jackpot determination initial value, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol, and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are determined in step S50. Or as a mechanism to update only in non Toraku random number update process.

  Subsequent to step S78, the main control program performs award ball control processing (step S80). In this prize ball control processing, the main control program reads input information from the above-described input information storage area and creates a prize ball command for paying out game balls based on the input information, A self-check command for confirming a connection state between the payout control board 4110 and the board is created. The main control program transmits the created award ball command and the self-check command to the payout control board 4110 as main payment serial data.

  Further, in the prize ball control processing, the main control program executes a prize ball control program code which is a part of the program code. For example, the main control program is output from the count switch 2110 in response to reception of a game ball into the special winning opening 2103. When the detection information based on the detected signal is written in the corresponding definition bit areas defined one bit at a time over several minutes of the special winning opening 2103, for example, 15 balls as prize balls A prize ball command is created as a prize ball instruction to pay out, and transmitted to the payout control board 4110 (payout control means).

  In the present embodiment, since two special winning openings 2103 are provided as special winning openings, the main control program executes the above-described definition bit regions in a plurality of definition bit regions prepared in advance in the main control RAM. From among them, two definition bits for the special winning opening 2103 are used. Hereinafter, these are referred to as a “first bit area” and a “second bit area”, respectively. In the case of a gaming board having one winning port, for example, one defined bit area is used. These used definition bit areas are, for example, 1 bit and are adjacent to each other. When a game ball is received in the special winning opening 2103, for example, “1” is written into the first definition bit area, for example, the fourth bit, as detection information based on the detection signal output from the count switch 2110. Thereafter, the main control program initializes the definition bit area corresponding to the special winning opening that has recognized that the game ball has been accepted, for example, by writing “0” to prepare for the reception of the next game ball.

  Here, the main control program also determines which definition bit area is to be checked. For example, if the definition bit area corresponding to the count switch 2110 of the special winning opening 2103 is assumed to be the fourth bit, for example, the pachinko gaming machine having only one special winning opening as in the present embodiment will be described. In this case, the main control program obtains information on the fourth bit definition bit area.

  Further, the main control program executes a mask process on the detection information thus obtained in accordance with a winning ball effective range of the special winning opening 2103 described later to create a winning ball command and write it in the transmission information storage area. It is determined whether output should not be performed to the payout control board 4110. If it is determined that this prize ball command should not be transmitted, the main control program performs, for example, a forced process as a mask process on each definition bit area in which the detection information based on the detection signal from the count switch 2110 is written. May be set to OFF ("0") to prevent the award ball command from being written in the transmission information storage area.

  In this prize ball control process, the main control program, in the first special game state, the detection information corresponding to the detection signal from the count switch 2110 indicating that one game ball has been received in the special winning opening 2103, When written in the above-mentioned definition bit area corresponding to the special winning opening 2103, for example, a prize ball command is created as a prize ball instruction to pay out 15 balls as a prize ball, and the transmission information storage area described above is created. Write to. At the same time, the main control program writes a winning sound command as a command to output a predetermined sound in the transmission information storage area described above, and then transmits the command to the peripheral control board 4140 to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the speaker, The sound of "Pokon" is output.

  On the other hand, in the first special game state, the main control program sends detection information based on a detection signal from the count switch 2110 indicating that one game ball has been received to the special winning opening 2103 to the special winning opening 2103. If it is not written in the corresponding definition bit area, no prize ball command is created as a prize ball instruction to pay out 15 balls as prize balls, for example. In this case as well, the main control program writes a prize sound command as a command to output a predetermined sound in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 4110 (payout control means). The payout operation of the game ball is prevented from being executed. Thereafter, the main control program initializes the above defined bit area corresponding to the special winning opening 2103, clears the detection information based on the detection signal from the count switch 2110, and sets a state where the payout of the game ball is permitted. I do.

  At this time, the main control program, when paying out the game balls equal to or more than the prescribed payout number that can be paid out in response to the acceptance of the game balls into the special winning opening 2103, an excessive winning abnormal command (not shown in FIG. 16). ) Is written in the transmission information storage area, and then transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in a command transmission process (step S92). Then, the peripheral control MPU 4150a causes the speaker to perform a predetermined notification.

  In this way, since illegal payout of game balls is substantially prevented, damage to the game hall (game hall) can be minimized.

  On the other hand, when the main control program detects the acceptance of the game ball into the special winning opening 2103 instead, the main control program immediately writes the excessive winning abnormal command in the transmission information storage area and controls the peripheral control MPU 4150a. May be notified to the speaker.

  After that, the main control program reads out the prize ball command from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits it to the payout control board 4110 (payout control means).

  As described above, when a game ball is received in the special winning opening 2103, whether or not the corresponding count switch 2110 is functioning can be confirmed by hearing.

  On the other hand, if the payer ACK signal notifying that the payout control board 4110 has normally received the prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, the main control program determines whether the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 have the same command. A self-check command for confirming the connection state between the boards is created and transmitted to the payout control board 4110.

  Subsequent to step S80, the main control program performs a frame command receiving process (step S82). In the payout control board 4110, the payout control program transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) that are classified into state displays. On the other hand, as described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release navigation command based on a detection signal of the operation switch 952. In the above-described frame command receiving process, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as payer serial data, information for notifying the payout control board 4110 of the reception is output as output information in the output information storage of the main control built-in RAM. Store in the area. Further, the main control program shapes the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands (frame status 1 command, error release) classified into the status display of FIG. The navigation command and the frame state 2 command) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. Note that the frame state 1 command here corresponds to a first error occurrence command, and the error cancellation navigation command corresponds to a first error cancellation command.

  Subsequent to step S82, the main control program performs a fraud detection process (step S84). In this cheating detection processing, an abnormal state relating to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the game is not in the jackpot game state, and the count switch 2110 detects that a game ball has entered the special winning opening 2103, the main control program is executed. Then, a prize abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 16 as an abnormal state is created and stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S84, the main control program performs a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the main control program determines whether or not the big hit random number value matches a hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. Further, the main control program determines whether or not to shift to the probability variation state based on the big hit symbol random number value. Then, when the probability change transition condition is satisfied, the game state is shifted to the probability fluctuation state, and when the probability change state is not satisfied, the game state is shifted to a game state other than the probability change state (winning probability control). means). Here, the “probability variation state” refers to a state (high-probability state) in which the winning probability of the special lottery described above is set relatively higher than that in the normal game state (low-probability state). Details of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control program sets the output of the lighting signal to light the upper special symbol display 1185 according to the variable display pattern determined at the time of the start winning according to the type of the special symbol, or sets the lower special symbol display. The output of the lighting signal is set so as to light 1186, and the output is stored in the output information storage area as output information. When the main control program shifts to the big hit game state, for example, various commands (big hit opening command, big win opening 1 opening N-th display command, big winning opening 1) classified as big hits shown in FIG. (A closing display command, a special winning opening 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the attacker solenoid 2108A or the opening / closing member 2107 is operated to open and close. The output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108B is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. Further, when the number of times (round) in which the special winning opening 2103 changes from the closed state to the open state is two, the main control program performs two rounds so as to light a two round display lamp (not shown) of the round display 1190. The output of the lighting signal to the display lamp is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information. When the number of rounds is six, the round indicator lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190 is turned on. The output of the lighting signal to the 6 round display lamp is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information. When the number of rounds is 12, the 12 round display lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190 is turned on. The output of the lighting signal to the 12-round display lamp is set so as to cause it to be stored in the output information storage area as output information, Und is stored in the output information storage area as output information to set the output of the lighting signal to the 16 rounds indicator lamp to turn on the 16 rounds indicator lamp round display 1190 (not shown) when a 16 times. Further, the main control program sets the output of the lighting signal to the gaming state display 1183 so as to light in a predetermined color whether or not the transition to the probability fluctuation state is made, and stores the output as output information in the output information storage area.

  By the way, in a general pachinko gaming machine, after the start prize of a game ball, a special symbol is started to be changed and a big hit lottery is executed, and a predetermined winning condition is satisfied and a predetermined stable change is performed. When the condition is satisfied, the lighting mode of the so-called probability change lamp as the game state indicator is changed, and the state shifts to the probability change state. In the probability fluctuating state, the probability of the above-mentioned jackpot lottery is set relatively higher than that in the normal gaming state, and it is almost guaranteed that the winning condition will be satisfied again and the jackpot will be achieved. As described above, as the gaming machine which may shift to the probability fluctuation state after the probability fluctuation state ends, mainly, the probability fluctuation state is continued until the next big hit, as if the big hit game is looped. (Hereinafter referred to as a “loop machine”), and a machine that continues the probability fluctuation state until the number of times the special symbol changes to a predetermined number after the big hit game ends (hereinafter, “ST (special time) machine”) "). As described above, in the pachinko gaming machines of the models in which the manner of maintaining the probability fluctuation state is different, the control of the above-mentioned gaming state indicator is different, and in the development stage, the control of the gaming state indicator must be designed for each model one by one. It was difficult to improve development efficiency.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a game ball is received in the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102, the main control program determines whether or not a winning condition is satisfied, and the winning condition is satisfied. In this case, while the normal gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state, if the winning condition is satisfied and the probability change transition condition is further satisfied, the probability that the winning condition is satisfied is relatively set as compared to the normal gaming state. The state is shifted to the probability fluctuation state set higher, and the display state of the gaming state display 1183 is set to the lighting state. When the winning condition is satisfied again and the probability change transition condition is satisfied, the main control program changes the display state of the gaming state display 1183 in a state in which the probability fluctuation state is continued to a certain interrupt cycle. Then, the display state of the gaming state indicator 1183 is changed from the light-off state to the light-on state again within the same interrupt cycle as the specific interrupt cycle.

  More specifically, first, as described above, the main control program determines whether or not the winning condition is satisfied after the game ball is received in the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102. (Lottery means), when the winning condition is satisfied, the game is shifted from the normal game state to the big hit game state, and when the winning condition is satisfied and the probable change transfer condition is satisfied, the winning condition is satisfied. The state is shifted to a probability fluctuation state in which the probability is set relatively higher than the normal game state (game state control means). The main control program sets the display state of the game state display 1183 to the lighting state while the probability fluctuation state continues, and displays the game state display 1183 when the game state transitions to a game state other than the probability fluctuation state. Is turned off (lighting mode control means). The main control program sets the display mode of the gaming state indicator 1183 to the lighting state upon the transition to the probability fluctuation state described above, and thereafter, when the winning condition is satisfied again and the probability change transition condition is further satisfied, After the display state of the gaming state indicator 1183 is temporarily turned off from a lighting state in a certain interrupt cycle in a state where the probability fluctuation state is continued, a game is performed in the same interrupt cycle as the specific interrupt cycle. The display mode of the state indicator 1183 is changed from the unlit state to the lit state again (the lighting state continuation control means). Although the player wants the player to visually recognize that the probability fluctuation state continues, even if the display mode of the game state display 1183 is changed for a very short time in this manner, It is possible for the player to visually recognize that the display state of the gaming state indicator 1183 has not changed.

  In this way, it is difficult for the eyes of the player to visually recognize that the light has been turned off, and the player can visually recognize the light-on state as if the light-up state is continued. Then, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is a so-called loop machine in which the probability fluctuation state is continuously continued, the probability fluctuation state continues until the special symbol is changed to the specified number of times after the big hit game state ends. In addition, even if the so-called ST (special time) machine which shifts to the probability fluctuating state again when the winning condition is satisfied within the specified number of fluctuations, a program code for controlling the display mode of the gaming state display 1183 between different models. Can be shared. This makes it possible to improve the development efficiency of pachinko gaming machines of different models.

  Further, in the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process, the main control program (game control means) shifts from the normal game state to the big hit game state when the winning condition is satisfied as described above. If the certainty transition condition as an example of the transition condition is satisfied, the game state is also shifted to the certainty game state as an example of the specific game state (game state control means). Here, the main control program may shift to the certain-variable game state as an example of the specific game state, without substantially paying out the game balls in the big hit game state. Note that the specific game state may be a state in which a time-saving operation condition as another example of the transition condition is satisfied and the time-saving function is operating, or both of the game modes may be simultaneously performed in addition to the above-described probable change game state. It may be in a state. The main control program manages the remaining number of times of changing and displaying the special symbols during a period from a certain gaming state to another gaming state, and transmits the gaming state information representing the managed gaming state to the transmission information. In the transmission information storage area, and thereafter, in the same timer interrupt period, the command is transmitted in a command transmission process S92 described later (game state notification means).

  More specifically, when the main control program satisfies the above-described probable change transition condition, the special symbol is variably displayed until the game state transitions to a game state other than the probable change game state, for example, the normal game state. The information on the number of times (hereinafter referred to as “remaining number information”) is transmitted after being included in any command transmitted when the start condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied, for example, a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. By writing the information in the transmission information storage area, the information is transmitted in the command transmission process S92 described later within the same timer interrupt period (remaining change count notification means). It should be noted that the main control program may include the above-mentioned remaining number-of-times information in other commands, or transmit the information to the peripheral control board 4140 as an independent command.

  By the way, a subroutine that is a program module constituted by a set of program codes is generally called by a CALL instruction included in a main routine and executed after a program code group included in the program module is executed. Is configured to return to the main routine by a return instruction. In this case, an instruction for calling back is required, so it seems at first glance that it is difficult to reduce the program capacity.

  However, in the present embodiment, when the main routine includes successive subroutines, for example, instead of the main routine calling and executing the first subroutine with a CALL instruction and then successively calling the next subroutine with another CALL instruction, Alternatively, the return instruction may not be placed at the end of the program code group of the first subroutine, and may be directly connected to the beginning of the program code group of the next subroutine. With a program module having such a configuration, the capacity of the entire program can be reduced.

  Subsequent to step S86, the main control program performs a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S88). Details of the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control processing, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the gate passing processing is performed based on the input information. In the processing at the time of passing through the gate, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal based on the result of the determination, the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned normal symbol hit determination random number is extracted, and the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is extracted as gate information. To memorize.

  Further, following the processing at the time of passing through the gate, the main control program reads the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, extracts the value of the random number for a normal symbol hit determination from the read gate information, and executes the main control program. It is determined whether or not it matches a normal symbol hit determination value stored in the ROM in advance (referred to as “normal lottery”). The main control program determines whether or not to open and close the pair of movable pieces 2106 according to the determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the main control program performs the opening / closing operation based on the determination, the pair of movable pieces 2106 are opened to enter a gaming state in which the lower starting port 2102 can receive game balls, and a gaming state advantageous to the player. Move to

  Further, the main control program determines the variation display pattern of the ordinary symbol corresponding to the above-mentioned determination based on the value of the random number for the ordinary symbol variation display pattern described above, and classifies the variation display pattern related to the ordinary symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. Various kinds of commands are generated and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and a lighting signal of the normal symbol display 1189 is turned on so as to light the ordinary symbol display 1189 in accordance with the determined variable display pattern of the ordinary symbol. The output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

  Further, the main control program, when the value of the extracted random number for normal symbol hit determination coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance, the normal electric winning effect related to FIG. Are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the output of the drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2105 is set to open and close the pair of movable pieces 2106, and the output information described above is output information. Store in the storage area. On the other hand, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number does not match the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the main control program executes the above-described normal symbol variation display pattern random number. The normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is determined on the basis of the above, the various commands classified into the general figure synchronizing effect shown in FIG. 15 are created, stored as the transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above, and the determined normal is determined. The output of the lighting signal to the ordinary symbol display 1189 is set so that the ordinary symbol display 1189 is illuminated according to the symbol variation display pattern, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S88, the main control program performs a port output process (step S90). In this port output processing, the main control program reads output information from the output information storage area described above from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 4100a, and outputs various signals based on the output information. The main control program, for example, outputs a main payment ACK signal when normally receiving various commands from the payout control board 4110 from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a based on output information. Or a driving signal is output to the attacker solenoids 2108A and 2108B for opening and closing the opening and closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2103 when the jackpot is in the jackpot gaming state, and a starting opening solenoid for opening and closing the pair of movable pieces 2106. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the 2105, a 2-round jackpot information output signal, a 6-round jackpot information output signal, a 12-round jackpot information output signal, a 16-round jackpot information output signal, a probability variation information output signal, and a special symbol display Information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, Output information, and outputs various information (game information) signal to the payout control board 4110 regarding the game, such as start-up hole winning information output signal.

  Subsequent to step S90, the main control program performs a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads out transmission information such as commands and data from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits the transmission information to the peripheral control board 4140 as main serial data (command Transmission means). This transmission information includes various commands, which are created in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine and are classified into special figure 1 tuning effect related and special figure 2 Command, various commands classified into jackpot-related (for example, a special winning opening 1 count corresponding to a special winning opening count command based on a detection signal from the count switch 2110 when detecting a game ball entering the special winning opening 2103) Display commands), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as general-tune synchronizing effects, various commands classified as normal electric role effects effects, various types of information displayed in FIG. Commands (door frame opening command, door frame closing command, body frame opening command, body frame closing command, etc.), various commands (frame Position 1. command, error reset navigation command and the frame state 2 command), various commands and various commands are classified into other are divided into test-related are stored. In the main circumference serial data, one packet is composed of three bytes. Specifically, the main serial data has a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value calculated by assuming the mode as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  As a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140, a command is used in which a command previously stored for a ring buffer is output first as a command transmission buffer. The main control program transmits the commands to the peripheral control board 4140 in the order in which the commands are stored in the command transmission buffer. For example, in the same timer interrupt process, the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86) is executed, and then the normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process (step S88) is executed. Since the command is stored in the buffer for command transmission before the pre-reading command related to the general drawing, the pre-reading command related to the special figure is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in preference to the pre-reading command related to the general drawing. You.

  In the peripheral control board command transmission processing, when the main control program receives the frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 4110 through the RXA terminal receiving port, the peripheral control board 4140 (production control unit) A frame state 1 command (a second error occurrence command) is transmitted to the apparatus (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as a frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission processing, when the main control program receives an error release navigation command (first error release command) from the payout control board 4110 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the main control program To send an error release navigation command (second error release command) (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error canceling navigation command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as an error canceling navigation command in the form shown in FIG.

  Further, in this peripheral control board command transmission processing, when the main control program receives a main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) from the payout control board 4110 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the main control program 4140 ( The main body frame opening command (second main body frame opening command) is transmitted to the effect control unit) (main body frame command transmitting means, second main body frame transmitting means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame opening command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as a body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission processing, when the main control program receives the main frame closing command (first main frame closing command) from the payout control board 4110 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the main control program executes the peripheral control board 4140 ( The main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit (the main body frame command transmitting means, the second main body frame command transmitting means, and the second specific frame command transmitting means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame closing command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as a body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  In the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door frame opening command (first door frame opening command) from the payout control board 4110 through the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 4140 ( A door frame opening command (second door frame opening command) is transmitted to the effect control unit (door frame command sending unit, second door frame command sending unit, second specific frame command sending unit). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as a door closing command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission processing, when the main control program receives a door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 4110 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the main control program executes the peripheral control board 4140 (production control). ) Is transmitted to the first unit (the second unit closing command) (the second unit closing command transmitting unit). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as a door closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S92, the main control program sets the value C to the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S94). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL in step S94, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value B set in step S70. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and the watchdog timer is set to clear.

  Subsequent to step S94, the main control program switches (returns) the register (step S96), and ends this routine. Here, when the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine is started, the main control MPU 4100a saves the contents of the general-purpose registers on a stack by hardware. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose registers used in the main processing on the main control side from being destroyed. In step S96, the contents saved on the stack are read and written to the original register. Note that the main control MPU 4100a sets interruption permission after the return in step S96.

[9-5. Special design and special electric accessory control processing]
Next, the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process according to the present embodiment. The special symbol and special electric accessory control process is executed in the process of step S86 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  In the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process, the main control program updates the above-described big hit determination random number by +1 by a counter, and accepts a game ball to the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102, that is, Upon the start winning (satisfaction of the start condition), the value of the above-described counter is taken out for each start storage information (start information) in which the start condition is satisfied, and is set as the random number value for the jackpot. It is determined whether or not it matches a jackpot determination value stored in advance in a built-in ROM (lottery means). Hereinafter, this determination process is also referred to as “special lottery”. The main control program determines whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state based on a lottery result, and when the random number for the jackpot matches the jackpot determination value (predetermined winning conditions are satisfied). , The normal game state is shifted to the big hit game state. The big hit game state corresponds to a special game state, a first special game state, and a second special game state, and indicates a game state collectively referred to as these.

  The main control program, when determining the jackpot game mode, as data for defining the mode of the jackpot game set in the jackpot game mode determination process, for example, the number of rounds, opening time of the big winning opening for each round, One of the main control built-in RAMs, in which the definition data (table) indicating the closing time of the special winning opening for each round and the number of game ball winning limit counts is specified by an address offset according to the number of the special winning openings. The data is read from a definition data area (not shown) which is a storage area of the unit. Hereinafter, the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  When the special symbol and special electric accessory control process is started, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether or not a game ball has won the lower large winning opening (large winning opening 1) ( Step S100). When the gaming ball has won the lower winning opening (result of step S100 is "yes"), a special winning opening winning designation command indicating that the lower winning opening has been won is set (step S102).

  Similarly, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not a game ball has won the upper winning prize port (large prize port 2) (step S104). When the gaming ball has won the upper winning opening (the result of step S104 is "yes"), a special winning opening winning designation command indicating that the upper winning opening has been won is set (step S106). The count switch 2110 detects whether or not a game ball has entered the special winning opening. Further, when each of the winning designation commands is set, the detection is not limited to the detection by the count switch, and the corresponding special winning opening is opened and when each of the winning designation commands is detected by the count switch. May be set. The condition for determining that the special winning opening is in the open state may be the gaming state according to S142 to S146, or the special symbol / special electric accessory operation number may be a value corresponding to S142 to S146. It may be.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the game ball has passed the upper gate (combination operation gate) (Step S112). If the game ball has passed through the upper gate (the result of step S112 is "yes"), a winning combination operation gate passing command indicating that the game ball has passed through the upper gate is set (step S110).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not a game ball has won a start winning port (an upper starting port 2101 and a lower starting port 2102). First, a starting port 1 identification value is set in a starting port identification area indicating a starting port to be determined for winning (step S112).

  Then, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not a game ball has won the upper starting port 2101 (Step S114). Whether or not a game ball has won the upper starting port 2101 is determined by whether or not there is a detection signal from the upper starting port switch 3022. Specifically, in the switch input process of step S74 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 19, the presence / absence of the detection signal from the upper starting port switch 3022 is read and stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. This is performed based on the input information.

  When a game ball has won the upper starting port 2101 (the result of step S114 is “yes”), the main control MPU 4100a executes a starting port winning process (step S116). In the opening mouth winning process, a starting mouth winning command transmitted when a new game ball is won in the starting mouth is set, a random number for jackpot determination is extracted and stored in a predetermined area, or a special symbol is formed. For example, a process for executing a prefetch effect is executed. Details of the start-up winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a sets the starting port 2 identification value in the starting port identification area (Step S118), and determines whether or not a game ball has won the lower starting port 2102 (Step S120). If a game ball has won the lower starting port 2102 (result of step S120 is "yes"), a starting port winning process is executed as in the case of the upper starting port 2101 (step S122). The starting port 1 discriminating value and the starting port 2 discriminating value are used as starting port prize processing so that a common starting port prize processing can be executed between the upper starting port prize and the lower starting port prize. Based on each identification value, information for identifying whether the process being executed is a winning process by the upper starting port or a lower winning port process, and is referred to in the starting-port winning process or This is a value that is set so that a data table to be set and an area for storing winning information can be identified.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes a corresponding process based on a special symbol / electric accessory operation number which is a game progress state variable in which a type of branching process to be executed in accordance with the progress of the game is specified (step). S124). The game progress state variable is stored in the game progress state storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and is updated in each branch process executed according to the progress of the game. In the process of step S124, the process proceeds to the branch process designated based on the value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area, and when the transferred branch process is completed, the special symbol and special electric accessory control. The process ends. Note that the value of the game progress state variable and the like stored in the game progress state storage area are game information and are backed up in the main control-side power-off process.

  In the process of step S130, based on the value of the game progress state variable, as a branch process, a special symbol change waiting process (step S130), a special symbol change process (step S132), a special symbol big hit determination process (step S134), Symbol loss stop processing (Step S136), special symbol jackpot stop processing (Step S138), interval processing before opening a special winning opening (Step S140), processing of opening a special winning opening (Step S142), processing during closing of a special winning opening (Step S144) ), A special winning opening opening interval process (step S146), a winning combination operation gate valid waiting process (step S148), or a winning combination operation gate valid process (step S150).

  In the special symbol change waiting process (step S130), the special symbol change in the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 based on the game ball entering the upper starting port 2101 and the lower starting port 2102. Processing for starting display is performed.

  In the special symbol changing process (step S132), a process of controlling the variable display of the special symbol on the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 is performed.

  In the special symbol big hit determination process (step S134), based on the game ball entering the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102, whether the special symbol that has started to change and fixed and stopped generates the big hit gaming state. Is determined.

  In the special symbol losing stop process (step S136), when the big hit game state is not generated, the process of stopping the change display of the special symbol on the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 and notifying the user of the fact is performed. Do.

  In the special symbol big hit stop process (step S138), when a big hit game state is generated, a process of stopping the change display of the special symbol on the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 and notifying the user of the change is performed. Do.

  In the interval process before the opening of the special winning opening (step S140), a process for generating a big hit game state and notifying that the big hit operation is started is performed.

  In the special winning opening opening process (step S142), a process related to a big hit operation for making it easy for game balls to enter the special winning opening 2103 by changing the opening / closing member 2006 from the closed state to the open state is performed.

  In the special winning opening closing process (step S144), a process related to a big hit operation that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the special winning opening 2103 by changing the opening / closing member 2006 from the opened state to the closed state is performed.

  In the winning opening opening end interval process (step S146), when the big hit operation is ended, a process for notifying the end is performed.

  In the combination operation gate validity waiting processing (step S148) or combination operation gate validity processing (step S150), the upper gate (combination operation gate) is activated, or the passage of a game ball through the upper gate is detected. .

[9-6. Start-up winning process]
Next, the processing at the time of starting opening winning will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a winning opening winning process in the present embodiment. The start opening winning process is executed in the processing of steps S116 (upper opening 2101) and S122 (lower opening 2102) in the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing shown in FIG.

  In the start-port winning process, the start-port winning command shown in FIG. 16 is created when a game ball is accepted to the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102. At this time, the starting opening winning command may be set for each starting winning opening, or may be common regardless of the starting winning opening. The main control program stores the command thus created as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

  First, the main control program sets, as command data, start port winning command creation data for generating a starting port winning command (step S200), and executes a command buffer setting process (step S202). As a result, the starting opening winning command is created and stored in the command buffer. The starting port winning command of the present embodiment is common regardless of the starting winning port.

  Furthermore, the main control program sets a start-up winning control data table corresponding to the winning opening based on the start-up opening 1 identification value or the starting-up opening 2 identification value selected before the start-up winning processing. (Step S204). The start opening winning control data table stores data necessary for processing executed at the time of starting winning. Hereinafter, the start-up winning control data table will be described.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating an example of the start-up winning control data table according to the present embodiment. The start opening winning control data table defines a starting opening winning control data table 1 set when the upper starting opening 2101 wins and a starting opening winning control data table 2 set when the lower starting opening 2102 wins. . Each table defines a special symbol reserved ball count command address table, a special symbol activated reserved ball count area, a reserved history special figure identification value, and an offset value for referencing a retained information storage area, and has the same structure.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, in the process of step S204, based on the identification value set in the process of step S112 or step S118, the top of the start-up prize-winning control data table corresponding to the prize-winning start-up prize-winning opening. Set the address as the control data address. As a result, since necessary data is stored at a predetermined position from the head address of the set start-up winning control data table, data corresponding to the start-up opening is performed in common processing by the upper start-up opening and the lower starting opening. Can be obtained. Specifically, the main control program acquires the number of reserved balls stored in the area indicated by the number-of-reserved-balls address set in the starting port winning control data table set in the process of step S204 (step S206). ). The operation reserved ball number address corresponds to the operation reserved ball number address (special symbol operation reserved ball number area) in FIG. 22, and the content stored in the operation reserved ball number address is acquired as the reserved ball number.

  Then, the main control program determines whether or not the acquired number of reserved balls is equal to or more than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (step S208). If the number of reserved balls is equal to or more than the upper limit value (the result of step S208 is "yes"), the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (the result of step S208 is "no"), the main control program adds 1 to the number of reserved balls (step S210). Further, the special symbol total operation suspension number (the content of the special symbol total operation suspension number area) which is the sum of the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number is incremented by 1 (step S212).

  Further, the main control program specifies a storage location (special symbol holding storage area) of various random numbers such as a jackpot determination random number extracted by the winning start. Here, the configuration of the special symbol holding storage area will be described. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol holding storage area (source code) relating to the upper starting port 2101 and the lower starting port 2102. In addition, the line described as “special symbol 1” on the right side of each line in FIG. 23 is a special symbol holding storage area related to the upper starting port 2101. Is a special symbol holding storage area for the lower starting port 2102. In the case of “special symbol 1 fluctuation pattern random number storage N area”, “N” corresponds to the number of reservations. Each area stores one corresponding random value.

  More specifically, referring to FIG. 23, first, the address (B_HIT_M1) of the special symbol 1 big hit determination random number storage 1 area is set as a reference address. Then, as an addition value, a value corresponding to the number of reserved balls (specifically, a value obtained by multiplying the number of reserved balls by the size of the storage area (_TMEM1_KO)) is multiplied by a reserved storage area index value (a reserved information storage area reference offset value). ) Is added. The hold storage area index value is set to an offset value (00H) if the starting port identification area value is the starting port 1 identification value, and if the starting port 2 identification value is a special symbol 2 big hit determination random number storage area. _TMEM_ADD) is set. Finally, the calculated addition value is added to the reference address, and the storage location (transfer destination address) of the big hit determination random number can be calculated. As described above, by using the index value, an appropriate storage location can be designated by common processing even if the starting ports are different. Further, by making the index values different depending on the timing of executing the common processing, it is also possible to store data in different storage areas. For example, when a big hit determination is performed at the time of the pre-reading process and at the start of the change, information necessary for the big hit determination can be stored in different storage areas by setting different index values.

  Here, returning to the description of the flowchart of FIG. 21, the main control program stores the random number for jackpot determination in the special symbol holding storage area (step S214). Specifically, the value stored in the big hit determination random number area (the counter value of the big hit determination random number) is stored in the special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the number of holding balls. In addition, in addition to the random number for the jackpot determination, a random number for the jackpot symbol, a random number for the reach determination, a random number for the variation pattern (random number for the variation pattern 1, a random number for the variation pattern 2, a random number for the variation type), and a random number for the special symbol. A random number for determining a hit or a variation pattern is extracted at the time of starting opening winning and is stored in a corresponding storage area. For example, when the number of special symbol 1 reserved balls is 0, the designated storage location B_HIT_M1 is used as the head address, the random number for big hit determination is B_HIT_M1, the random number for reach determination is T_RIT_M1, and the random number 1 for fluctuation pattern is The random number 2 for the fluctuation pattern is stored in T_HP2_M1, the random number for the fluctuation type is stored in T_HTP_M1, and the random number for the special symbol is stored in T_ZUG_M1.

  Subsequently, the main control program sets a special figure identification value for selecting a fluctuation pattern of the symbol fluctuation in the new hold memory based on the special symbol total operation suspension number in a corresponding reservation identification history area (special symbol hold identification area). Area (step S216). The special symbol hold identification area is assigned a continuous area of one byte at a time from the special symbol hold identification area 1 to the special symbol hold identification area 8. The address shifted by the subtracted value becomes an area corresponding to the new hold storage. The special identification value is included in the start winning prize control data table set in the process of step S204. The special symbol holding identification area is an area for storing the order of winning in the upper starting port (special symbol 1) or the lower starting port (special symbol 2). At the start of the change, the value of the leading area of the special symbol holding identifying area is stored. By making the determination, it is determined whether or not the change of the special symbol can be started.

  Finally, the main control program executes a memory look-ahead process for executing a special figure look-ahead effect (step S218). The special figure look-ahead effect is an effect in which the lottery result of the special lottery is implied in advance before starting the change display of the special symbol. In the memory look-ahead process, various random numbers are acquired before the variation display of the special symbol is started, and information for determining the special symbol look-ahead effect on the peripheral control board based on the acquired random number value (hit information, symbol type, variation). Pattern number, etc.), and store it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. At this time, the main control program may include, in the command, information relating to the special symbol stop symbol as information indicating the type of the big hit game, instead of the special lottery result itself. For example, the information of the stage before it is finally determined, such as the SP reach group, the normal reach group, and the latent hit group and the small hit group of the symbol type in the variation pattern may be transmitted as the prefetch command. Details of the storage prefetch process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[9-7. Memory prefetch processing]
Next, the details of the memory prefetching process (step S218) in the starting opening winning process will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the storage prefetch process according to the present embodiment. In the memory look-ahead process, a process for executing a look-ahead to acquire the result of the special lottery in advance is performed. By transmitting a predetermined command (special symbol holding number designation command) to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the result of the special lottery acquired by the memory look-ahead processing, the result is displayed before the variation display of the special symbol is started. It is possible to execute a suggested special figure look-ahead effect.

  When the storage prefetching process is started, the main control program first saves the address of the control data (start-winning-time control data table) (step S240). Further, a hold command without prefetch is set as a hold command (step S242).

  Subsequently, the main control program determines whether the table for selecting the variation pattern changes at the timing of the start winning and the timing at which the variation actually starts (step S244). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern is different between the start winning and the start of the fluctuation, and if the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern is different, the prefetch is prohibited. For example, if the number of times the number of games saved in the time reduction state (number of games) or the number of times the number of games (number of games) is maintained is the upper limit of the number of holds (for example, if the special symbol is one and the upper limit of the number of holds is four, Four times, when the number of special symbols is two, and when the total value of the upper limit number of each reserved number is eight, eight times, and even when there are two special symbols, one symbol is given priority to start the variable display. In this case, the prefetching is prohibited if the number is within the upper limit of the number of reservations on the priority side. When the table for selecting the variation pattern changes (result of step S244 is "yes"), the main control program executes the processing after step S282 without executing the processing related to prefetching.

  On the other hand, when the table for selecting the variation pattern does not change (the result of step S244 is “no”), the main control program determines whether or not the period is a prefetch determination prohibition period (step S246).

  Here, the determination of the prefetch determination prohibition period will be described. Whether or not the period is the pre-read determination prohibition period is determined based on the notice permission determination data address table shown in FIG. Specifically, a notice permission judgment data address table corresponding to the winning opening (starting hole identification area setting value) that has been won is set, and the notice permission judgment data according to the special symbol / motor-operated accessory operation number and the flag during time reduction. To get. If the acquired notice permission determination data is “00H” (_RENZOCK_OK), prefetching is permitted, and if “01H” (_RENZOCK_NG), prefetching is prohibited. FIG. 25 shows the notice permission determination data.

  FIG. 25 is an example of a table related to the notice permission determination data. FIG. 25A shows an example of the notice permission determination data address table, and FIG. 25B shows an example of the notice permission determination data. In the notice permission determination data address table, a determination table (RNEZO_CK1_W) corresponding to the special symbol 1 and a determination table (RNEZO_CK2_W) corresponding to the special symbol 2 are defined. The notice permission determination data is defined as data (RENZO_CK1_B) based on the special symbol operation number (T_JOB_NO) and data (RENZO_CK2_B, RENZO_CK3_B) based on the mid-hour flag (JITAN_FG).

  As a basic structure of the notice permission determination data address table, the first byte is the number of times the table is referred to, the second byte is information as a reference source (lower address of the RAM area of the reference destination), and the third and fourth bytes are pre-read. This is a reference table address for prohibition period determination. With the data of the second to fourth bytes (3 bytes) as the basic unit, the data of the basic unit is set for the number of times of reference. In the present embodiment, data for two times is set as the number of times of reference. However, it is needless to say that the number of times of reference is not limited to two, and may be one or three or more. With such a data structure, any specification can be supported by correcting only the data value without correcting the program code.

  For example, if the special symbol / electric accessory operation number is in a special symbol change (HEND), the notice permission determination data becomes “00H” (_RENZOCK_OK), and prefetching is permitted. Note that the special symbol / electric accessory operation number is numerical data. For example, HEND indicating that the special symbol is changing is set to 1, and other than that, the special symbol change waiting (IDOL) is set to 0. If the game ball has won the upper starting port 2101 and the time saving state is set (the time saving flag (JITAN_FG) is 1), the notice permission determination data 2 (RENZO_CK2_B) is selected as a reference table for the pre-read prohibition period determination, and the time saving flag is set. Is determined. At this time, since the time reduction flag is 1, _RENZOCK_NG (“01H” = corresponding to the pre-reading determination prohibition period), which is the data of the second line of the notice permission determining data 2, is selected, and the pre-reading is performed in the determination processing in step S246. Be regulated. The preview permission determination data 3 (RENZO_CK3_B) is a reference table for the prefetching prohibition period corresponding to Tokujin 2 and its data selection is the same as the preview permission determination data 2 (RENXO_CK2_B), so a detailed description is omitted. I do.

  In the example shown in FIG. 25, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are defined in separate judgment tables. However, if the contents are the same, a common table may be used. The contents may be completely different.

  In addition, regardless of the determination result by the notice permission determination data address table, if the special figure pre-reading effect is being executed, in order to prevent the pre-reading effect from being executed repeatedly, the pre-reading determination prohibition period may be determined. Good.

  Here, the description returns to the flowchart of the storage prefetching process of FIG. In the case of the prefetch determination prohibition period (the result of step S246 is “yes”), the main control program does not perform the prefetch judgment, and executes the processing from step S282.

  On the other hand, if it is not the prefetch determination prohibition period (the result of step S246 is “no”), the main control program stores a special symbol holding storage area (a random number for each holding number) corresponding to the winning opening and the number of holding balls. Special symbol holding storage buffer (7 bytes in this embodiment) corresponding to one special symbol holding storage area corresponding to one holding of the random number value stored in the storage area (general name of the areas to be stored). Is stored in the symbol random number buffer (step S248). Then, based on the random numbers stored in the special symbol holding storage buffer, the pre-reading determination and the determination at the start of the change are performed. That is, at the time of pre-reading, the content of the special symbol holding storage area stored in association with the number of holdings is stored in the buffer, and at the start of the change, the information of the first area of the special symbol holding storage area is stored in the buffer, It is possible to make a determination with a common reference destination at the time of pre-reading and at the start of fluctuation, and in any case, the subsequent processing (processing such as big hit determination) can be shared and used.

  The special symbol holding storage areas are: a large hit determination random number storage N area, a reach determination random number storage N area, a variation pattern random number 1 storage N area, and a variation pattern random number 2 storage N area for the special symbol 1 and the hourly symbol 2. , Random number storage N area for fluctuation type and random number storage N area for special symbol (N is 1 to 4). Further, the special symbol holding storage buffer includes a random number buffer for jackpot determination, a random number buffer for reach determination, a random number buffer for variable pattern 1, a random number buffer for variable pattern 2, a random number buffer for variable type, and a random number buffer for special symbol.

  In the process of step S248, for example, when the third hold storage of the special symbol 1 is stored in the special symbol hold storage buffer, the value of the special symbol 1 big hit determination random number storage 3 area is stored in the big hit determination random number buffer. The value of the special symbol 1 reach determination random number storage 3 area is a reach determination random number buffer, the value of the special symbol 1 variation pattern random number 1 storage 3 area is the variation pattern random number 1 buffer, the special symbol 1 variation pattern random number 2 storage 3 The value of the area is stored in the variable pattern random number 2 buffer, the special pattern 1 variable type random number storage 3 area value is stored in the variable type random number buffer, and the special pattern 1 special pattern random number storage 3 area value is stored in the special pattern random number buffer. I do.

  Then, the main control program executes a special symbol big hit determination process for determining the result of the special lottery with reference to each random number stored in the special symbol holding storage buffer set in the process of step S248 (step S250). . Details of the special symbol big hit determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the main control program executes a special symbol determination process for determining the type (special symbol) of the special lottery result (big hit) (step S252). Details of the special symbol determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, the main control program sets a big hit flag buffer as a big hit flag storage area (step S254). The big hit flag buffer (special symbol winning flag buffer (T_HIT_FGBF)) is an area for storing a big hit flag and the like at the time of prefetch determination. At the start of the change, the big hit determination result is stored in the big hit flag area (special symbol winning flag area).

  In the buffer related to the special lottery look-ahead, in addition to the special symbol winning flag buffer (T_HIT_FGBF), a jackpot symbol type buffer (BRZ_TPBF), a fluctuation pattern buffer (T_HD_PTBF), a fluctuation type type buffer (T_HD_TPBF), a symbol type command buffer ( TZTP_CMBF), a special symbol identification flag buffer (T_MOV_FGBF) and a special symbol activation pending ball count buffer (T_SID_CTBF).

  In addition, also in the case of the normal lottery, similarly to the case of the special lottery, a buffer related to the prefetch of the normal lottery is provided. The buffers related to the prefetching of the ordinary lottery include a hit flag buffer (F_HIT_FGBF), an ordinary symbol type area buffer (F_FZ_TPBF), and an ordinary symbol operation pending sphere number buffer (F_SID_CTBF). By providing the buffer in this manner, the processing can be shared between the pre-reading and the start of the fluctuation, as in the case of the special lottery.

  Further, the main control program sets the special symbol fluctuation distribution information source address table 1 as a special symbol fluctuation distribution information source address table holding information for selecting a fluctuation pattern (step S256). Thereafter, a variation pattern selection determination process for selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol is executed (step S258). The details of the variation pattern selection determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the variation pattern selection determination process is completed, the main control program sets the variation pattern value extracted in the variation pattern buffer (Step S260), and further executes the variation type determination process for acquiring the variation type classification value (Step S260). S262). The variation type type value is a parameter for specifying the variation type defined for each variation pattern. One variation pattern can define one or more variation types. The fluctuation type corresponds to, for example, the type of the pseudo continuous fluctuation when a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the pseudo continuous fluctuation is selected. When the variation type type value is selected, the main control program sets the selected variation type type value in the variation type type buffer (step S264).

  Thereafter, the main control program clears the values from the big hit determination random number buffer to the special symbol random number buffer (step S266). This is to prevent a malfunction due to a remaining value when performing a big hit determination.

  Further, the main control program sets a command indicating a prefetch result (a symbol type prefetch command, a variation pattern prefetch command, and a variation type prefetch command) in a command buffer for transmitting to the peripheral control board 4140 (steps S268 to S278). . Further, the reference value of the pending command when there is prefetching is set as the reference value of the pending command (step S280).

  Then, the main control program returns the address of the control data (start-winning-time control data table) saved in the process of step S240 (step S282). Finally, based on the set pending command reference value, a reserved ball number command is acquired (step S284), and the acquired reserved ball number command (special symbol reserved ball number designation command) is set in the command buffer (step S284). Step S286).

  Here, the procedure for acquiring the reserved ball count command (special symbol reserved ball count designation command) will be further described. In the address of the control data returned in the process of step S282, the address of the start-up winning control data table corresponding to the winning opening (the value of the starting-port identification area) in which the game ball has won is set. As described above, since the structure of the start-up winning control data table is common regardless of the value of the start-up identification area, the subsequent processing can be shared.

  FIGS. 26A and 26B are tables showing a table related to the special symbol holding ball count command address table. FIG. 26A is an example of the special symbol holding ball count command address table, and FIG. . As shown in FIG. 22, the starting opening winning control data table includes the address of the special symbol reserved ball count command address table (data (T1_SCT_CM_W, T2_SCT_CM_W) set at the head address of each data table). ), The special symbol reserved ball count command address table can be referred to from the address.

  The main control program is a special symbol 1 reserved ball count command address table (T1_SCT_CM_W) corresponding to the special symbol 1 and a special symbol 2 reserved ball number command address table (T2_SCT_CM_W) corresponding to the special symbol 2 corresponding to the winning opening. , And based on the reserved command reference value set in the process of step S242 or step S280, the address of the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number designation command creation data is specified from the special symbol reserved ball number command address table. As shown in FIG. 26 (B), the special symbol reserved ball count specification command creation data includes a reserved command generation table when prefetching is prohibited (upper row, T1_SCT_CM1_B, T2_SCT_CM1_B), and a reserved command generation when prefetching is permitted for each special symbol. A table and (lower row, T1_SCT_CM2_B, T2_SCT_CM2_B) are defined.

  Then, the main control program creates a special symbol reserved ball number designation command based on the special symbol reserved ball number designation command creation data. The data structure of the special symbol reserved ball number designation command creation data (T1_SCT_CM1_B, T1_SCT_CM2_B, T2_SCT_CM1_B, T2_SCT_CM2_B) is composed of 3 bytes of data. The first byte of data is the lower address of the storage area (RAM) that refers to the hold number, the second byte is the default value of the value set as the mode data of the command, and the third byte is the status data value of the command. Become. For example, the special symbol 1 hold storage number (T1_SID_CT) is 3 (in the case of the number of holds 3), and the special design hold ball number designation command when there is pre-reading is the special design 1 hold ball number designation command creation data 2 (T1_SCT_CM2_B). Created based on Specifically, the status value is “62H”, the mode value is “02H” (number of reservations 3-1) + “11H” (default value) = “13H”, and the special symbol reservation ball number designation command is “6213H”. Becomes Finally, the special symbol holding ball number designation command thus created is set in the command buffer.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (B), the second byte of the special symbol reserved ball count specification command creation data (the default value of the mode value) is “01H” when the prefetching is prohibited, and In this case, it is "11H". Therefore, the upper bits of the mode value of the special symbol reserved ball number designation command become “0” when read-ahead is prohibited and “1” when read-ahead is permitted even after the reserved number is added. Therefore, the peripheral control board 4140 that has received the special symbol retaining ball number designation command can determine whether or not there is pre-reading by referring to the mode value of the special symbol retaining ball number designation command. Thereby, the peripheral control board 4140 receives the special symbol holding ball number designation command and refers to the mode value to wait until receiving the information (command) necessary to execute the special figure prefetching effect. Can be determined. That is, if the upper bit of the mode value of the special symbol retaining ball number designation command is “0”, the processing can be continued without receiving the prefetch-related command. Note that the order of the data configuration set in the special symbol reserved ball number designation command creation data is not limited to the described order, and for example, a lower address of a storage area that refers to the reserved number is set in the second byte, and the like. What is necessary is just to set in a predetermined order. Further, the present invention is not limited to three bytes (three information), and other information such as that associated with the output of the number-of-suspended command may be set as long as the data has a predetermined data configuration.

[9-8. Special symbol big hit determination process]
Next, the special symbol big hit determination process (step S250) in the memory prefetch process will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the special symbol big hit determination process according to the present embodiment. The special symbol jackpot determination process determines whether or not the result of the special lottery is a jackpot based on the jackpot determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning. This processing is used in common at the time of pre-reading of the special lottery and at the time of starting the change of the special symbol (when the change display is confirmed).

  The main control program first obtains a big hit determination random number from the big hit determination random number buffer (step 300). Subsequently, a special symbol big hit determination lower limit value for performing a special lottery is acquired from the special symbol big hit determination lower limit value data (lower limit value table for big hit determination) based on the probability change flag (step S302). In the special symbol big hit determination lower limit value data (lower limit value table for big hit determination), a special symbol big hit determination lower limit value is defined corresponding to the probability change flag. The probability change flag is information indicating whether the probability state is the normal probability (low probability) or the high probability, and is set to “00H” for a low probability and “01H” for a high probability. For the special symbol big hit determination lower limit data, a value according to the probability state is set, the lower limit data is selected based on the probability change flag, and it is possible to make the lottery probability different by changing the lower limit data Has become.

  Subsequently, the main control program determines whether or not the big hit determination random number acquired in the process of step S300 is smaller than the big hit determination lower limit acquired in the process of step S302 (step S304). If the big hit determination random number is not smaller than the big hit determination lower limit (the result of step S304 is "no"), that is, if the big hit determination random number is equal to or larger than the big hit determination lower limit, the big hit determination random number is It is determined whether the value is larger than the value (step S306). In the present embodiment, the range in which the random number for jackpot determination is generated is from 0 to the upper limit, and the range of the random number determined to be jackpot is the range from the lower limit to the upper limit of jackpot determination. ing. Therefore, if the big hit determination random number is originally equal to or larger than the big hit determination lower limit value, the big hit determination may be made. However, a value exceeding the upper limit is set as the big hit determination random number due to the influence of noise or the like. In such a case, a big hit may be determined. In the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a malfunction, a comparison is also made with the upper limit.

  When the big hit determination random number is not larger than the big hit determination upper limit value (the result of step S306 is “no”), that is, when the big hit determination random number is equal to or less than the big hit determination upper limit value, the main control program sets the big hit flag to the big hit flag. The winning is set (step S308). Specifically, the big hit is set as the flag setting value, and the flag setting value is stored in the big hit flag storage area. As described above, the big hit flag storage area is a big hit flag area (special symbol winning flag area) at the start of the change, and a big hit flag buffer (special symbol winning flag buffer) at the time of prefetch determination.

  On the other hand, the main control program determines whether the big hit determination random number is smaller than the big hit determination lower limit value (the result of step S304 is “yes”), or The result of S306 is "yes", and no winning (losing) is set in the big hit flag (step S310). As a result, even when it is determined that the value is larger than the upper limit value, as in the case where the value is determined to be smaller than the lower limit value, the value at which the big hit flag is lost is set. Even if it is set, it is prevented that a big hit is erroneously determined. As described above, when the big hit flag is set, the special symbol big hit determination processing ends.

[9-9. Special symbol judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol determination process (step S252) in the memory prefetching process will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the special symbol determination process according to the present embodiment. The special symbol determination process specifies a special symbol based on the random number for jackpot symbol determination extracted at the time of starting winning.

  The main control program first acquires a big hit flag from the big hit flag storage area (big hit flag area or big hit flag buffer) (step S320). Then, it is determined whether or not the content of the big hit flag is a big hit (step S322). If the content of the big hit flag is not a big hit (the result of step S322 is “no”), the special symbol number value is set to the shifted symbol command value (0) (step S330). Further, the special symbol number value is set to the mode value of the symbol type command (step S332), and the special symbol determination processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the content of the big hit flag is a big hit (the result of step S322 is “yes”), the main control program reads the big hit symbol number and the big hit symbol type from the special symbol determination data address table based on the big hit symbol random number. The number is obtained (step S324). Since a plurality of jackpot symbols are defined, a jackpot symbol number is acquired from the special symbol determination data address table based on the jackpot symbol random numbers. The big hit symbol type number is a number corresponding to the big hit type on a one-to-one basis. For example, there is a probable big hit with 16R pitching (01H), a non-probable big hit with 16R pitching (02H), a probable big hit without 16R pitching (no time saving: latency probable, 03H), a probable big hit without 16R pitching (with time saving: probable) , 04H) and small hits (05H). The big hit symbol number is a plurality of values provided for the symbol type number. For example, 01H to 10H for a 16R throwing probability variable hit, 11H to 26H for a 16R throwing non-probable variable hit, and 27H to 3FH for a 16R positive hit without a pitching change (no time saving: latent probability change), 16R 40H to 55H is provided for the large-variable big hit (with time saving: sudden probability) without throwing, and 56H to 5FH is provided for the small hit. As described above, a plurality of jackpot symbol numbers are provided for the same jackpot type, which is displayed on the upper special symbol indicator 1185 or the lower special symbol indicator 1186 on the function display unit 1180 based on the jackpot symbol number. This is to make it difficult for the special symbol (the present special symbol) to be visually recognized by the player. On the other hand, since there is only one type of missing symbol, a predetermined value (losing symbol command value (0)) is set to the missing symbol number instead of being selected from the table.

  Further, the main control program sets a symbol type command for notifying the peripheral control board 4140 of the big hit symbol based on the big hit symbol type number (step S326). Finally, a special symbol number value is set based on the big hit symbol number (step S328), and the special symbol determination process ends.

[9-10. Variation pattern selection judgment processing]
Subsequently, the details of the variation pattern selection determination process (step S258) in the storage prefetching process will be described. FIG. 29 and FIG. 30 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the procedure of the variation pattern selection determination process according to the present embodiment. The change pattern selection determination process is a process for selecting a change pattern in the change display of a special symbol. Note that this process is executed at the start of fluctuation as well as at the time of pre-reading, and the same fluctuation pattern table is referred to at the time of pre-reading and at the start of fluctuation.

  The main control program first obtains a fluctuation information source table based on the fluctuation table number (Step S340). The fluctuation table number is a value for selecting (acquiring) the fluctuation information source table from the fluctuation information source address table. The variation information source table is a special symbol 1 and a special symbol 2 according to the game state, a hit (hit variation selection information status table), a loss (a loss variation selection information status table), a reach (a reach variation selection information status table), This is a data table storing table information for referring to a reach probability (special symbol reach probability table) and a change type (change type determination data table).

  Subsequently, the main control program acquires a special symbol identification value and stores it in the variation pattern selection value variation special identification area (step S342). Further, an area corresponding to a special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) in the variation information source table is specified based on the special symbol identification value and the number of data for one block of the special symbol-specific variation allocation information source table ( Step S344). Subsequently, a hit determination value for deriving the result of the special lottery (the value of the winning result stored in the special symbol winning flag buffer at the time of pre-reading or the special symbol winning flag area at the time of the change start (for example, 00H) : Out, 01H: big hit, 02H: small hit (step S346).

  The main control program determines whether or not a big hit or a small hit has been won by determining whether or not the hit determination value matches the big hit value or the small hit value (step S350). When a big hit or a small hit is won (the result of step S350 is "yes"), a big hit change selection information type table is searched from the hit change selection information state table based on the state flag (step S352). At this time, the address of the searched big hit change selection information type table is saved. The jackpot change selection information type table is a jackpot change type (a change group in a stage before the jackpot change pattern is determined. For example, a change pattern finally determined, such as SP1 system reach, SP2 system reach, etc. It is a table for selecting a group (groups are grouped). When the result of the special lottery wins the small hit and the case where the big hit is won, the selection of the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value set for the big hit symbol type, and the big hit symbol type number is Since different values are set for the hits, it is possible to select a variation pattern by a common process for the big hits and the small hits.

  Next, the main control program acquires the big hit symbol type (the value stored in the big hit symbol type buffer when reading ahead or the big hit symbol type area when changing starts) (step S354). The set big hit symbol type is used in the change information number search processing in step S358.

  Subsequently, the main control program selects a fluctuation pattern distribution symbol type setting data selection table according to the value of the fluctuation special figure identification area when the fluctuation pattern is selected. (Step S356). The variation pattern distribution symbol type setting data selection table is used to determine the type for determining the hit variation pattern selection value data table from the big hit variation selection information type table based on the value of the (hit) symbol type. It is a table.

  Next, the main control program executes a change information number search process using the big hit symbol type acquired in the process of step S354 as a comparison value, thereby obtaining a change information number (from the big hit change selection information type table to the hit change pattern selection value). A type value for determining the data table) is obtained (step S358). Further, the saved big hit change selection information type table is set as search data (step S360). Further, by the process of step S358, the variable information number that is the result of the variable information number search process is set as a selection value (step S362).

  On the other hand, when a big hit or a small hit has not been won (the result of step S350 is “no”), the main control program sets a special symbol reach probability table as search data (step S364). Then, the special symbol reach probability data corresponding to the state flag is searched from the special symbol reach probability table (step S366). The status flag is set to numerical data corresponding to the game state. In the present embodiment, 00H (low-probability non-time saving (normal game) state), 01H (high-probability time reduction state), 02H Either (low probability time reduction state) or 03H (high probability non-time reduction state) is set. This makes it possible to select a special symbol reach probability according to the game state. Further, a reach determination for determining whether or not to generate a reach based on the special symbol reach probability data and the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls corresponding to whether the prefetch or the change corresponds to the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2). A threshold is obtained (step S368). Subsequently, the main control program sets a reach fluctuation selection information status table as search data (step S370).

  Subsequently, the main control program determines whether or not to generate a reach in the variable display corresponding to the winning start (step S372). Specifically, a reach determination random number is acquired from the reach determination random number buffer, and is compared with the reach determination threshold acquired in the process of step S368. The reach is generated when the reach determination threshold value is larger than the reach determination random number.

  If no reach is generated in the fluctuation display (result of step S372 is “no”), the main control program sets an outlier fluctuation selection information state table as search data (step S374). Furthermore, a search is made from the deviation change selection information state table for a deviation change selection information reservation table corresponding to the state flag (step S376), and the retrieved deviation change selection information reservation table is set as search data (step S378). Further, the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls corresponding to whether the prefetch or the change is the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2) is set to the selected value (step 380).

  The processing from step S374 to step S380 is processing for selecting a variation pattern in the case of a normal deviation where no reach occurs. In the case of a normal deviation, it is necessary to change the fluctuation pattern according to the number of suspensions. For example, when the number of suspensions is large, there is a possibility that a fluctuation pattern with a shorter fluctuation time than in the case of a small number of suspensions is selected. Is selected.

  On the other hand, when a reach is generated in the variable display (result of step S372 is “yes”), the main control program sets a state flag as a selection value (step 382). When the reach is generated, the length of the fluctuation time is not determined by the number of reservations, but the fluctuation time may be changed by the number of reservations in the same manner as in the case of an unusual case. Specifically, even when the reach fluctuation is the same, when the number of suspensions is large, a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, a high-speed fluctuation time immediately after the start of the fluctuation) may be adjusted as compared with the case where the number of suspensions is small. In this case, since the fluctuation times are different, different fluctuation pattern commands are set.

  When the processing of step S362, step S380, or step S382 is completed, the main control program selects a variation pattern selection value data table corresponding to the selection value from the search data set at this time (step S384). Specifically, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit (step S362), a big hit change selection information type table is set as search data, and a change which is a search result of the change information number search process in step S358 is set as a selection value. A pattern classification value for pattern distribution is set. When the result of the special lottery is out of order and reach occurs (step S382), the reach fluctuation selection information state table is set as search data, and the state flag is set as a selection value. Further, when the result of the special lottery is out of order and no reach occurs (step S380), the out-of-office change selection information reservation table is set as search data, and the number of reserved balls is set as the selection value.

  Subsequently, the main control program acquires the random number 1 for the variation pattern (step S386), and executes a variation information number search process (step S388). The variation pattern selection data selection value is obtained from the variation pattern selection value data table by the variation information number search process. Further, the main control program acquires a fluctuation pattern selection value data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selection data selection value from the fluctuation pattern selection data address table (step S390).

  Subsequently, the main control program obtains the fluctuation pattern random number 2 (step S392), and performs the fluctuation information number search processing based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2 and the fluctuation pattern selection value data table obtained in the processing of step S390. Is executed (step S394). Thereafter, a variation pattern is selected based on the result of the variation information number search process (step S396), and the process ends.

  The variation pattern selection data table is composed of one or more sets of data, with the variation pattern random number lower limit value and the variation pattern set value as one set of data. By executing the variation information number search process, the variation pattern random number 2 is compared with the variation pattern random number 2 lower limit set in the variation pattern selection data table, and the variation pattern random number 2 is set lower than the variation pattern random number 2 lower limit. When it is determined that the value of the random number 2 for use is larger, the variation pattern set value corresponding to the lower limit value of the random number 2 for variation pattern is selected. If the value of the variation pattern random number 2 is smaller than the variation pattern random number 2 lower limit value, the value of the variation pattern random number 2 is compared with the next set variation pattern random number 2 lower limit value. The process is repeatedly executed while changing the lower limit value of the random number 2 for the variation pattern until it is determined to be large.

  In the present embodiment, a variation pattern is selected in two stages based on two types of random numbers, a variation pattern random number 1 (step S386) and a variation pattern random number 2 (step S392). First, a variation pattern type (variation pattern group such as XX-reach) is selected based on the variation pattern random number 1. Furthermore, a variation pattern (a value set in a variation pattern command) to be finally variation-displayed is selected from the variation pattern group selected by the variation pattern random number 1 based on the variation pattern random number 2. In addition, the method is not limited to the method of performing the lottery in two stages, and a method of performing the lottery in three or more stages may be employed, or the variation pattern may be directly selected by using one variation pattern random number. Since each current random number for a variation pattern is composed of one byte, the result determined by two random numbers is the same as the result determined by a total of two bytes of random numbers. When a variation pattern is selected with one variation pattern random number, the variation pattern random number may be composed of 2 bytes.

[9-11. Variation type judgment processing]
Next, the details of the change type determination process (step S262) in the storage prefetch process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the variation type determination process according to the present embodiment. As described above, the variation type determination process is a process for selecting a variation type defined in a variation pattern in the variation display of a special symbol.

  The main control program first searches the variation type determination data table for variation type determination data corresponding to the status flag (step S400). Subsequently, the change pattern set value is restored and set as a comparison value (step S402), and a change information number search process is executed (step S404).

  In the change type determination data table, different change type determination data is set according to the game state, and the change type determination data corresponding to the game state is selected by the process of step S400. The variation type determination data is composed of one or more sets of data, with the variation pattern lower limit value and the variation type selection data selection value as one set of data. Then, by executing the variation information number search processing, the variation pattern selection value is compared with the variation pattern lower limit value set in the variation type determination data, and the variation pattern selection value is larger than the variation pattern lower limit value. Is determined, the variation type selection data selection value corresponding to the variation pattern lower limit value is selected. If the fluctuation pattern selection value is smaller than the fluctuation pattern lower limit value, it is compared with the next set fluctuation pattern lower limit value, and the fluctuation pattern lower limit value is changed until the fluctuation pattern selection value is determined to be larger It is executed repeatedly. Before executing the variation type determination process, the variation information source address table is set in advance as an input parameter, and the variation type is determined based on the variation type determination data table set in the variation information source address table. Is determined.

  Next, the main control program searches the variation type selection data address table for the variation type selection data corresponding to the variation type selection data selection value acquired by the variation information number search process of step S404 (step S406). ).

  Next, the main control program sets the fluctuation type random number as a comparison value (step S408), and executes a fluctuation information number search process (step S410). At this time, the change type selection data obtained in the process of step S406 is set as search data, and the change type setting value is obtained by the change information number search process.

  The variation type selection data is composed of one or more sets of data, with the variation type random number lower limit value and the variation type set value as one set of data. By executing the fluctuation information number search process, the fluctuation type random number is compared with the fluctuation type random number lower limit set in the fluctuation type selection data, and the fluctuation type random number is smaller than the fluctuation type random number lower limit. Is determined to be large, the variation type setting value corresponding to the random number lower limit value for the variation type is selected. If the value of the random number for the variation type is smaller than the lower limit value for the random number for the variation type, it is compared with the next lower limit value for the random number for the variation type, and it is determined that the value of the random number for the variation type is larger. This is repeated until the lower limit of the random number for the variation type is changed.

[9-12. Special symbol change waiting process]
Next, the details of the special symbol change waiting process (step S130) in the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process will be described. FIG. 32 and FIG. 33 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the procedure of the special symbol change waiting process in the present embodiment. The special symbol change waiting process is executed in a state in which the special symbol change display is not executed, and when the change display is suspended, a preparation for starting the special symbol change display is performed.

  The main control program first determines whether or not the special symbol change display is suspended (step S420). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol hold identification value (value of the special symbol hold identification 1 area) corresponding to the next variable display to be executed from the value stored at the top of the special symbol hold identification area is not 0. . If the loaded value is 0, that is, if the special symbol variation display is not suspended (the result of step S420 is “no”), the special symbol variation display is not started. The process ends.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol change display is suspended (the result of step S420 is “yes”), the main control program executes a process for starting the special symbol change display. Specifically, first, since the variable display when the game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 (special symbol 2) is preferentially executed, the special symbol 2 is set as the starting port identification value (step S422). ), The special symbol 2 fluctuation setting data is set as the fluctuation setting data (step S424). In other words, the special symbol 2 fluctuation setting data is set in the fluctuation setting data. Further, the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls is obtained from the special symbol 2 operation reserved ball count area (step S426).

  Then, the main control program determines whether or not the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls is not 0 (1 or more) (step S428). If the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls is 0 (the result of step S428 is "no"), the special symbol 1 is set to the starting port identification value (step S430), and the special symbol 1 fluctuation setting data is set as the fluctuation setting data. It is set (step S432).

  The fluctuation setting data is configured by a RAM or a data table address referred to for executing the fluctuation start processing in the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2, and the reference destination is different between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2. Can be set, and the data structure (the number of set data) is common. As a result, it is possible to execute a common variation start process for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

  The variation setting data of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 in the present embodiment is composed of 13 bytes, and is specifically as follows. The first byte is the lower byte of the address of the pending ball count, the second and third bytes are the address of the reserved ball number designation command creation data, the fourth and fifth bytes are the transfer source address when the reserved memory area is transferred, and the sixth and seventh bytes are reserved. The transfer destination address at the time of storage area transfer, the 8th and 9th bytes are the transfer source address at the time of the 4th storage area transfer, the 10th and 11th bytes are the transfer destination address at the time of the 4th storage area transfer, and the 12th and 13th bytes are the changing setting data. Address.

  After setting the fluctuation setting data, the main control program stores the starting port identification value in the special symbol identification flag area (Step S434). Subsequently, in order to start the change of the special symbol, the number of operation-holding balls corresponding to the starting port identification value and the special symbol total operation-holding number stored in the special symbol total operation-holding number area are decremented by 1 (step S436).

  Next, the main control program sets a reserved ball number designation command as command data (step S438), and sets the command in the command buffer (step S440). Thereafter, the command for specifying the number of pending balls set in the command buffer is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) in the main control timer interrupt process. The command creation table (FIG. 26A) for creating the reserved ball number designation command is common to the pre-reading time, and the same table is used for the pre-reading time and when the fluctuation starts, thereby saving the program capacity. I have.

  Subsequently, the main control program executes a special symbol / flag setting process (step S442). In the special symbol / flag setting process, a special lottery is executed based on a random number for jackpot determination acquired at the time of starting opening winning. Details of the special symbol / flag setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the main control program executes a special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444). In the special symbol variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is set based on the result of the special lottery. Details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control program sequentially shifts the data stored in the special symbol holding storage area (FIG. 23) (step S446). In the special symbol holding storage area, holding memories (starting memories) including various random numbers such as a random number for jackpot determination extracted by a winning start are stored for the number of holdings for each winning opening. When the change of the special symbol based on the reserved memory is started, the reserved memory in which the fluctuation is started is cleared, and the remaining reserved memories are shifted. For example, when the maximum number of holdings is four, the holding storage stored in the special design holding storage 2 area is shifted to the special design holding storage 1 area, and similarly the special holding storage 3 area and the special design holding storage 4 area. The stored reserved memory is shifted to the special symbol reserved memory 2 area and the special symbol reserved memory 3 area. Then, the special symbol hold storage 4 area is cleared (step S448). The shift processing of the special symbol hold storage area stores the value set to the transfer source address at the time of transfer of the hold storage area set in the variation setting data to the transfer destination address at the time of transfer of the hold storage area, and at the time of transfer to the hold storage area. The transfer source address and the transfer destination address at the time of transfer to the reserved storage area are updated to the next address, and the data stored in each reserved storage area is sequentially shifted.

  Subsequently, the main control program sets the data-in-variation setting address set in the variable setting data as the setting data address, and sets information necessary for executing the special symbol variation processing executed in the next interrupt processing. A predetermined storage area is set (step S450).

  Further, the main control program creates a variation pattern command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. Specifically, first, the upper byte of the special figure variation pattern reference command corresponding to the special symbol identification flag is set as the command value. For example, if the special symbol identification flag is the special symbol 2, the upper byte of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern reference command is set, and if the special symbol 1 is the special symbol 1, the upper byte of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern reference command is set (steps S452 to S452). S456).

  Further, the main control program acquires the fluctuation pattern value stored in the fluctuation pattern area as lower-order command data (Step S458). Further, a variation type type value is obtained from the variation type type area (step S460), and the variation type type value is added to the command value set in the process of step S452 or S456, thereby obtaining a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation type. Is calculated (step S462). A variation pattern command is created by the processing from step S450 to step S462, and a command storage process for storing the created command data in a predetermined area is executed (step S464).

  Subsequently, the main control program sets a symbol type command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. Specifically, if the special symbol identification flag is the special symbol 1, the special stop symbol 1 designation command shown in FIG. 15 is set in the command buffer. If the special symbol 2 is the special symbol 2, the special stop symbol 2 designation command shown in FIG. It is set (steps S466 to S472).

  Next, the main control program sets a change state designation command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the command buffer (steps S474 and S476). Since the generated commands are transmitted in the order in which they are generated (the order in which they are stored in the command buffer), when the transmission order is changed, the command generation order (the order in which the commands are stored in the command buffer) is changed. do it. For example, when it is desired to transmit the symbol type command before the fluctuation pattern command, the processing from step S466 to step S472 may be executed prior to the processing from step S458 to step S464.

  Next, the main control program clears the special symbol hold history corresponding to the hold storage on which the variable display has been executed, and shifts the special symbol hold history (step S478). In the present embodiment, areas for storing special symbol holding histories for eight pieces (special symbol 1 and special symbol 2, each for four) are allocated, and a variable display corresponding to the first hold storage is started. And the special symbol holding history corresponding to the subsequent variable display is sequentially shifted. Specifically, the special symbol hold history stored in the second area (special symbol hold history identification 2 area) is moved to the top. Since each special symbol hold history identification area is assigned to a continuous area, the area in which seven special symbol hold histories are stored may be shifted. Finally, the last area of the special symbol hold history identification area (special symbol hold history identification 8 area) is cleared (step S480), and the special symbol change waiting process ends.

[9-13. Special symbol / flag setting process]
Next, the details of the special symbol / flag setting process (step S442) in the special symbol change waiting process will be described. In the special symbol / flag setting process, the variation display result of the special symbol is set at the start of the variation. FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a special symbol / flag setting process according to the present embodiment.

  First, the main control program stores a random number (special symbol big hit determination random number) for performing a special lottery big hit determination in a big hit determination random number buffer (variation random number storage area) (steps S500 to S506). Specifically, based on the special symbol identification flag, the special symbol for starting the variable display is specified, and the corresponding special symbol big hit determination random number storage 1 area (special symbol 1 big hit determination random number storage 1 area or special symbol 2) The special symbol big hit determination random number stored in the big hit determination random number storage 1 area is set. Then, the set special symbol big hit determination random number is stored (transferred) into the big hit determination random number buffer (variation random number storage area).

  That is, a special symbol holding storage area to be changed is specified, and the stored random value is stored in a corresponding area of the special symbol holding storage buffer. In addition to the special symbol big hit determination random number stored in the special symbol 1 (special symbol 2) jackpot determination random number storage 1 area, the random number value stored in the special symbol 1 (special symbol 2) reach determination random number storage 1 area To the random number buffer for reach determination, the random number value stored in the special pattern 1 (special symbol 2) variation pattern random number 1 storage 1 area to the variation pattern random number 1 buffer, and the special symbol 1 (special symbol 2) variation pattern The random number value stored in the random number 2 storage 1 area is stored in the random number buffer for variation pattern, and the random number value stored in the special symbol 1 (special symbol 2) variation type random number storage 1 area is stored in the random number buffer for variation type. Symbol 1 (Special symbol 2) The random number value stored in the special symbol random number memory 1 area is stored in the special symbol random number buffer.

  Subsequently, the main control program sets a big hit flag area as a big hit flag storage area (special symbol winning flag area) (step S508). Further, based on the big hit flag stored in the big hit flag area, a special symbol big hit determination process for determining the result of the special lottery is executed (step S510). The special symbol / flag setting process is a process executed at the start of the change, and sets the address value of the big hit flag area (special symbol winning flag area) to execute the special symbol big hit determination process. On the other hand, when the special symbol big hit determination process is executed at the time of prefetching (when it is executed in the process of step S250 of the memory prefetch process), as described above, the big hit flag buffer (special symbol winning flag buffer) is used as the big hit flag. Is set. In this way, by setting the area of the RAM to be referred / stored before executing the special symbol big hit determination processing at the time of pre-reading and at the time of change, the “special symbol big hit determination processing” is set at the time of pre-reading and at the time of change. It is possible to share in. Note that the procedure of the special symbol big hit determination process is as described with reference to FIG.

  Further, the main control program executes a special symbol determination process for determining the type (special symbol) of the result of the special lottery (big hit) (step S512). The special symbol determination process is common to the process of step S252 in the memory prefetching process, and can be shared at the time of prefetching and at the time of change as in the special symbol big hit determination process. As you did. Then, the main control program sets the special symbol number value set in the special symbol determination process as the special symbol number setting value (step S514).

  Next, the main control program searches a special symbol stop area (special symbol 1 stop area or special symbol 2 stop area) corresponding to the special symbol identification flag from the special stop symbol setting work area address table (step S516). Further, the special symbol number set value is stored in the special symbol stop area searched by the processing of step S516 (step S518).

  Then, the main control program executes a special symbol conversion process for selecting a display pattern to be displayed on the special symbol display (7-segment or the like) (step S520). If the determined symbol number is set as it is as the display data of the special symbol display, the display pattern becomes a fixed display pattern. For this reason, a display pattern is acquired so as not to become a constant display pattern by calculation. In addition, it is possible to select a display pattern from the symbol number in a dedicated table so that the display pattern does not become constant. The storage capacity for storing is increased. Therefore, by acquiring the display pattern by calculation, it is possible to prevent an increase in the storage capacity while preventing the player from identifying the display pattern.

  Finally, the main control program adds the symbol information value acquired by the special symbol conversion process to an area corresponding to the special symbol stop area searched in the process of step S516 (1 to the address of the searched special symbol stop area). (Step S522), and the special symbol / flag setting process ends.

[9-14. Special symbol variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special symbol change pattern setting process (step S444) in the special symbol change waiting process will be described. The special symbol variation pattern setting process is a process for setting a variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol. FIG. 35 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a special symbol variation pattern setting process according to the present embodiment.

  First, the main control program stores the number of special symbol operation reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol identification flag in the special symbol operation reserved ball number buffer (steps S530 to S536). Specifically, based on the special symbol identification flag, the special symbol operation reserved ball number area (special symbol 1 operation reserved ball number area or special symbol 2 activated reserved ball number area) corresponding to the special symbol for which the variable display is started is set. The value of the special symbol operation reserved ball number area (special symbol operation reserved ball number) is set as the stored value (steps S530 to S534). Then, the set storage value is stored in the special symbol operation pending ball count buffer (step S536).

  Subsequently, the main control program sets a big hit flag area in the big hit flag storage area (step S538). Further, the special symbol fluctuation distribution information source address table 1 is set as a special symbol fluctuation distribution information source address table holding information for selecting a fluctuation pattern (step S540). Thereafter, a variation pattern selection determination process for selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol is executed (step S542). The variation pattern selection determination processing is common to the processing of step S258 in the memory prefetch processing, and can be shared between prefetching and fluctuation as in the special symbol big hit determination processing, and will be described with reference to FIGS. As you did. When the variation pattern selection determination processing ends, the main control program sets the extracted variation pattern value in the variation pattern area (Step S544).

  Next, the main control program searches the special symbol variation time data for data (variation time value) corresponding to the variation pattern value (step S546). At this time, the obtained fluctuation time value becomes a reference fluctuation time value, and the reference fluctuation time value is saved.

  Further, the main control program executes a variation type determination process for acquiring the variation type type value (step S548), and sets the acquired variation type type value in the variation type type buffer (step S550). The variation type determination process is common to the process of step S262 in the memory prefetch process, and can be shared between prefetching and variation as in the special symbol big hit determination process, as described with reference to FIG. .

  Subsequently, the main control program searches the fluctuation time addition value data for a fluctuation time addition value corresponding to the fluctuation type classification value (step S552). The fluctuation time addition value is an addition time corresponding to the fluctuation type, and corresponds to, for example, an addition time corresponding to the number of pseudo runs. Then, the main control program adds the addition value searched in the process of step S552 to the reference change time value searched in the process of step S546, and acquires a final change time (step S554). Finally, the final variation time is stored in the special symbol / electric accessory operation timer area (step S556), and the special symbol variation pattern setting processing ends.

[9-15. Normal pattern and normal electric accessory control processing]
Next, the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process according to the present embodiment. The normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process is executed in the process of step S88 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  When the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing is started, the main control program first determines whether or not a game ball has passed through the gate unit (normal figure gate) 2350 (step S800). When the game ball passes through the gate unit 2350, the presence or absence of the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is read in the switch input process of step S74 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Input information is written in the area. The main control program refers to the written input information and determines the passage of the game ball.

  When the game ball has passed through the gate unit 2350 (the result of step S800 is “yes”), the main control program executes a gate passing process (step S802). In the process at the time of passing through the gate, a value of a counter for updating the random number for symbol hit determination is extracted and stored as gate information in the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. The details of the processing at the time of passing through the gate will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the game ball has not passed through the gate unit 2350 (the result of step S800 is “no”), or if the process at the time of passing the gate has been completed, the main control program executes a normal symbol / normal electric accessory. The process corresponding to the ordinary symbol / electric accessory operation number is retrieved from the operation call table (step S804), and the retrieved process is executed (step S810).

  In the process of step S810, based on the normal symbol / electric accessory operation number, a normal symbol change waiting process (step S812), a normal symbol change process (step S814), a normal symbol big hit determination process (step S816), a normal symbol loss A stop process (step S818), a normal symbol stop process (step S820), a normal electric accessory opening / closing process (step S822), or a normal power operation end interval process (step S824) are executed.

  In the normal symbol change waiting process (step S812), based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate unit 2350, a process of starting the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 is performed.

  In the normal symbol changing process (step S814), a process of controlling the variable display of the normal symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1189 is performed.

  In the normal symbol hit determination process (step S816), a winning determination of a normal lottery or the like is performed based on a game ball passing through the gate unit 2350.

  In the normal symbol loss stop process (step S818), when the normal lottery is not won, a process of stopping the fluctuation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 and notifying the effect is performed.

  In the normal symbol hit stop process (step S820), when a normal lottery is won, the normal symbol display 1189 stops displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol and informs the user of the fact, or a pair of movable pieces (normal electric accessory). Processing such as setting the opening / closing mode of 2106 is performed.

  In the normal electric accessory opening / closing process (step S822), the pair of movable pieces (ordinary electric accessory) 2106 are opened or closed so that the lower starting port 2102 can receive a game ball. Processing related to an operation of making the mouth 2102 unacceptable for a game ball is performed.

  In the ordinary power operation end interval process (step S824), it is determined whether or not the operation of the movable piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2106 has been completed.

[9-16. Processing when passing through the gate]
Next, details of the gate passing process (step S802) in the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process will be described. In the processing at the time of passing through the gate, a command transmitted when the passing of the game ball to the gate unit 2350 is detected, a random number for ordinary lottery is extracted and stored in a predetermined area, and a prefetch effect is executed. Or the like to perform the processing.

  In the processing at the time of passing the gate, as described above, the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2350 is detected, the value of a counter for updating the random number for symbol hit determination is extracted, and the gate information of the main control built-in RAM is used as gate information. The information is stored in the information storage area.

  The gate information storage area is provided with a 0th section to a 3rd section (four sections), and the gate information is stored in the order of the 0th section, the 1st section, the 2nd section, and the 3rd section. It has become. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th section to the 2nd section of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the third section of the gate information storage. I do.

  The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is stored in the first section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is stored in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the gate information is stored in the first section and the second section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information of the first section is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become free areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first section to the third section of the gate information storage, the above-described gate information is displayed such that the total number of stored gate information is set as a reserved ball and the ordinary symbol storage display 1188 is turned on. The output of the lighting signal of the ordinary symbol storage and display 1188 is set based on the above, and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. Hereinafter, the procedure of the processing at the time of passing through the gate will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  When the processing at the time of passing through the gate is started, the main control program first obtains the value of the normal symbol operation reserved ball count area as the operation reserved ball count (step S830). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of operation pending balls is equal to or more than the upper limit value of 4 (step S832). If the number of operation-reserved balls is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (the result of step S832 is “yes”), the processing at the time of passing through the gate ends.

  On the other hand, when the number of operation-reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (the result of step S832 is “no”), the main control program stores the number of operation-reserved balls in the normal symbol operation-reserved ball number buffer (step S834). Further, 1 is added to the content of the ordinary symbol operation reserved ball count area, and the ordinary symbol activated reserved ball count is updated (step S836).

  Next, the main control program stores the hit determination random number and the hit symbol random number in a predetermined area of the ordinary symbol random number storage area corresponding to the number of reservations (step S838). More specifically, the normal symbol random number storage area is divided into a 0th to a 3rd partition in a predetermined unit, and each of the partitions is a storage area corresponding to the number of reserved normal symbols. Each time a gate passes, a random number for determining a hit of a normal symbol and a random number for determining a hit symbol of a normal symbol are stored in a normal symbol random number storage area. Since the random number for hit determination and the random number for hit symbol are each composed of 1 byte, the predetermined unit is 2. Note that the random numbers stored for normal symbols are not limited to the random numbers. For example, when a random number for reach determination for normal symbols or a random number for fluctuation pattern is provided as in a special symbol, these are gated. A configuration in which the information is stored for each pass may be adopted.

  Finally, the main control program executes a normal symbol prefetching process based on the storage of the newly stored ordinary symbols (step S840). Details of the normal symbol prefetching process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[9-17. Normal pattern prefetching process]
Next, the details of the ordinary symbol prefetching process (step S848) in the process when passing through the gate will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the ordinary symbol prefetching process according to the present embodiment. In the normal symbol prefetching process, various random numbers are acquired before starting the variable display of the ordinary symbol based on the newly stored ordinary symbol holding memory, and the general symbol prefetch effect is performed by the peripheral control board based on the acquired random number value. Information for determination (ordinary symbol type prefetch effect command shown in FIG. 16) is generated, and processing such as transmitting a command corresponding to the peripheral control board 4140 is performed. Upon receiving the normal symbol type prefetch command, the peripheral control board 4140 determines whether or not the general symbol prefetch effect can be executed, and performs a process according to the determination result.

  When the normal symbol prefetching process is started, the main control program temporarily sets the prefetching determination value to prohibition (step S850). Further, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading determination prohibition period has been reached at the time of execution of the process (step S852).

  Here, a period in which the prefetch determination is prohibited will be described. FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating an example of a period in which the prefetch determination is prohibited. In the present embodiment, whether or not the prefetch determination of the normal lottery is prohibited is determined based on the operation (open) state of the movable piece 2106 (ordinary electric accessory).

  As shown in FIG. 39, the operating state of the ordinary electric accessory is determined by the game state and the special look-ahead effect. Further, the gaming state includes a probability state corresponding to the winning probability of the special lottery, and a time reduction state corresponding to the variation time, the winning probability, and the operation mode of the normal electric auditorium in the normal lottery. The probability states include a low-probability state (normal state) and a high-probability state (probable change state) in which the winning probability of the special figure lottery is higher than the low probability state. The time reduction state includes a non-time reduction state and a time reduction state that is more advantageous to the player than the non-time reduction state. In the time reduction state according to the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter, the probability of winning the general drawing lottery is higher than in the non-time reduction state, and the operation time of the normal electric auditorium (the lower starting port 2102 It is configured such that the time during which the ball can enter the ball is longer.

  In addition, in addition to the opening mode in the time saving state, the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory of the present embodiment includes a short opening mode in which a game ball is difficult to enter the lower starting port 2102, and a game ball area sufficient for the lower starting port 2102. There are two types of operation modes of long opening that can enter the ball. Further, the opening mode of the short opening and the long opening may be different between the non-time saving state and the time saving state. The short opening in the non-time saving state is an opening mode in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the starting port, but in the time saving state, it may be an opening mode in which the ball can easily enter the starting port in the same manner as the long opening. Further, the long opening may be a different opening mode between the non-time saving state and the time saving state, and may be an opening mode in which the rate of winning in the starting opening is further increased in the time reduction state as compared with the non-time reduction state. In the case of the short opening, it is difficult for the player to aim the game ball into the lower starting port 2102, so that the ordinary figure pre-reading effect is executed only in the case of the long opening.

  On the other hand, even in the case of the short opening, the prefetch effect may be executed. For example, by executing the same pre-reading effect in the long opening and the short opening, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether the player is in the long opening or the short opening, and the sense of expectation by the pre-reading effect can be further amplified. Also, by making the look-ahead effect different or only partially different between the short open and the long open, the player can identify which open pattern is to be used, and perform a firing operation corresponding to the open pattern. Thus, interest in the game can be increased.

  Further, as for the pre-reading effect, a gaseous effect may be provided regardless of whether it is long or short. The gaseous production is a process in which the look-ahead production is performed, but the production does not succeed (fail) in the end, so that the player is notified that the ordinary electric accessory will not be opened as a result. You may. Although the gasse effect is disappointing for the player as a result, if the gaseous effect is not provided, the opening operation is always performed when the look-ahead effect is performed, so the player's The aim is to amplify expectations. In addition, a look-ahead effect as a fixed effect in which either short opening or long opening is always executed in the look-ahead effect may be provided. With regard to the fixed effect, by making the mode different from the normal look-ahead effect, it is possible to amplify the sense of expectation for the player.

  In addition, in the case of the time reduction state, since the probability of winning the general drawing lottery is high, and since the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory is long, the profit of notifying the long opening is scarce for the player, so that the public figure prefetch effect is executed. It may not be done.

  Further, when the special figure pre-reading effect is being executed, the execution of the ordinary figure pre-reading effect may be restricted. In the present embodiment, when the special figure look-ahead effect that changes the mode of the hold display is being executed, it is permitted to execute the general figure look-ahead effect in parallel. On the other hand, when the special figure look-ahead effect that changes the background display is executed, if the probability state is low probability, the execution of the general figure look-ahead effect is permitted, and if the probability state is high probability, the general figure look-ahead effect is performed. Is regulated. This is because, in the special figure look-ahead effect in the high probability state, there is a high expectation that the special lottery will be won, and the effect of the universal figure look-ahead effect may be reduced. However, by performing the general-look-ahead effect, the player can be encouraged to continue firing without stopping the launch of the game ball while the special-aware-ahead effect is being performed. It may be executed. In addition, the execution of the general-purpose look-ahead effect may be restricted according to the gaming state. For example, in the case of the big hit gaming state, the execution of the general-purpose pre-ahead effect may be restricted.

  Here, the description returns to the flowchart of FIG. When the prefetch determination prohibition period is set (the result of step S852 is “yes”), the main control program executes the processing of step S868 and thereafter. On the other hand, if the prefetch determination prohibition period has not elapsed (the result of step S852 is “no”), the content of the hit determination random number storage area to be prefetched is stored in the hit determination random number buffer in order to execute the prefetch determination. (Step S854). Specifically, first, the random number value stored in any of the ordinary symbol random number storage areas of the sections 0 to 3 corresponding to the number of reserved balls is stored in the ordinary symbol random number buffer. The ordinary symbol random number buffer is configured to correspond to the random number value stored in the ordinary symbol random number storage area when passing through the gate. In the present embodiment, a 2-byte area of a hit determination random number and a hit symbol random number is secured, and is configured by a hit determination random number buffer and a hit symbol random number buffer. Specifically, the case where the number of reserved balls is 2 will be described. The hit determination random number and the hit symbol random number stored in the section 1 of the normal symbol random number storage area are respectively stored in a hit determination random number buffer and a hit symbol random number buffer. Is stored. As described above, the random number value related to the lottery is stored in the random number buffer for hit determination, and the “normal symbol hit determination process” is performed on the random number value stored in the random number buffer for hit determination, whereby the hit at the time of pre-reading is performed. The determination and the hit determination at the start of the change can be performed by common processing.

  Subsequently, the main control program sets a hit flag buffer as a hit flag storage area (step S856). By setting the address of the hit flag buffer as the reference address of the reference / setting destination, and executing the "normal symbol hit determination process", the hit result, the hit symbol, and the number of holdings are respectively a hit flag buffer, a normal symbol type area buffer. Is normally set / referenced in the symbol operation reserve ball count buffer. Further, the main control program executes a normal symbol hit determination process for determining a normal symbol hit (step S858). Details of the normal symbol hit determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, the hit determination random number buffer and the hit symbol random number buffer are cleared (step S860).

  After clearing the hit determination random number buffer and the hit symbol random number buffer, the main control program sets ordinary symbol type prefetch command creation data as command data (step S862), and refers to the contents of the ordinary symbol type prefetch command creation data. A prefetch command for the normal symbol (corresponding to the normal symbol type prefetch effect command in FIG. 16) is generated and set in the command buffer (step S864). Further, the pre-read determination value is reset to the pre-read permission (step S866).

  After the process of step S866 is completed, or in the case of the pre-reading determination prohibition period (the result of step S852 is “yes”), the main control program temporarily sets the normal symbol operation reserved ball count command creation data 1 as the command data. (Step S868). Further, it is determined whether or not the prefetch determination value is prohibition (step S870). If the prefetch determination value is not prohibition (result of step S870 is "no"), that is, if the prefetch determination value is prefetch permission. In step S872, the normal symbol operation pending ball count command creation data 2 is reset as command data. As described above, different commands are generated for the normal symbol operation pending ball number command when the prefetch is permitted and when the prefetch is prohibited, and for example, different modes are set depending on the permission or prohibition of the prefetch. Lastly, the main control program generates a normal symbol operation reserved ball count command when prefetching is permitted or when prefetching is prohibited based on the command data set in the process of step S868 or step S872 and sets the command in the command buffer (step S874). ).

[9-18. Ordinary symbol hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the ordinary symbol hit determination process (step S858) in the ordinary symbol prefetch process will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the normal symbol hit determination process in the present embodiment. In the normal symbol hit determination process, a process of determining the result of the normal lottery is performed.

  When the normal symbol hit determination processing is started, the main control program first sets the value of the hit determination random number buffer as a comparison value (step S900). Further, a lower limit of the hit value is selected from the normal symbol hit determination lower limit data table based on whether or not the game is in the time saving game state, and the normal symbol hit determination lower limit data is set (step S902). In addition, the normal symbol has a high probability during the time reduction, and the number of hit values during the time reduction is larger than the number of hit values during the non-time reduction, so the values such as the lower limit are smaller values during the time reduction. (The total number of hit values increases). Further, the main control program tentatively sets the normal symbol winning determination value to no ordinary symbol winning as a default value (step S904).

  Subsequently, the main control program determines whether or not the comparison value set in the processing of Step S900 is smaller than the hit determination lower limit set in the processing of Step S902 (Step S906). If the comparison value is smaller than the hit determination lower limit value (the result of step S906 is “yes”), the ordinary symbol lottery has not been won, so the ordinary symbol winning determination value provisionally set in the hit flag storage area (normal (No symbol winning) is stored (step S922). Further, the normal symbol winning determination value is also stored in the normal symbol type storage area (step S924). In other words, at the time of a loss, a hit value “0” (no normal symbol winning) is set in the hit flag storage area and the normal symbol type storage area.

  On the other hand, when the comparison value is equal to or greater than the hit determination lower limit value (the result of step S906 is “no”), the main control program further determines whether the comparison value is greater than the hit determination upper limit value (step S906). S908). If the comparison value is larger than the hit determination upper limit value (the result of step S908 is "yes"), it is determined that the game is out of place as in the case where the ordinary figure lottery is not won, and the hit flag area and the ordinary symbol type area are displayed. Each is set to "0" which is a deviation value. In the same manner as in the case of the special figure, if the hit determination random number is equal to or greater than the hit determination lower limit value, the hit determination may be made as a hit. In order to cope with a malfunction in which an exceeded value is set, the value is compared with the upper limit.

  When the comparison value is equal to or less than the hit determination upper limit value (the result of step S908 is "no"), the main control program determines that the general symbol lottery has been won, and determines the normal symbol winning determination value as a normal symbol winning determination value (" 1 ") is set (step S910). Then, the normal symbol winning determination value (normal symbol winning) is stored in the hit flag storage area (step S912).

  Subsequently, the main control program sets the ordinary symbol determination data 1 as search data (step S914). Further, a winning symbol random number is set as a comparison value (step S916), and a variation information number search process is executed (step S918). The ordinary symbol determination data 1 is searched based on the value of the winning symbol random number buffer by the variation information number search process to determine the winning symbol type, and the determined winning symbol type is stored in the ordinary symbol type storage area (step S920).

  As described above, in the normal symbol hit determination processing, the determination result is stored in the hit flag storage area and the normal symbol type storage area. By setting different areas in the hit flag storage area and the normal symbol type storage area in advance and at the time of change, it is possible to share the processing between the time of prefetch and the time of change. More specifically, a hit flag area is set in the hit flag storage area at the start of the change of the normal symbol, and a normal symbol type area is set in the normal symbol type storage area. On the other hand, at the time of pre-reading, a hit flag buffer is set in the hit flag storage area, and a normal symbol type area buffer is set in the normal symbol type storage area. With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, as in the case of the special lottery, the processing can be shared between the pre-reading and the start of the fluctuation also in the normal lottery.

  The main processing related to the special lottery and the normal lottery executed in the main control board 4100 has been described above. The program for executing the game control in the present embodiment is composed of a plurality of modules. FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating the module configuration of the main control program according to the present embodiment. In FIG. 41, some modules of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process and a part of the normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process are extracted and shown.

  In the control program of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, each function is divided into modules. General-purpose modules are commonly used in each process. For example, as shown in FIG. 41, the command buffer setting process executed when a command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 includes a special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a start opening winning process, and the like. It is configured to be used not only in the special symbol change waiting process and the like, but also in the ordinary symbol pre-reading process of the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process. With this configuration, it is possible to use a common module, a buffer, and the like at the time of command creation, regardless of the type of command, and it is possible to effectively use the resources of the gaming machine.

  Further, a process of searching for data (variation information number) from a predetermined table (variation information number search process) can be commonly used. This is realized by standardizing the configuration of the search target table and specifying a search range and search parameters. By thus configuring the modules in common, it is possible to improve program development efficiency and maintenance efficiency.

  In addition, the command buffer setting process and the change information number search process use modules with relatively few procedures in common. (At the time of the start winning prize) and at the start of the fluctuation.

  More specifically, as described above, at the time of pre-reading (memory pre-reading processing) and at the start of fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation waiting processing), special symbol big hit determination processing (FIG. 27), special symbol determination processing (FIG. 28), The variation pattern selection determination process (FIGS. 29 and 30) and the variation type determination process (FIG. 31) are commonly used. These processes are configured to refer to a value stored at a specified address, and by specifying a reference address before execution of the process, the values stored in different areas at the time of pre-reading and at the time of start of fluctuation are designated. Processing can be executed based on the value. Further, not only the value but also the reference destination of the table may be specified. For example, if the present invention is applied to a process of referring to a different table according to a game state, a common process can be performed regardless of the game state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the normal symbol hit determination process for determining the hit of the normal lottery is also shared in the process related to the normal symbol. In the normal symbol hit determination process, a hit flag indicating the result of the normal symbol lottery is obtained from the hit flag storage area and the process is performed. When the process is executed from the normal symbol prefetch determination process, the address of the hit flag buffer is referred to. The address is set as an address. When the process is normally executed from the symbol change waiting process, the address of the hit flag area is set as a reference address.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to share a module having a relatively large number of processes as described above, thereby improving program development efficiency and maintenance efficiency.

[10. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 4140 for receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) shown in FIG. 16 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 44 is an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150 and a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160. Here, various control processes of the peripheral control unit 4150 will be described. First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, followed by the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing. . In this embodiment, as the priority of the interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing is set highest, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit. They are set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

[10-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 12 performs a peripheral control unit power-on process as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a (step S1000). In the initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a itself, a process of determining hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 4150a first performs a process of initializing itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is initialized in a very short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a enters a state in which interrupt permission is set, and is output from the main control board 4100 in, for example, a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later, as shown in FIGS. In this state, various commands such as commands relating to control of game effects and commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be received. In the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a itself, the peripheral control MPU 4150a initializes the built-in VRAM by causing the built-in sound source VDP 4160a to write, for example, “0” to a storage area of the built-in VRAM.

  In the hot start / cold start determination process, for the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 13, the effect backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb. ) And the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), and Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 4150 cc. In addition to the effect backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up, the effect backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms). ms), and when the compared contents match each other, the contents stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which are storage areas normally used in the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. While the effect backup information (1fr) and the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1 ms) for Bank0 (1 ms), are copied back to a hot start, and compared. When the contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms), which are the storage areas normally used in the peripheral control RAM 4150c. And cold start.

  In the hot start / cold start determination process, the effect backup information (SRAM), which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150 db is also compared for the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. At the same time, the effect backup information (SRAM), which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM), in the backup second area 4150dc is compared. When the compared contents match, the effect backup information (SRAM), which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), for Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used in peripheral control SRAM 4150d (see FIG. 12). ) Is copied back to a hot start, and when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value is stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. A cold start is performed by forcibly writing 0. Subsequent to such a hot start or a cold start, a value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 4150cf of the peripheral control RAM 4150c (see FIG. 13) to clear it to zero. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e (see FIG. 12) so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. I have.

  Further, in the peripheral control unit power-on processing, the power-on contact sensitivity adjustment function built in the touch panel module 246a (contact input control means) operates as follows. That is, in the power-on contact sensitivity adjustment function, the touch panel module 246a itself adjusts the contact sensitivity on the contact surface of the touch panel 246 when power supply is started by the power supply control unit (initial contact sensitivity adjustment unit). ). Specifically, first, the control register 481a of the touch panel controller 481 stores a contact determination threshold value as a capacitance when the contact surface of the touch panel 246 is in a non-contact state. The touch panel controller 481 sets the contact determination threshold stored in the control register 481a to a predetermined initial value of the contact determination threshold (hereinafter referred to as “initial contact”) when power supply is started by the power supply control unit. The threshold is also updated.

  Subsequent to step S1000, the effect control program performs a current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In the current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are obtained from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in (1), the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage unit, and the current time information is set in the time information storage unit. Further, in the current time information acquisition process, a brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and sets the brightness of the LED included in the acquired brightness setting information to the game board. A process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the side liquid crystal display device 1900 to turn on the backlight is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. The set brightness of the LED as the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is included.

  In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, specifically, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75% and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is Is turned on by adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on with the brightness of the LED included in the setting information being 80%, the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Adjust brightness and turn on. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the above-described brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the use time of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed. It is not done at all. This is because the luminance setting process of the liquid crystal display device incorporates a correction program similar to the luminance correction program, so that each time the luminance setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed, the luminance of the LED is corrected toward 100%. This is to prevent that.

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. After performing the current time information acquisition process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1002, the effect control program sets a value 0 to a V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a later-described peripheral control unit steady-state process. Is not set, the value is set to 0. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a peripheral control, which will be described later, which is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be accepted is input from the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source. The value 1 is set in the section V blank signal interrupt processing. In step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after setting the value of the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0 so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. I have.

  Subsequent to step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). If the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (it is 0), the process returns to step S1008 to repeatedly determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. By repeating such a determination, the state becomes a standby state until the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. After determining whether or not this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and peripheral control external WDT 4150e to reset peripheral control MPU 4150a. So that they do n’t

  When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1 in step S1008, that is, when executing the peripheral control unit steady processing, the value 1 is first set to the steady processing flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and to a value 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times that the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN for counting the number of times, and the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is also initialized. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the effect control program performs a lamp data output process (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs a DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. When the serial transmission of the lamp drive board serial I / O port is started, the transmission data storage area 4150caa on the lamp drive board side of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. A state in which the game board-side light-emitting data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of the various decorative boards provided is created and set by a lamp data creation process described later. It has become.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the lamp driving board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and is stored in the head address of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. The first one byte of the game board-side emission data SL-DAT is transferred to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side light-emitting clock signal SL-CLK by 1 byte of the transmission shift register. The transmission of the data is started one bit at a time.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac receives the transmission interrupt request of the lamp driving board serial I / O port every time a transmission interrupt request is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the lamp driving board serial I / O port is transmitted to the transmission buffer register of the lamp driving board serial I / O port). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data is lost in the transmission buffer register, which is emptied.) The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa uses the bus. When there is no such data, the remaining game board-side emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board-side transmission data storage area 4150caa is transferred by one byte at a time via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transmission of serial I / O port for lamp drive board By transferring and writing the data to the buffer register, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side emission clock signal SL-CLK. Transmission of one byte of data of the transmission shift register is started one bit at a time, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board.

  In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs a DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Here, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. When the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port continuous transmission is started, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. At 4150cab, door-side emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. It is in the state of being set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area. The first byte of the door-side emission data STL-DAT stored at the head address of the 4150cab is transferred to the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. The data is transferred and written to the transmission buffer register of the I / O port. As a result, the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side emission clock signal STL-CLK to transmit the data of the transmission shift register. Transmission of one byte of data is started one bit at a time.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, whenever a transmission interrupt request of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port occurs, triggers this (in the present embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O The 1-byte data written to the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data is lost in the transmission buffer register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty.), The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa When no bus is used, the remaining door-side emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab is stored in the external bus 4150h and the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad in units of 1 byte. , And frame decoration via peripheral bus 4150ai By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the dynamic amplifier substrate LED, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. Transfer, start transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door side emission clock signal STL-CLK, and perform continuous transmission by the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. I have.

  Subsequent to step S1012, the effect control program performs an operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this operation unit monitoring process, in the operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the dial operation unit 401 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. Of the dial operation unit 401 (for example, the rotation direction (rotation direction) created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400). ) The history information and the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405 are set. On the basis of the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150kai of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The operation of the dial 405 is monitored to determine whether the dial 405 has been rotated. Appropriately determined whether to reflect the status of the operation of the pushing operation section 405 to the game effects.

  Subsequent to step S1014, the effect control program performs a display data output process (step S1016). In this display data output processing, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a by the display data creation processing described later is used by the built-in sound source VDP 4160a to display the liquid crystal display on the game board side from the channels CH1 and CH2. Output to the device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. Thereby, various screens are drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. In the display data output process, when the drawing exceeding the drawing capability of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a is performed, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal. The output to the display device 244 is canceled. Thereby, a delay in processing time can be prevented. However, although a so-called frame drop occurs, a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 4 by the lamp data output processing in step S1012, and A speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided on the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 and a speaker shown in FIG. 2 by the effect of a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 and sound data output processing described later. It is a mechanism that can give priority to synchronizing with the effects by music, sound effects, and the like in accordance with various effects from the speakers provided on the door frame 5.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as audio data serialized sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a in the sound data creation process described later, The sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound in addition to the music and sound effects are output as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. When serialized audio data is input from the built-in sound source VDP 4160a, the audio data transmission IC 4160c sends the right audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data of a positive signal and a negative signal. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data of a plus signal and a minus signal. As a result, music and sound effects matched to various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speakers accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers provided in the door frame 5, as well as notification sounds and notification sounds. It is played back in stereo.

  Subsequent to step S1018, the effect control program performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In the scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, what number of screen data from the first screen data is transferred to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. Update the pointer to indicate whether to output.

  In the scheduler update process, among the luminescence data arranged in time series that constitute the luminescence mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, the number of luminescence data starting from the first luminescence data is changed to the luminescence of various LEDs. The pointer is updated to indicate whether to use the mode.

  In the scheduler update processing, the sound data such as music and sound effects, the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in time series and constitute the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, are specified. The pointer is updated to indicate the order of the sound command data from the first sound command data to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a among the sound command data.

  In the scheduler update process, among the driving data of the electric driving sources such as the motors and the solenoids arranged in a time series that constitute the electric driving source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, the first driving data is used. The pointer is updated to indicate which drive data is to be output. The drive data of the electric drive sources, such as motors and solenoids, arranged in time series and constituting the electric drive source schedule data includes a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid driving process that is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the motor and the solenoid are driven in accordance with the driving data indicated by the pointer, and the next driving specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated each time its own process is executed. In other words, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, it is assumed that the pointer is temporarily instructed for some reason in the motor and solenoid drive processing. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be performed, the update is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process so as to instruct the drive data that should originally be instructed.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the effect control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In the received command analysis process, the effect control program analyzes various commands received from the main control board 4100 in a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command reception unit) described later (command analysis unit). ). That is, in the effect control program, the command received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is, for example, a start-up winning command for instructing the start of a start-up winning effect, the number of ordinary symbols held (0 to 4). , A symbol synchronizing effect start command for instructing the start of a symbol synchronizing effect, a symbol memory command output when the number of starting suspensions changes, and each time a game ball is received in the special winning opening 2103. The special winning opening 1 count display command (large winning opening count command) or the frame state 1 command (second error generating command, full tank error generating command) shown in FIG. By analyzing whether or not there is (command analyzing means), it is recognized which game state is currently in play. In addition, the effect control program is configured such that after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the command received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is a main frame opening command, a main frame closing command, a door frame opening command or a door frame closing command. Analyze whether it is a command. Various commands from the main control board 4100 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command storage area 4150cac of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 4150cac. As the various commands, various commands shown in FIG. 15 are classified into special figure 1 tuning effect related, special figure 2 various commands related to tuning effect related, various commands classified into big hit related, and power-on classified. Commands, various commands classified for ordinary drawing synchronizing production, various commands classified for normal electric production production, various commands classified for notification display shown in FIG. 16, and the above-described door frame opening command. , Door frame closing command, body frame opening command, body frame closing command, error clearing navigation command (corresponding to the second error clearing command), and frame state 1 command (corresponding to the second error generating command). There are various commands to be classified, various commands to be related to a test, and various commands to be classified into others.

  Following step S1022, the effect control program performs a warning process (step S1024). In the warning process, if the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, and the like, which are set in the abnormal display mode for performing the notification, are transmitted to the periphery of the peripheral control unit 4150. It is extracted from the various control data copy area 4150ce of the control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and is set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed from the pre-registered priority in descending order of priority, and the abnormality is automatically changed to another abnormal notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is supposed to. This allows multiple abnormalities to be monitored at the same time without losing the information that another abnormality has occurred and one abnormality has occurred after the occurrence of one abnormality and before resolving the abnormality. Can be.

  Further, in the warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) is classified into various commands classified into the status display shown in FIG. For example, in the case of an error clearing navigation command (second error clearing command), by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 in a manner different from a normal effect form associated with the effect operation, for example, a game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (producing device), upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 (producing device), lamp (producing device) to visually warn the outside, or use a pair of side speakers (producing device) to audibly externally. (Error reporting means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error canceling navigation command to the main control board 4100 by operating the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 even in the gaming state. Since the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to issue a warning to the outside, illegal acts on the main control board 4100 that may affect the progress of the game can be suppressed.

  Next, following the processing in step S1024, the effect control program performs RTC acquisition information updating processing (step S1025). In the RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program is stored in the calendar information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RTC acquisition information update processing, the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the time information storage unit, are updated, and the year, month, and month, which are the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit, based on the updated time information. The date is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1025, the effect control program performs an effect control process (step S1026). In the effect control process, the effect control program instructs execution of a process based on the progress state of the effect being executed. For example, when the fluctuation display game is not being executed, a demo screen is displayed, or when a command for a special figure tuning effect is received, the progress of the special figure tuning effect is controlled. In addition, a jackpot game effect or the like is executed based on the result of the variable display game. Details of the effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the effect control program performs special figure prefetching effect control processing (step S1027). In the special figure pre-reading effect control process, the effect control program performs settings at the time of starting the execution of the special figure pre-reading effect. Details of the special figure pre-reading effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1027, the effect control program performs general-purpose look-ahead effect control processing (step S1028). In the universal figure pre-reading effect control process, the effect control program performs setting and progress control at the time of starting execution of the universal figure pre-reading effect. The details of the ordinary figure pre-reading effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1027, the effect control program performs a lamp data creation process (step S1028). In the lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and sets the light emission pointed to by the pointer out of the time-series light emission data constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. Based on the data, the game board-side emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 4 is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4150. Of the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the various control data copy area 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. To multiple LEDs on various decorative boards provided Door-side emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal is extracted and created from various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control unit 4150. Are set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1028, the effect control program performs a display data creation process (step S1030). In the display data creation process, the pointer control is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, so that the effect control program is the data constituting the screen generation schedule data and arranged in chronological order in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Of the screen data, the screen data indicated by the pointer is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy area 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and is output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts at least one character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data, and extracts the at least one extracted character data. The sprite data is created from the above, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is generated in a built-in VRAM (corresponding to a frame buffer).

  By the way, in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, in accordance with the progress of the game, by displaying an image in which a large number of material images are superimposed on a background image in each frame, an attempt is made to make the mode in which the interest of the player is not exhausted. Although it is requested that display control be performed so that a larger number of material images are included in each frame in order to display a wider variety of images, including a large number of material images in each frame is, at first glance, a display. It seems like a heavy burden on control.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, for the purpose of simplifying the display control of frames including a large number of material images and reducing the processing load, the effect control program executes each frame displayed based on the drawing data and each frame. While managing the correspondence information in which the correspondence with a plurality of material images that can be represented is defined in advance, when trying to display a predetermined frame of each frame, referencing the correspondence information and performing the predetermined At least one predetermined material image to be included in the frame is specified, and the rendering data is included in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a without including the predetermined material image and including other material images excluding the predetermined material image. It is generated and stored in a built-in VRAM (frame buffer), and the predetermined frame based on the drawing data stored in the built-in VRAM is played Being displayed on the side the liquid crystal display device 1900 (display unit). Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

  First, in the present embodiment, at least a part of the background image data (hereinafter, also referred to as “specific background image data”) among a large number of background image data used for displaying a large number of background images constituting each frame is: On a background image based on the specific background image data, at least one material image such as a sprite (hereinafter, also referred to as a “specific sprite”) is to be arranged (hereinafter, referred to as an “original arrangement position”). As represented by a display mode that cannot be visually recognized (hereinafter, referred to as a “confidential state”), it is managed as follows.

  First, in the peripheral control board 4140, the following correspondence association table (correspondence information management means) is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Browse the table. In this correspondence linking table, each frame displayed based on each drawing data generated by the sound source built-in VDP 4160a and at least one sprite that can be represented in each frame (or a predetermined number of frame group groups) is displayed. Predefined correspondence information is managed together with a concealment release command (concealment release command) for releasing the visual concealment state of the at least one sprite from the correspondence. In this correspondence relation associating table, each sprite (and each background image) can be identified using a sprite number, and the coordinates of each sprite in the display range of each frame as a part of the correspondence information. Values are managed.

  In this correspondence association table, as such correspondence information, for example, at least one material image such as a sprite that can be represented in each frame displayed based on each drawing data generated by the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, The correspondence relationship with the concealment release command for releasing the visual concealment state of the at least one material image is defined in advance. In the following description, the at least one material image is referred to as “desired sprite”.

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a has a function of causing the sound source built-in VDP 4160a to generate drawing data from sprite data based on the scheduler data (drawing management means). When the effect control program attempts to display a predetermined frame in response to the result of the predetermined effect lottery executed when the start condition is satisfied, the peripheral control MPU 4150a controls the correspondence in the correspondence association table. By referring to the information, a desired sprite to be included in the predetermined frame and specified is specified (material image specifying unit).

  Further, the effect control program, when a desired sprite is to be represented in a predetermined frame according to the schedule data, by referring to the correspondence information of the correspondence association table, specifies the concealment release command corresponding to the desired sprite, The specified concealment release command is output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a (concealment release instruction means). The concealment release command includes a sprite number capable of identifying a desired sprite whose concealment state is to be released in the predetermined frame (hereinafter, referred to as a “desired sprite number”). With the output of such a concealment release command, the display state flag of the name tag information, which was off as the initial state, is updated to on. The name tag information and its display state flag are prepared for each sprite that can be represented in each frame, and are referred to when the sound source built-in VDP 4160a performs a drawing process.

  Here, when the effect control program attempts to display a predetermined frame under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a (drawing control means) is operated as follows. That is, when the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source does not receive the concealment release command, the display mode in which a desired sprite that can be included in the predetermined frame is kept in the concealed state based on the correspondence information in the correspondence association table is used. Is generated in the frame buffer. Thus, the effect control program can display a frame in a mode in which the desired sprite cannot be visually recognized on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a.

  On the other hand, when the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source receives the above-described concealment release command, the VDP 4160a receives the concealment release command and informs that the display state flag of the name tag information corresponding to the desired sprite number included in the command has been updated to ON. As an opportunity, a desired sprite corresponding to the concealment release command is specified with reference to the correspondence information in the correspondence association table. Further, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a generates drawing data for releasing the concealed state of the specified desired sprite into a display mode in which the desired sprite can be visually recognized, in the frame buffer. Thus, the effect control program can cause the gaming panel-side liquid crystal display device 1900 to display a frame in a display mode in which the desired sprite can be visually recognized at the original arrangement position under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a.

  By doing so, the effect control program does not need to finely manage which sprite groups can be represented in each frame when displaying a frame group of a certain scene due to the existence of the correspondence association table. On the other hand, the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source can draw a frame representing each desired sprite by a very simple control compared with the conventional display control, such as whether or not to output the concealment release command to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. A frame that does not represent a sprite can be drawn. This makes it possible to simplify the display control of a frame including a large number of sprites and reduce the processing load.

  In addition, a configuration is employed in which the sprite group including the desired sprite is linked to the staging control program (the concealment release command group issued by the effect control program) to manage the correspondence by the correspondence association table described above. Thus, the creation work of sprite data and the design work of the production control program can be completely separated independently of each other, and the design work related to the display control can be simplified.

  By the way, as described above, as a detection device that can be mounted on a pachinko gaming machine, generally, sensitivity adjustment is performed as an initial process when power is turned on, and then many devices operate with the sensitivity. Even if the adjustment of the contact sensitivity is performed in the initial processing as described above, the sensitivity may gradually become inappropriate at first glance depending on the subsequent game environment.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in this display data creation processing, the effect control program further controls the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 (second display means) under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. A function of outputting the above-described effect command (effect effect command) for executing a display operation in a mode of prompting contact with the operation surface, and causing the touch panel module 246a (contact input control means) to adjust the contact sensitivity of the touch surface of the touch panel 246. A threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) for enabling (contact sensitivity adjustment means) is output (command output means). In other words, the effect control program uses the upper plate-side liquid crystal display device 244 to prompt the user to touch the operation surface of the touch panel 246 with his / her finger as an effect command (effect execution instruction) (to the operation surface of the contact input means). A command to execute the display operation of (a mode for prompting contact) is written in the transmission information storage area, and thereafter, is output to the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (contact prompting means). Next, when the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 receives the command, the effect control program (display control program under the control of) directs a finger on the operation surface of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) based on the command. A screen prompting to touch is displayed on the upper plate-side liquid crystal display device 244.

  Next, following step S1030, the effect control program performs touch panel processing (step S1031). In the touch panel processing, the effect control program mainly detects a contact state on the operation surface of the touch panel 246 based on a contact detection signal as a detection signal received from the touch panel module 246a of the touch panel 246 under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. (Contact state detecting means). That is, the effect control program also has a function as a touch panel driver (contact state detecting means) for detecting a contact state on the operation surface of the touch panel 246. The effect control program acquires coordinate values of the operation surface of the touch panel 246 indicating the center of the contact portion based on the contact state, specifies a position represented by the coordinate values as a detection point (detection point acquisition means), The operation information including the initial position is obtained. The effect control program may obtain not only such coordinate values but also a range of the operation surface (hereinafter, referred to as a contact range).

  In this touch panel processing, as a countermeasure to the above-mentioned concerns, the effect control program is further controlled by the peripheral control MPU 4150a separately from the above-described effect command (effect effect command), and then transmitted to the control register 481a of the touch panel controller 481. A threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) for updating the stored contact determination threshold is written in the transmission information storage area at a predetermined timing, and then output to the touch panel module 246a (touch input control means) (sensitivity adjustment). Command means).

  Specifically, the effect control program executes a special figure 1 tuning effect end command (see FIG. 15) from the main control MPU 4100a when the fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 (first special symbol) elapses as the predetermined timing. ) At the time when a predetermined time (for example, one minute) has elapsed since the last reception of the special symbol 2 or when the fluctuation time of the special symbol 2 (second special symbol) has elapsed. 15), the threshold setting command described above is written in the transmission information storage area and transmitted to the touch panel controller 481 of the touch panel module 246a when a predetermined time (for example, one minute) has elapsed since the last reception of the threshold value.

  The effect control program controls the touch panel module 246a, and the touch panel controller 481 receives a threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) output from the peripheral control MPU 4150a as an example of the touch panel module 246a, and the touch panel controller 481 contacts the touch panel 246. Adjust the contact sensitivity on the surface. In other words, when the effect control program receives the threshold setting command from the peripheral control MPU 4150a in the touch panel controller 481 of the touch panel module 246a, the contact determination stored in the control register 481a is performed based on the threshold setting command. The contact sensitivity of the touch panel 246 is adjusted by updating the use threshold. Specifically, upon receiving the threshold setting command, the touch panel controller 481 acquires a capacitance based on a detection signal output from the touch panel sensor 482, and uses the capacitance as a contact surface of the touch panel 246. Is regarded as a new contact determination threshold value in the non-contact state, and the contact determination threshold value stored in the control register 481a is updated with the new contact determination threshold value.

  Then, thereafter, the touch panel controller 481 compares the new contact determination threshold updated in the control register 481a with the detected capacitance acquired every time the contact state is detected as described above. If it is determined that the detected capacitance is less than the contact determination threshold, it is determined that the contact surface is in a non-contact state. It is determined that the contact surface is in a contact state.

  As described above, when the touch panel controller 481 determines that the contact surface is in the contact state, the touch panel controller 481 outputs the contact detection information including the detection coordinate value on the contact surface to the peripheral control board 4140. When the peripheral control board 4140 receives the contact detection information, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can grasp the contact position on the above-mentioned contact surface based on the detection coordinate value included in the received contact detection information.

  As described above, the touch panel controller 481 changes the contact sensitivity of the touch panel 246 at a desired timing triggered by receiving the threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) output by the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140. Since the determined contact determination threshold is updated, if the output timing of the threshold setting command by the peripheral control MPU 4150a is appropriately controlled, the touch sensitivity of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) is adjusted at a desired timing. (Calibration) For this reason, the effect control program causes the touch panel controller 481 to receive the threshold setting command without the output timing that may affect the game by the player, so that the touch panel 246 is always controlled without affecting the game. The detection of the contact state can be set to an appropriate operation mode.

  As described above, the timing at which the effect control program should output the threshold setting command to the touch panel controller 481 under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is, for example, a special figure 1 tuning effect end command output when the variable display of the special symbol ends. Alternatively, a predetermined time (for example, one minute) has elapsed since the reception of the special figure 2 tuning effect end command, and the possibility that the player has stopped playing the game and thus has low contact with the operation surface of the touch panel 246 is low. Timing can be exemplified. That is, such adjustment of the contact sensitivity is performed as much as possible while performing the variation display of the special symbol which may execute the effect using the touch panel 246 and the variation display is finished. I have.

  In addition, the timing at which the threshold setting command should be output includes, in addition to the above, an effect control program, which is transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a when the ordinary symbol variation time has elapsed, is a command for ending a general- figure tuning effect (see FIG. 15). The timing may be a timing when a predetermined time (for example, one minute) has elapsed from the reception.

  On the other hand, as described above, the touch panel 246 is of a capacitance type, is capable of storing a large number of game balls, and is provided on the upper plate 301 where static electricity is easily generated. Since the sensitivity adjustment is performed at a predetermined timing in response to the change of the surrounding environment, even if it is not caused by the operation of the player, it is erroneously detected that the capacitance has changed. It becomes difficult to do.

  Subsequent to step S1031, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In the sound data creation processing, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and selects the sound indicated by the pointer from the sound command data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the sound generation schedule data. The command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 4160b and controls the built-in sound source to thereby control the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number specified in the data, and an output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data creation process, the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak shown in FIG. 13 is activated every time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit regular process is performed), and the volume adjustment volume is adjusted. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob 4140a is converted into 1024 levels of values from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6, the volume is set to mute for substrate volume 0, and set to the maximum volume for substrate volume 6, and Each volume is set to increase toward the volume 6. The liquid crystal and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the sound control unit 4160 are controlled so as to have the volume set to the substrate volumes 0 to 6, and the audio data is converted into the audio data obtained by serializing the sound data in the sound data output processing in step S1018 described above. By outputting to the transmission IC 4160c, music and sound effects are played from the speakers contained in the speaker box 920 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers provided on the door frame 5.

  In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, and the volume from the silence to the maximum volume is programmed by the liquid crystal and the sound source of the sound control unit 4160. The built-in VDP 4160a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-described seven-stage board volume, and can smoothly change from mute to the maximum volume. For example, even when a store clerk in a hall or the like turns the knob of the volume control volume 4140a to set the volume to a low level, the speaker and the door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 may be used. Although the effect sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the provided speaker becomes small, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is malfunctioning or when the player is performing wrongdoing, the sound volume is large (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume is (Sound volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the sound volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk in the hall from becoming difficult to notice the malfunction or the illegal act of the player by the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to disturb the music and sound effects, while In addition to the music and sound effects, the screen that is unfolded by the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate-side liquid crystal display device 244 is rendered more powerful, and is advantageous to the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of transition to the gaming state.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program stores the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150c, which is externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, in the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc shown in FIG. The contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control SRAM 4150d are copied and backed up in the first backup area 4150db and the second backup area 4150dc, respectively.

  Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c is backed up every frame (1 frame) in the backup management work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 13, that is, every time the peripheral control unit regular process is executed. The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, the reception command storage area 4150cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, which are included in the target Bank0 (1fr). The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, is used as the effect backup information (1fr), and Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 ( Peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to fr) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 4150cc (1fr) and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank4 (1FR) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are designated to be copied to Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb, and the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) are changed to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). All the contents up to the stored contents are successively copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) sequentially from the start address of Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb, and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is copied by the peripheral control CPU 4150aa. A copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the A controller 4150ac to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb is designated, and the contents stored at the head address of Bank0 (1fr) are changed to Bank0 (1fr). The contents stored at the end address of (1fr) are all copied in order from the head address of Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and Bank0 (1fr). ) From the contents stored at the start address to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), and the start address of Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) continuously. , And the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa designates the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and copies the contents to the backup second area 4150cc in Bank4 (1fr). I From the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously provided in a backup second area 4150cc Bank4 (1fr). All are copied in order from the start address of.

  In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d becomes a backup target every one frame (1 frame) in the backup management work area 4150da shown in FIG. The effect information (SRAM) which is the content stored in the existing Bank0 (SRAM) is used as effect backup information (SRAM), and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is stored in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc.

  The high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) are designated to be copied to Bank1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db, and the contents stored in the head address of Bank0 (SRAM) are changed to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). All the contents up to the stored contents are successively copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in order from the head address of Bank 1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db, and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) are designated as the request factors of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) are designated by copying the backup first area 4150db to Bank2 (SRAM). From the start address of Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db, all of the contents from to the contents stored in the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) are successively copied in predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa designates copying of the contents stored in the Bank0 (SRAM) to the Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the Bank0 (SRAM). ) From the contents stored at the start address to the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM), and the start address of Bank 3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) continuously. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa copies the contents stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) to the Bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. The backup second area 4150dc is continuously designated by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) from the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). Are copied in order from the top address of Bank 4 (SRAM).

  Subsequent to step S1034, a WDT clear process is performed (step S1036). In the WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is initialized by setting the value to 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the process proceeds from step S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1, the processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is performed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit regular processing”.

  The peripheral control unit steady processing starts when the effect control program first sets the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed in step S1009, and interrupts for 1 ms in step S1010. .., And step S1036. Finally, in step S1038, a value 0 is set to the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing. Once set, it will be completed. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the value of the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from peripheral control MPU 4150a can be accepted is input from VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source. The value 1 is set in the later-described peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[10-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data can be accepted from the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 12 is input from the liquid crystal and sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the sound control unit 4160. A description will be given of the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed as a trigger. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG has the value 0 as shown in FIG. S1045). As described above, the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

  If the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not the value 0 (it is the value 1) in step S1045, that is, if the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this routine is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG has the value 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). This routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing. The value is set to 0 when the partial steady-state processing is not executed.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in step S1045, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit regular processing has been completed, and the execution of the peripheral control unit regular processing has been completed. Sometimes, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank When the value 1 is set to the signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is determined that the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed by the determination in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. Since the peripheral control unit regular processing is forcibly canceled in the middle and the peripheral control unit regular processing is started from the beginning, the peripheral control unit power supply shown in FIG. In step S1009 in the processing (peripheral control unit steady processing), the value of 1 is set in the stationary processing flag SP-FLG to indicate that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. 42. In the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit regular process) of FIG. 42, the peripheral control unit regular process is completed by setting the value 0 to the steady process flag SP-FLG in step S1038. The fact that this has been done is transmitted to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine, so that the steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine. It is determined whether or not there is, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit regular processing has been completed. In other words, this is a process in a case where the peripheral control unit normal processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, and the processing is aborted.

  As a result, in the current peripheral control unit regular processing, if the processing cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing is dropped, the next time in the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. In a standby state until the V blank signal is input. In other words, the time required to execute the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of this time when the processing has failed is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) of FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady-state process. However, if the current peripheral control unit steady-state process that has failed as described above exists, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed 64 times. Instead, it is executed only 32 times. In other words, even when the peripheral control unit steady processing has failed, the consistency between the state of progress of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the state of progress of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not guaranteed. It does not collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing is not performed, the progress state of the effect can be surely matched.

[10-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 42 will be described. . When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, in the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 12, under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, as shown in FIG. Is smaller than 33 times (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit regular processing is repeatedly executed at about every 33.3 ms, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing, and then the next peripheral control unit regular processing is performed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs first, and the second,..., And 32 th 1 ms timer interrupts are sequentially performed. Will occur.

  If the 1-ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 in step S1100, that is, if the 33-th 1-ms timer interrupt has occurred and the peripheral control unit 1-ms timer interrupt process has been started, the effect control program remains in this routine. To end. If the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is set to the peripheral control unit V Although set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, In order to execute the peripheral control unit blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the first generation of the 1 ms timer interrupt is started. ing.

  On the other hand, if the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit normal process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. The number of times the 1 ms timer interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit as this routine is executed is increased by one time.

  Subsequent to step S1102, the effect control program performs a motor and solenoid drive process (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid driving process, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. According to the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and the solenoids, the effect control program controls the electric drive sources such as the motors and the solenoids of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180. While driving, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

  Specifically, in the motor and solenoid driving process, the effect control program performs a DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194. Here, the effect control program uses the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. When serial transmission of serial I / O ports for frame decoration drive amplifier board motors is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c is stored. A drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 12 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and the solenoids arranged in chronological order. Motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting the data from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Framed Set in the transmission data storage area 4150caf drive amplifier board side motor. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data. The first byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the start address of the area 4150caf is transferred to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. To the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port. As a result, the frame decoration driving amplifier board motor serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side motor driving clock signal STM-CLK to transmit the transmission shift register. The transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, whenever a transmission interrupt request of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port occurs, triggers it (in the present embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O The 1-byte data written to the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data is lost in the transmission buffer register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty.), The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa When no bus is used, the external bus 4150h and the peripheral control bus controller store the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf by 1 byte. 4150ad, and via the peripheral bus 4150ai, By transferring the data to the transmission buffer register of the decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port and writing the data, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. To start transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. Is going.

  In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Also in this case, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. When the serial transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port is started, first, when configuring the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c. Based on the driving data indicated by the pointer among the driving data of the electric driving sources such as the motors and the solenoids arranged in a series, the driving to the motors and the solenoids for moving the various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 is performed. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting a signal is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and created. Motor of control RAM 4150c Set the dynamic substrate side transmission data storage area 4150Cag. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores it in the head address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. The first one byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is transmitted to the serial I / O port for motor drive board via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer to register and write. As a result, the motor drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side motor driving clock signal SM-CLK to transmit the data of the transmission shift register. Transmission of byte data is started one bit at a time.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, whenever a transmission interrupt request of the motor drive board serial I / O port is generated, triggers the transmission interrupt request (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I / O port transmission buffer register). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data is lost in the transmission buffer register, which is emptied.) The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa uses the bus. If not, the remaining game board-side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board-side transmission data storage area 4150cag is transferred by one byte at a time via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. , Serial I / O port for motor drive board By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register, the serial I / O port for motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and outputs the game board side motor driving clock signal SM-CLK and Synchronously, transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  Subsequent to step S1104, a movable body information acquisition process is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 4 have been input, so that the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, the original position history information , Movable position history information, etc.), and set them in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, the original position and movable position of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1106, operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this operation unit information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 have been input, and the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, dial operation unit) The rotation (rotation direction) history information of 401, the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) are created, and the operation unit information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Set to 4150 cai. The rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the presence / absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be acquired from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150kai.

  Subsequent to step S1108, the effect control program performs a drawing state acquisition process (S1110), subsequently performs a backup process (step S1112), and ends this routine. In the backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 13 are copied and backed up to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, respectively. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d which is externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a are copied and backed up in the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, respectively.

  More specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c executes the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process in the backup management work area 4150ca shown in FIG. Every time it is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area included in Bank0 (1 ms) to be backed up The effect information (1 ms) stored in the 4150cah and the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150kai is used as effect backup information (1ms), and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 of the backup first area 4150cb. Peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to 1 ms) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 4150cc (1ms) and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank4 (1 ms) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) are designated to be copied to Bank1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150 cb, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) are changed to the end address of Bank0 (1 ms). All the contents up to the stored contents are successively copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) sequentially from the start address of Bank1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150cb, and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is copied by the peripheral control CPU 4150aa. A copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as a request factor of the A controller 4150ac to Bank2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150cb is designated, and the contents stored at the head address of Bank0 (1ms) are changed to Bank0 (1ms). The contents stored at the end address of (1 ms) are all copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150 cb in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) to Bank3 (1ms) of the backup second area 4150cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and Bank0 (1ms). ) From the contents stored at the start address to the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms), and the start address of Bank 3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 4150 cc continuously by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). , And the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa designates the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac and copies the data to the backup second area 4150cc in Bank4 (1ms). I From the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms), backup bytes (1 ms) of the backup second area 4150 cc are continuously provided in predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). All are copied in order from the start address of.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the various processes related to the effects in steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit regular process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 42, the various processes related to the effects of steps S1012 to S1032 are performed as the progress of the effect within a period of about 33.3 ms. are doing. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt will After the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control by the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt is performed. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. In other words, consistency between the state of progress of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the state of progress of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to surely match the progress state of the effect.

  Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output slightly changes depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. Even in the manufacturing lot of the mounted peripheral control board 4140, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may be slightly changed. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute the section V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control section 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in the present embodiment, even when the interval at which the V blank signal is output slightly changes, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb a time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[10-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 will be described. The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 12 starts transmission of various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, which triggers main peripheral serial data to be incorporated in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. One byte (8 bits) of information is fetched into the reception buffer by the serial I / O port for the board, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated in response to this, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is allocated as the first byte, the mode is allocated as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte, and the total is obtained. Is calculated.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether or not the one-byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200). The one-byte reception period timer sets a period during which one-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100.

  If the 1-byte receiving period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, if the 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main serial data transmitted from main control board 4100 is within the period in which information of 1 byte (8 bits) can be received, The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I / O port for the main control board incorporated in the control MPU 4150a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). The reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the data has been extracted from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode that is the second byte of the main serial data is When the value is taken out from the reception buffer, the value becomes 2, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data is taken out from the reception buffer, the value becomes 3. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has the value 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data are sequentially transmitted from the reception buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been removed.

  In step S1206, when the value of the reception counter SRXC is not 3, ie, following the status which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode which is still the second byte of the main serial data, and the third byte of the main serial data If the sum value is not taken out from the reception buffer in order, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode in which the second byte of the main serial data or the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, when the value of the reception counter SRXC is 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main serial data, and When the sum value, which is the byte, is sequentially extracted from the reception buffer, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). This calculation is performed by regarding the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, already taken out of the reception buffer in step S1202 as numerical values, and sums them (sum value). ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1212). S1214). The sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main serial data from the main serial data from the main control board 4100. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied with gaming balls from the pachinko island equipment, and when the gaming balls rub against each other and are charged, they are electrostatically discharged to generate noise. It is in a file environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 4150 considers the status allocated as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main serial data as numerical values. Then, the sum (sum value) is calculated, and the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main serial data among the main serial data from the main control board 4100. Has been determined. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the main circumference serial data has been changed to a non-regular main circumference serial data due to the noise between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. be able to.

  In step S1214, when the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the received main serial data is received. The status allocated as the first byte and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main serial data correspond to the received command storage area 4150cac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally shown in FIG. (Step S1216), and this routine ends. The reception command storage area 4150 cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main serial data are determined by the reception command storage area. 4150 cac is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected, stores data sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and returns to the beginning when it reaches the end of the buffer. Remember. Note that the peripheral control MPU 4150a allocates the received status allocated as the first byte of the main serial data and the second status of the main serial data when storing it in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. And the associated mode, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

  On the other hand, when the one-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period exceeds the period in which one-byte (8-bit) information can be received in the main serial data transmitted from main control board 4100. In some cases, or when it is determined in step S1214 that the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is directly executed. finish.

[10-5. Fluctuation pattern]
Next, effects in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating an example of a fluctuation pattern table according to the present embodiment. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for managing a pattern (fluctuation pattern) of a special figure tuning effect executed by the peripheral control board 4140 in synchronization with the fluctuation display (fluctuation display game) of the special symbol on the main control board 4100. The special figure synchronizing effect includes effects in which the peripheral control board 4140 causes the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900 to change and display a decorative pattern or to display a character corresponding to the changing display game. In addition, effects such as operating a movable accessory, illuminating a light-emitting body such as a lamp, and outputting sound from a speaker may be included during the change display of the decorative symbol. The effects corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the present embodiment include story reach, pseudo continuous fluctuation (pseudo continuous), and the like. Also, a variation pattern that extends over a plurality of variation display games may be defined.

  The story reach is an effect in which the decorative effect is in the reach mode and a specific effect according to the degree of expectation (possibility of a big hit) of the running variable display game is executed one or more times. In the present embodiment, the degree of expectation of the big hit is set to be higher as the number of executions of the specific effect is larger. The specific effect may be executed before the occurrence of the reach, or may be executed only after the occurrence of the reach. In addition, the effect form of the specific effect includes, for example, effects such as screen display (cut-in) such as appearance of a character, dialogue (screen display, audio output), operation of movable character, and light emission of a lamp. . In addition, for the same type of effect, a plurality of different effect modes depending on the degree of expectation may be defined.

  The pseudo continuous fluctuation is an effect in which the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol (identification symbol) is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and the fluctuation is performed again. The temporary stop and the re-change are repeated one or more times. In the present embodiment, the setting is such that the greater the number of stops, the higher the degree of expectation of the big hit. In addition, when performing the pseudo continuous fluctuation, an effect such as making a character appear when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped may be performed, or the effect may be performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. When reach occurs in the final variation of the pseudo continuous variation, the type of reach in the final variation may be defined together.

  The variation pattern is a special figure 1 variation pattern command or a special figure 2 variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 (hereinafter, the special figure 1 variation pattern command and the special figure 2 variation pattern command are combined). (Special figure variation pattern command) mode (effect pattern) and special figure 1 symbol type command or special figure 2 symbol type command (hereinafter, special figure 1 symbol type command and special figure 2 symbol) This is selected based on the value (the result of the variable display game) set in the mode of "special symbol type command" together with the type command). Further, one variation pattern or a plurality of variation patterns may correspond to a combination of the special figure 1 (2) variation pattern command and the special figure 1 (2) symbol type command. When a plurality of fluctuation patterns correspond to each other, a random number value may be obtained and selected by lottery, or may be selected based on a predetermined condition such as a game state.

  The variation pattern table includes items such as a variation pattern name, winning information, variation time, the number of effects inserted (the number of scenarios), an effect selection pattern, and a re-lottery. “Variation pattern name” is a name for identifying a variation pattern. The "winning information" is a result of the variable display game to be executed, and corresponds to a value set in the mode of the special figure 1 symbol type command or the special figure 2 symbol type command. Note that a game state (for example, a “normal state”, a “probable change state”, or a “time reduction state”) may be used instead of the “winning information”.

  The “fluctuation time” corresponds to a fluctuation time (execution time of a fluctuation display game) in which the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed. Further, the variation time may be changed according to the number of stored memories. For example, when the number of startup memories is large (for example, the number of startup memories is 3 or more), the fluctuation time may be reduced. In addition, it is the same as the change time of the special symbol (identification symbol) in the upper special symbol indicator 1185 or the lower special symbol indicator 1186 of the function display unit 1180. The same applies to the case where the fluctuation time is shortened.

  The "number of effects inserted" is the number of times a specific effect is executed during the fluctuation display in the story reach, or the number of times the special symbol is temporarily stopped (regardless of whether the effect is executed during the temporary stop) in the pseudo continuous fluctuation. It is. The “effect selection pattern” is definition information for selecting a candidate for a specific effect to be executed in the story reach, or for selecting an effect to be executed at the time of a temporary stop in pseudo continuous variation. In the present embodiment, the effect selection pattern is set such that the higher the reliability variation pattern is, the easier it is to select a high reliability specific effect. A specific example of the “effect selection pattern” will be described later with reference to FIG.

  “Re-lottery” is information that defines whether or not to execute a process of re-lotting a stopped special symbol after the change display of the special symbol ends. In the present embodiment, the “re-lottery” is executed when the result of the variable display game is a special result (for example, a big hit).

[10-6. Receive command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process (the process of step S1022 in FIG. 42) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the reception command analysis processing according to the present embodiment.

  In the received command analysis processing, the effect control program is executed by the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) to determine whether the command transmitted from the main control board 4100 is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer. It is determined (step S1401).

  Upon receiving a command from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control board 4140 according to the present embodiment generates a peripheral control section command reception interrupt process (FIG. 45). Are stored in a received command storage area 4150cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of a peripheral control RAM 4150c provided in a peripheral control board 4140. A plurality of areas are provided in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer, and various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 are stored in the order in which they are received.

  If a command is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer (result of step S1401 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 4150a transmits the command with the earliest reception order from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control unit reception ring. The data is read from the buffer (step S1402).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the command read in the processing of step S1402 is a special figure changing pattern command (special figure 1 changing pattern command or special figure 2 changing pattern command, FIG. 15) (step S1403). ). If it is determined that the command is a special figure variation pattern command (the result of step S1403 is “Yes”), the special figure variation pattern command is stored in the variation display pattern storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140, and the variation is performed. The pattern reception flag is set (step S1404), and the reception command analysis processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the read command is not a special figure variation pattern command (the result of step S1403 is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that the read command is a special figure pattern type command (a special figure 1 symbol type command or a special figure type command). It is determined whether or not the symbol type command is a winning information command indicating “losing”, “specific jackpot”, and “non-specific jackpot” (FIG. 15) (step S1405). If it is determined that the command is the special symbol type command (the result of step S1405 is "Yes"), the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140 (step S1406), and the reception command is received. The analysis processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the read-out effect command is not a special symbol type command (the result of step S1405 is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that the read command instructs a special figure prefetch effect (special symbol 1 hold). It is determined whether the command is a number designation command or a special symbol 2 reservation number designation command (pre-reading is present, FIG. 16) (step S1407). The special figure pre-reading effect command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 at the timing when the number of special symbol 1 operation reserved balls (special symbol 2 operation reserved ball number) increases. As will be described later, when the read-out effect command is a command for instructing a special figure pre-reading effect, a special figure pre-reading effect execution flag indicating execution of the special figure pre-reading effect is set. Therefore, the determination of "Yes" in the processing of step S1407 described above is limited to the case where the read-out effect command is the special symbol 1 (2) reserved number designation command of "pre-read". In the case of the special symbol 1 (2) reserved number designation command of "no pre-reading", "No" is determined. As the special figure pre-reading effect command to be determined in the process of step S1407, a command instructing a special figure pre-reading effect other than the special symbol 1 (2) reserved number designation command (symbol pattern pre-reading, fluctuation pattern pre-reading, fluctuation type pre-reading) The determination of “Yes” may be made when the command for instructing all the special figure pre-reading effects is received.

  Further, when the read-out effect command is a special figure pre-reading effect command (the result of step S1407 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets a special figure pre-reading effect execution flag (step S1408), and executes the received command analysis process. To end. When the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag is set, in the special figure look-ahead effect control process (step S1027 in FIG. 42) executed in the peripheral control unit regular processing, whether or not to execute the special figure look-ahead effect is determined. Make the necessary settings to execute the effect. The main control board 4100 may determine whether or not to execute the special figure pre-reading effect.

  On the other hand, if the read-out effect command is not the special figure look-ahead effect command (the result of step S1408 is "No"), the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that the read command is a general figure look-ahead effect command (a normal symbol type look-ahead command, FIG. 16). ) Is determined (step S1409). The general figure pre-reading effect command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 at the timing when the number of ordinary design operation pending balls increases. Further, the universal figure pre-reading effect command includes information corresponding to the result of the universal figure lottery. When receiving the general figure pre-reading effect command, a general figure pre-reading effect execution flag for instructing the start of the normal symbol type pre-reading effect (normal figure pre-reading effect) is set. When the universal figure pre-reading effect execution flag is set, in the general figure pre-reading effect control process (step S1028 in FIG. 42) executed in the peripheral control unit regular processing, it is determined whether or not the universal figure pre-reading effect can be executed. Make the necessary settings to execute the effect. It should be noted that the main control board 4100 may determine whether or not to execute the general-purpose look-ahead effect. In the case of a model that does not execute the ordinary figure prefetch effect, the received command is discarded.

  On the other hand, if the effect command that has been read is not a general-purpose look-ahead effect command (the result of step S1409 is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs processing such as setting a flag corresponding to the received command (step S1409). S1411), and ends the received command analysis processing.

  The command received from the main control board 4100 includes, for example, a special figure synchronizing effect ending command (special figure 1 synchronizing effect ending command or a special figure 1 synchronizing effect ending command for stopping the fluctuation display of the special symbol, as described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16). Special figure 2 tuning effect end command) or, when the result of the variable display game is a big hit, a variable state designation command for specifying a game state (probable change state, time saving state, normal game state) after the big hit game ends. included. When the special figure tuning effect end command is received, a tuning effect end flag is set. Also, according to the result of the variable display game, a jackpot opening command instructing execution of an effect at the start of the jackpot game, a jackpot ending command instructing execution of an effect at the end of the jackpot game, and the like are included.

  Furthermore, when a game ball is won in the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102, a starting port winning command is transmitted from the main control board 4100, and a starting port winning effect notifying that the game ball has been won in the starting port. Start of (for example, audio output) is instructed. Further, when the number of special symbol 1 operation-reserved balls changes due to the winning of a game ball into the upper starting port 2101 or the start of the change display of the special symbol on the upper special symbol display 1185, the special symbol 1 storage command is mainly controlled. Received from the board 4100. Similarly, when the number of special symbol 2 operation-reserved balls changes due to the winning of a game ball into the lower starting port 2102 or the start of the change display of the special symbol on the lower special symbol display 1186, the special symbol 2 storage command is mainly executed. Received from control board 4100.

  The special symbol 1 storage command (special symbol 2 storage command) includes the number of special symbol 1 operation reserved balls (the number of special symbol 2 operation reserved balls), and based on the processing of step S1107, the game board side liquid crystal display. The display corresponding to the special symbol 1 operation reserved ball count (special symbol 2 operation reserved ball count) in the device 1900 is set to be updated.

  Also, when a notification command for notifying the occurrence of an error other than the effect-related command is received, a flag or the like is set in a predetermined storage area (step S1407), and a warning process or the like is performed (step S1024 in FIG. 42). Execute the process.

  Further, in addition to the above-mentioned command, when the power supply to the main control board 4100 is cut off, a power-off command is transmitted. The main control board 4100 is supplied with power for a predetermined time from a capacitor (backup power supply) provided on the power supply board 851 even when power supply from the outside such as the pachinko island facility is stopped. The information stored in the RAM of the control board 4100 can be held and a command such as a power interruption command can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 and the like. When the power supply from the outside is restarted, a power-on command is transmitted. When receiving the power-off command or the power-on command, the peripheral control board 4140 executes a process according to the state. Details of these processes will be described later.

[10-7. Production control processing]
Subsequently, the effect control process (the process of step S1026 in FIG. 42) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process of the present embodiment.

  The effect control process is based on the value of the process selection flag indicating the progress of the game, and is one of a decorative symbol variation start process (step S1500), a decorative symbol variation process (step S1600), and a big hit display process (step S1700). Is selectively performed.

  In the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1500) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, the variation pattern reception flag is set in the process of step S1404 (see FIG. 48) of the received command analysis process. Next, a process for starting a special figure synchronizing effect including a variable display of a decorative symbol is performed. For example, based on the fluctuation pattern and the hit information of the fluctuation display game, the effect contents (stop design of the decorative symbol, the type of the reach effect, determination of whether or not the advance effect is performed, the advance effect mode, presence / absence of the extended effect, etc.) are determined, Perform settings etc. according to the decided effect contents. In addition, when the special figure synchronizing effect is not executed, control is performed so as to execute the demonstration effect. Details of the decorative symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Also, in the decorative symbol change process (step S16000) executed when the process selection flag is “1”, the special display tuning effect (decorative display of the decorative symbol) is started, and the variable display game is executed. The special figure synchronizing effect executed in synchronism is controlled. Further, when the special figure tuning effect end command is received, a process for terminating the special figure tuning effect and stopping it for confirmation is executed. That is, in the decorative symbol variation process, the effect control from the start to the end of the special figure tuning effect is performed. The details of the decorative symbol changing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, upon receiving the special figure tuning effect end command, the effect control program terminates the decorative pattern based on the result of the variable display game in order to end the special figure tuning effect accompanied by the variable display of the decorative pattern. Finally, the effect control program sets a processing selection flag based on the result of the variable display game. Specifically, if the result of the variable display game is "big hit", the processing selection flag is set to [2], and if the result of the variable display game is "losing", the processing selection flag is set to [0]. Set.

  Until the special figure synchronizing effect ending condition is satisfied, the special figure synchronizing effect is continued. For example, the effect control program switches the scene (video) displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 or changes the character. Perform effects such as making them appear. In addition, an effect that does not depend on the fluctuation pattern may be executed independently. For example, a look-ahead effect that indicates the result of a fluctuation display game to be executed next time or later is executed.

  In the big hit display process (step S1700) executed when the process selection flag is "2", the flag corresponding to the big hit interval effect command set in the process of step S1407 (see FIG. 48) and the big hit On the condition that the flag corresponding to the start command is set, the display on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 indicating that the special winning opening 2003 is opened or the display during the big hit game state (for example, a round display, etc.) ). At the end of the process, a flag corresponding to the big hit interval effect command and a flag corresponding to the big hit start command are reset.

[10-8. Decoration design change start processing]
Next, the decorative symbol change start process (step S1500) executed when the process selection flag is “0” will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a decorative symbol change start process according to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 50, in the decorative symbol change start process, the effect control program first determines whether or not the change pattern reception flag set in the process of step S1404 (see FIG. 48) is set (step S1404). S1501). That is, in the process of step S1501, the main control board 4100 waits until the variation pattern reception flag is set in the process of step S1404 (see FIG. 49) based on the satisfaction of the predetermined start condition (predetermined condition). . Until the fluctuation pattern reception flag is set (that is, until the fluctuation display game is started), the control for the demonstration effect is executed by the processing from step S1511 to step S1513.

  More specifically, if the fluctuation pattern reception flag is not set (the result of step S1501 is "No"), the effect control program determines whether the demonstration effect is being executed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. It is determined whether or not it is (step S1511). Then, when it is determined that the demonstration effect is not being executed (the result of step S1511 is “No”), it is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the previous display effect such as the symbol change was finished ( Step S1512). If the predetermined time has elapsed (the result of step S1512 is “Yes”), a demonstration effect display flag for starting the demonstration effect on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is set (step S1513).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (the result of step S1512 is “No”), the effect control program temporarily ends the decorative symbol variation start process, and sets the variation pattern reception flag. (YES in step S1501) or a predetermined time has elapsed (result in step S1512 is "Yes").

  When it is determined that the demonstration effect is being executed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (the result of step S1511 is “Yes”), the effect control program continues to execute the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, when the variation pattern reception flag is set (result of step S1501 is “Yes”), the effect control program clears the variation pattern reception flag (step S1502). Then, based on the received special figure variation pattern command and special figure design type command, an effect setting process for setting the content of the effect to be executed is executed (step S1503). Details of the effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Finally, the production control program updates the processing selection flag to [1] (step S1504). By controlling in this way, the decorative symbol change start process is executed only once at the time of starting the execution of the special figure tuning effect.

[10-9. Direction setting process]
Next, the effect setting process will be described. The effect setting process is a process for setting the effect contents at the start of the special figure synchronized effect. Based on the special figure variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 4100, the corresponding flag is set and the parameter is set. FIG. 51 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect setting process according to the present embodiment.

  The effect control program first specifies a variation pattern based on the special figure variation pattern command received from the main control board 4100 (Step S1520). At this time, based on the current game state (for example, a stochastic fluctuation state, a time reduction state, a probable change time reduction state, a normal game state, or the like, an effect mode related to only the effect mode may be used). A pattern may be selected. Specifically, an item of the game state may be provided in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 47, and a fluctuation pattern having a different effect form may be defined for each game state.

  Then, the effect control program sets an effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the specified variation pattern is a story reach (step S1521). If it is a story reach (the result of step S1521 is "Yes"), a story reach setting process for setting data necessary for executing the story reach is executed (step S1530). Details of the story reach setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the specified variation pattern is not story reach (the result of step S1521 is “No”), the production control program determines whether the variation pattern is a pseudo-continuous variation (step S1522). If it is a pseudo continuous fluctuation (the result of step S1522 is "Yes"), a pseudo continuous fluctuation setting process for setting data necessary for executing the pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed (step S1550).

  On the other hand, when the specified variation pattern is not a pseudo continuous variation (the result of step S1522 is “No”), the effect control program sets information necessary for executing an effect based on the variation pattern ( Step S1523).

  When the setting of the effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is completed, a continuous look-ahead effect setting process for executing a continuous look-ahead effect in which the effect content can be set independently of the fluctuation pattern is executed (step S1524). In the continuous look-ahead effect setting process, when it is determined in the special figure look-ahead effect control process in step S1027 of FIG. 42 that the continuous look-ahead effect is to be executed, the progress of the continuous look-ahead effect is controlled based on the determined effect contents. I do. The details of the continuous prefetching effect setting process will be described later.

  Finally, the effect control program sets an effect pattern and a stop symbol according to the gaming state (step S1525), and ends the effect setting process. As the effect pattern according to the game state, for example, the background of the image displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, music or sound output from the speaker, and the like are set according to the game state. The stop symbol set in the process of step S1524 is determined and displayed in the decorative symbol variation process at the timing when the special symbol tuning effect end command is received from the main control board 4100.

  Finally, the effect control program sets an effect pattern and a stop symbol according to the gaming state (step S1525), and ends the effect setting process. As the effect pattern according to the game state, for example, the background of the image displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, music or sound output from the speaker, and the like are set according to the game state. The effect pattern also includes a notice mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. For example, in order to indicate the result of the variable display, a specific character is made to appear, or the background color is set to a color different from the normal color. The stop symbol set in the process of step S1524 is determined and displayed in the decorative symbol variation process at the timing when the special symbol tuning effect end command is received from the main control board 4100.

  When the effect setting process ends, information necessary for executing the special figure synchronized effect is set. Then, ramp data output processing (step S1012), display data output processing (step S1016), sound data output processing (step S1018), lamp data creation processing (step S1028), display data By executing the creation process (step S1030), the sound data creation process (step S1032), and the like, a special figure synchronizing effect such as a variation display of a decorative pattern is started.

[10-10. Decoration pattern change processing]
Next, the decorative symbol changing process (Step S1600) executed when the process selection flag is “1” will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the decorative symbol variation process according to the present embodiment.

  The decorative symbol change process is executed when the decorative symbol change start process is executed and the process selection flag is “1”. In the decorative symbol change process, the special figure synchronized effect executed in synchronization with the variable display game is controlled on condition that the special figure synchronized effect (decorative display of the decorative symbol) is started.

  When the decorative symbol variation process is started, the effect control program first determines whether or not a condition for terminating the variable display of the decorative symbol, that is, a condition for terminating the special figure synchronized effect is satisfied (step S1601). As the end condition of the special figure synchronizing effect, for example, when receiving a special figure synchronizing effect end command (symbol confirmation command) from the main control board 4100, the special figure synchronizing effect may be ended, or the special figure synchronizing effect may be terminated. The special figure tuning effect may be ended when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start. In addition, both the reception of the special figure synchronizing effect end command and the elapsed time from the start of the special figure synchronizing effect may be used as the end condition of the special figure synchronizing effect, for example, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the special figure synchronizing effect. Even if it is not, when the special figure tuning effect end command is received, the display screen may be switched so as to forcibly end the variable display and fix and stop the decorative symbol.

  When the end condition of the special figure synchronizing effect is satisfied (the result of step S1601 is “Yes”), the effect control program stops (fixes and stops) the variable display with the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol type command ( Step S1602). Then, a process selection flag is set based on the result of the variable display game (step S1602). Specifically, the process selection flag is set to "0" when the result of the variable display game is "losing", and the process selection flag is set to "2" when the result is "big hit". If there is "small hit", another process selection flag (for example, "3") is set.

  On the other hand, when the end condition of the special figure synchronizing effect is not satisfied (the result of step S1601 is “Yes”), that is, when the display of the decoration design is continued, the production control program first sets It is determined whether the type is story reach (step S1604). If the type of the variation pattern is story reach (the result of step S1604 is “Y”), a story reach control process for controlling the progress of story reach is executed (step S1610). In the present embodiment, the scenario effects executed in the story reach are all selected at the start of the variable display (story reach setting process). Is selected. Further, when the progress of the scenario effect is controlled based on the operation of the operation unit 400, the operation state of the operation unit 400 is detected in the story reach control processing, and the control according to the operation state is executed. Just fine.

  If the type of the variation pattern is not story reach (the result of step S1604 is “No”), the effect control program determines whether the type of the variation pattern is pseudo-continuous variation (step S1605). If the type of the fluctuation pattern is the pseudo continuous fluctuation (the result of step S1604 is "Yes"), a pseudo continuous fluctuation control process for controlling the progress of the pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed (step S1630). Details of the pseudo continuous fluctuation control process will be described later.

  Furthermore, when the type of the variation pattern is not the pseudo-continuous variation (the result of step S1605 is “No”), the effect control program executes the control process of the special figure tuning effect corresponding to the variation pattern such as special reach ( Step S1660). For example, effects such as switching a scene (video) being displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 or causing a character to appear are executed. Further, an effect that does not depend on the fluctuation pattern may be executed independently. For example, a look-ahead effect that suggests the result of the fluctuation display game to be executed next time or later may be executed. When the control of the effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is completed, the present process ends.

[10-11. Peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing executed when a power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100 is input from the main control board 4100 will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interruption process.

  When the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. ) Is determined (step S1302). If the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) has not been input in this determination, this routine ends as it is.

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether the timer started in step S1300 has elapsed 2 microseconds. If two macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the flow returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If the signal is being input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. In other words, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal has been input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing of this routine is started.

  If the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing, which is the present routine, is started in step S1304 and the power failure notice signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 are turned off, the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 4 is turned off, and various LEDs are turned off. As a result, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suppressed, so that stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is a time period during which the peripheral control MPU 4150a can operate even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off. .

  Subsequent to step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception waiting process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 4100, at least a period of 17 milliseconds is set so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a can receive the command being transmitted. It is designed to wait. When the command is received, the above-described peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, and the received command storage area 4150cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally connected to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. ) Stores the received command.

  Subsequent to step S1308, backup processing of the command is performed (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup management target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 13 are copied to Bank1 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb. Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed to the Bank 2 (1fr), and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed to Bank 3 (1fr) and Bank 4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc.

  The high-speed copying of the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank 0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. As the request factor of the control DMA controller 4150ac, the content stored in the reception command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is specified to be copied to the reception command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb. Then, the contents stored at the start address of the reception command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) are stored in the end address of the reception command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr). All the contents up to the specified contents are successively copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in order from the head address of the reception command storage area included in the Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb, and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to transfer the contents stored in the reception command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the reception command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb. By specifying a copy, from the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) , A predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) all copies sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in the Bank2 (1FR) of the backup successively by the first area 4150Cb.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa includes the contents stored in the reception command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. Is specified in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr), and stored in the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr). All the contents up to the specified contents are successively copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of the reception command storage area included in the Bank 3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc, and the peripheral control is performed. The PU core 4150aa stores the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. To the contents stored at the start address of the reception command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored at the end address of the reception command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr). Then, all of the received command storage areas included in Bank 4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150 cc are copied sequentially in order of predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequent to step S1310, it is determined whether a power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is input (step S1312). If a power failure notice signal is input in this determination, a WDT clear process is performed (step S1314). In the WDT clear processing, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af shown in FIG. 13 and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e shown in FIG. 12 so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. .

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is not input in step S1312, or after step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether the power failure notice signal is input. That is, it is determined infinitely whether or not the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely as described above, when the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sends the clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e. Cannot be output, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 42 is restarted.

  As described above, when the input of the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is continued in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the peripheral control is performed immediately before the power failure occurs by executing the WDT clear processing in step S1314. The MPU 4150a is not reset. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure notice signal is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is not executed, so that the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e are The output of the clear signal is interrupted. Thus, even if the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs beyond the period of 2 microseconds and the determination in step S1302 is passed, If it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset because the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to cope with such noise by automatically returning from reset.

[11. Story reach]
Next, a case where story reach is selected as the variation pattern will be described. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, a special figure synchronizing effect is executed by the peripheral control board 4140 in synchronization with the special symbol change display (change display game) on the main control board 4100. When story reach is selected as the fluctuation pattern, in the special figure synchronized production, a production (specific production) that indicates the degree of expectation of the fluctuation display game being executed at a predetermined timing is executed once or more than once (insertion). Is done.

  Further, in the effect relating to the story reach, the decorative symbol is in the reach mode, but the execution timing of the specific effect may be before the reach effect or after the reach effect. In the present embodiment, a specific effect in the story reach is executed after the occurrence of the reach. Hereinafter, an effect when story reach is selected as a variation pattern will be described.

[11-1. Story reach setting process]
First, production control in story reach will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the story reach setting process according to the present embodiment. The story reach setting process is executed in the process of step S1530 of the effect setting process (FIG. 51). In the story reach setting process shown in FIG. 53, a process related to setting of a specific effect performed at a predetermined timing will be described. Since the processing is performed in the same manner as described above, the description is omitted.

  When the story reach setting process is executed, the effect control program first obtains the effect insertion number and the effect selection pattern from the variation pattern table (FIG. 47) (step S1531). At this time, the number of effect insertions and the effect selection pattern may be changed according to the game state such as the probability state (probable change state, normal state) of the variable display game or the operating state of the ordinary electric auditors (time saving state). Further, the selected effect number indicating the number (counter) of the specific effects set in the present process is set to the initial value (“0”) (step S1532). Subsequently, a specific effect scenario is selected by the number of inserted effects (step S1533 to step S1539). In the present embodiment, the specific effects that are executed last are sequentially selected, and the specific effect that is executed first is finally selected.

  The effect control program determines whether or not the number of selected effects is equal to or greater than the number of effect insertions, that is, whether or not a scenario has been selected for all specific effects (step S1533). If the number of selected effects is less than the number of effect insertions (result of step S1533 is "No"), a process for selecting a scenario (step S1534 to step S1538) because a specific effect for which a scenario has not been selected remains. Execute

  The effect control program acquires a random value (effect selection information) for selecting a specific effect (step S1534). Then, a specific effect is selected from the effect selection pattern table (FIG. 54) based on the effect selection pattern acquired in the process of step S1531 and the random number value acquired in the process of step S1534 (step S1535).

  Here, the procedure for selecting the specific effect will be described in more detail. In the effect performed in the story reach of the present embodiment, an effect selection pattern is set corresponding to the variation pattern (FIG. 47). FIG. 54 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect selection pattern in the story reach of the present embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, when the story reach is executed, a specific effect of any one of the scenarios 1 to 6 is executed, and the degree of expectation at which the result of the variable display game becomes a big hit in the order of the scenarios 1 to 6 ( Probability) is set to be high.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 54, it is easy to select a scenario having a high degree of expectation in the order of pattern 1 to pattern 3. Specifically, in pattern 1, scenarios 5 and 6 with relatively high expectations are set not to be selected, and in pattern 3, scenarios 1 and 2 with relatively low expectations are selected. Is set not to be.

  Further, a range of random numbers is set for each scenario, and each scenario is selected based on the random number value acquired in the process of step S1534 in FIG. Instead of setting so that a specific scenario is not selected, all scenarios may be selectable, and the selectivity of each scenario may be adjusted by adjusting the range of the corresponding random numbers.

  The effect selection pattern may be held for each game state. For example, in a high-probability state in which there is a high probability that the special symbol change display is won, a scenario having a high degree of expectation may be easily selected, and the player's sense of expectation may be further increased. Further, a plurality of effect selection patterns (lottery tables) may be selected according to satisfaction of a predetermined condition. The predetermined condition may be, for example, the above-mentioned gaming state, the number of times of performing a fluctuation display based on a predetermined fluctuation pattern (for example, the number of times of executing the SP reach), or a big prize in a big hit game. It may be the number of winning game balls to the mouth, or a combination thereof.

  The random number for selecting the specific effect is extracted from a predetermined range (in the present embodiment, a range from “0” to “1000”). For this reason, when a scenario with a low degree of expectation is selected after a scenario with a high degree of expectation is selected (falling down), there is a possibility that the player cannot easily grasp the reliability of the story reach itself. For example, the case where “story reach 2” is selected as the variation pattern will be described. Pattern 1 is selected as the effect selection pattern, and the number of inserted effects is three. At this time, it is assumed that the scenario corresponding to the specific effect executed first is “scenario 2”, the scenario executed next is “scenario 3”, and the scenario executed last is “scenario 1”. In this case, the specific effect performed after the second specific effect (“scenario 3”) is “scenario 1” having a relatively low degree of expectation. For this reason, the player cannot determine whether the degree of expectation of the running variable display game is equivalent to “scenario 1” or “scenario 3”, and the reliability of the story reach as a notice effect is impaired. There is a risk that it will.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, by adjusting the extraction range of the random number value acquired in the process of step S1613, the above-described falling is prevented from occurring. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing changes in the random number extraction range in the present embodiment in chronological order.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the specific effects are sequentially selected from the specific effect executed last. When “Story reach 2” is selected as the variation pattern (the number of inserted effects 3), first, the last (third) specific effect is executed. At this time, in the process of step S1534, a random value is extracted in a range from 0 to 1000 (prescribed range) (FIG. 55A). If the random number value extracted at this time is “550”, “scenario 3” is selected with reference to the effect selection pattern selection table of FIG. Then, the effect control program stores the identification information of the selected scenario in a predetermined storage area allocated to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140 (Step S1536). Information such as image data and audio data of the selected scenario is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the like. Then, 1 is added to the number of selected effects (step S1537).

  Subsequently, the effect control program sets a range (upper limit) of random numbers extracted to select a second specific effect to be executed (step S1538). As described above, “scenario 3” is selected in the specific effect that is executed last, so if “scenario 4” is selected in the specific effect that is executed second, a fall will occur. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 55B, the random number generation range is not limited to the specified range from 0 to 1000, but is selected from “scenario 1” to “scenario 3”. Is set in the range from 0 to 600. The reset upper limit value “600” is the upper limit value at which “scenario 3” is selected. By setting the upper limit value to “600”, “scenario 4” is prevented from being selected. In FIG. 55B, the range indicated by the solid line (“0” to “600”) is the range in which random numbers can be extracted, and the range indicated by the broken line (range from “600” to “1000”) indicates that random numbers cannot be extracted. It is possible range.

  Here, when “150” is extracted as a random value for selecting the second specific effect to be executed, “scenario 2” is selected as the specific effect scenario. Therefore, the production control program sets the upper limit value of the range of the extracted random value to “200” so that “scenario 1” or “scenario 2” in which no drop occurs in the specific production executed first is selected. Set. Thereafter, for example, when “85” is extracted as a random number, “scenario 1” is set (FIG. 55C).

  Then, the value of the number of selected effects is 3 in the processing of step S1538, and the value of the number of selected effects matches the value of the number of inserted effects, so that the result of the processing of step S1533 is “Yes”, and the effect control program End the selection of the effect. Finally, the range (upper limit) of the changed random number is set to a specified value (0 to 1000) (step S1539), and the story reach setting process ends.

  In the procedure of the story reach setting process of FIG. 53, the range of random numbers is set at the start of the change (effect control process → decorative design change start process → effect setting process → story reach setting process), but at another timing. A range of random numbers may be set.

  For example, at the timing when the specific effect is first executed (when the execution of the specific effect is started), all the scenarios of the specific effect may be selected. In this case, in the story reach control process (step S1610) of the decorative symbol variation process (FIG. 52), the above-described story reach setting process may be executed at the timing when the first specific effect is executed.

  At this time, the selection pattern may be reset based on a start winning command, a pre-reading effect-related command, or the like transmitted from the main control board 4100 from the start of the change to the execution of the specific effect. With such a configuration, it is also possible to execute an effect indicating the degree of expectation of a variable display game to be executed later, and it is possible to diversify the effect variation. Note that, if the execution (insertion) of the specific effect is after the occurrence of the reach, the specific effect may be selected at the start of the reach effect.

  Further, at the timing of selecting a specific effect, random numbers corresponding to the number of inserted effects may be extracted and rearranged in ascending order to determine the execution order of the specific effect. For example, if random number values are extracted three times and “550”, “85”, and “150” are extracted, “85” (scenario 1), “150” (scenario 2), and “550” (scenario) The specific effects may be executed in the order of 3).

  Furthermore, a random number may be randomly selected each time a specific effect is executed. For example, the execution timing of a specific effect is defined in the schedule data, and a random value for selecting a scenario is extracted at the execution timing of the specific effect. In this case, after selecting the scenario of the specific effect, the lower limit value of the random number is set. In the effect selection pattern table shown in FIG. 54, it is set so that the effect with a high degree of expectation is executed as the random number value is large. And reset the lower limit. Specifically, when Scenario 2 is selected first, the lower limit value is set to “100” so that a fall does not occur when the next specific effect is selected, and a random number value in a range from “100” to “1000”. To be generated. By performing such control, story reach can be executed in the same manner as when a specific effect is selected at the start of a change. When the selection of the specific effect is completed, the lower limit value set in the peripheral control RAM 4150c is held and used when the next specific effect is executed. Further, the lower limit may be cleared (set to 0) at the timing when the last specific effect is selected or at the timing when the variable display game (special figure synchronized effect) ends. In addition, a more specific procedure will be described in the control in the pseudo continuous effect described later.

  Further, both the lower limit and the upper limit may be set when the specific effect is selected. By doing so, it is possible to control so that the scenarios are easily executed in a specific order. For example, after scenario 1 is selected, by setting the lower limit value to “0” and the upper limit value to “200”, only “scenario 1” or “scenario 2” can be selected. Also, by setting the lower limit to “101” and the upper limit to “200”, “Scenario 2” can always be selected. It should be noted that the same processing can be performed for a case where all the specific effects are selected at the start of the change. Further, in the effect selection pattern table, items such as setting only the upper limit value (or lower limit value) or setting the upper limit value and lower limit value may be provided, and the setting may be set for each effect selection pattern.

  If the lower limit is not “0”, a random number from “0” to “lower limit−upper limit” may be generated, and the lower limit may be added to the extracted random number. For example, when the lower limit is “101” and the upper limit is “200”, a random number from “0” to “99 (= lower limit−upper limit)” is generated, and the lower limit “101” is added. The result may be a random number extracted.

[11-2. Production example]
Through the above processing, it is possible to select a specific effect to be executed in the story reach so that a fall does not occur. Subsequently, a specific example of the effect when story reach is selected as the variation pattern will be described.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect performed in the story reach of the present embodiment. In the story reach of the present embodiment, a specific effect is executed at a predetermined timing after a reach occurs in the variable display of the decorative symbol. When the specific effect is executed, the decorative symbol 1910 is reduced and moved to the upper right, and an area 1912 is formed above the start storage display unit 1911. In a region 1912, words corresponding to the scenario of the specific effect to be executed are displayed.

  FIG. 57 is a diagram illustrating an example of a scenario (line) of a specific effect executed in the story reach of the present embodiment. (A) shows scenario 1, (B) shows scenario 2, (C) shows scenario 3, (D) shows scenario 4, (E) shows scenario 5, and (F) shows scenario 6. As described above, the high degree of expectation of the variable display game being executed in the order of scenario 1 to scenario 6 is shown. Specifically, in Scenario 1, words indicating that the degree of expectation is low are displayed (“no good !!”), and the words are sequentially set so as to increase the sense of expectation. In Scenario 5, a line indicating a big hit ("Hit?") Is set, and in Scenario 6, a line indicating a big hit has been set ("Big hit !!"). Note that the scenario 6 may be selected only when the big hit has been determined.

  Next, the screen transition of the story reach will be described. FIG. 58 and FIG. 59 are diagrams illustrating an example of the screen transition of the story reach of the present embodiment. First, when a special figure 1 variation pattern command is received from the main control board 4100, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), a special figure synchronizing effect with a variation display of a decorative symbol is started. Since story reach is selected as the variation pattern, reach occurs at a predetermined timing as shown in the screen (B).

  Thereafter, when it is time to execute the first specific effect, a specific effect in which words (scenario 2) are displayed in the area 1912 is executed (screen (C)). Thereafter, when it is time to execute the second specific effect, as shown in the screen (D), a scenario 3 having a higher degree of expectation is selected, and the specific effect is executed in a corresponding effect mode.

  Here, when the generation range of the random number is not adjusted, in the specific effect executed last, as shown in the screen (E-1), a specific effect having a lower degree of expectation than the specific effect executed previously is displayed. It may be executed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the control is performed so as to prevent the falling, the specific effect having the same or higher expectation as the specific effect executed before is always executed (screen (E-2)). In the procedure of the present embodiment, the scenarios are selected in order from the specific effect that is executed last. Therefore, when scenario 1 is selected last, scenario 1 is selected in all the specific effects. In such a case, since the same specific effect is continuously executed, a plurality of scenarios corresponding to the same degree of expectation may be prepared so that the same specific effect is not executed continuously.

[12. Pseudo continuous fluctuation]
In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the pseudo continuous fluctuation is selected as the fluctuation pattern, the temporary stop and the re-variation of the decorative pattern are executed at least once in the special figure synchronizing effect, and selected at a predetermined timing by lottery. An effect based on the performed scenario is executed. In the effect based on the scenario, as in the story mode described above, an effect (specific effect) indicating the degree of expectation of the variable display game being executed is executed.

  The temporary stop of the decorative pattern is a state in which the change of the decorative pattern is recognized by the player as if it were stopped, but the fluctuation is actually continued. For example, when the decorative symbol stops in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, the middle symbol that stops last is a state in which the middle symbol slightly moves up and down, and re-change starts from this state.

  In addition, regarding the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, in addition to the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, the fourth symbol is displayed in a mode that is difficult for the player to recognize, and the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are stopped. The change display of the fourth symbol may be continued, and the stopped symbol may be changed again. In this case, the result form of the variable display may include the stop pattern of the fourth symbol in addition to the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. At this time, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol may be stopped at the same decorative symbol, and a different result mode may be obtained only by the difference of the fourth symbol. With this configuration, the winning game is executed by making a part of the big hit result mode and the small hit result mode similar to each other, so that the game state after the end of the hit game (the winning probability of the variable display game, etc.). Can be hardly recognized by the player, and the variation of the effect can be increased.

  In the story reach in the present embodiment, all the scenarios to be executed at the start of the change are determined. However, in the pseudo continuous change in the present embodiment, the scenarios are randomly selected and selected at the timing of executing the specific effect (scenario effect). . In the pseudo continuous fluctuation, when reach occurs in the last re- fluctuation, a normal reach effect (for example, SP reach) that can be executed without generating pseudo continuous fluctuation may be executed. Alternatively, a reach effect performed only in the case of pseudo-continuous fluctuation may be adopted. In the pseudo continuous fluctuation, it is not necessary to generate reach in the last fluctuation. Hereinafter, description will be given of an effect when pseudo continuous fluctuation is selected as the fluctuation pattern.

[12-1. Pseudo continuous fluctuation setting processing]
First, the effect control in the pseudo continuous fluctuation will be described. In the pseudo continuous fluctuation, as described above, the effect content is selected by lottery immediately before the specific effect (scenario effect) is executed. Therefore, at the start of the fluctuation, an initial setting necessary for executing the pseudo continuous fluctuation is performed. FIG. 60 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the pseudo continuous fluctuation setting process according to the present embodiment. The pseudo continuous fluctuation setting process is executed in the process of step S1550 of the effect setting process (FIG. 51). In the quasi-continuous fluctuation setting process shown in FIG. 60, a description will be given of a process relating to the setting of a specific effect performed at a predetermined timing. Since the processing is performed in the same manner as in the case of selection, the description is omitted.

  When the pseudo continuous fluctuation setting process is executed, the effect control program first obtains the effect insertion number (number of temporary stops) and the effect selection pattern from the change pattern table (FIG. 47) (step S1551), and stores the effect control program in the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Store in a predetermined area.

  Further, the effect control program sets the effect insertion number as an initial value to the remaining effect number, which is the remaining number of executions of the specific effect executed in the pseudo continuous variation (step S1552). Finally, a specified value is set to initialize a range of random numbers (upper limit value and lower limit value) for selecting a scenario of a specific effect (step S1553). In the present embodiment, at the time of executing the scenario effect, the effect contents are selected by lottery and are sequentially selected from the scenario effect to be executed first. Therefore, the lower limit value is initialized as the range of the random number for the scenario selection lottery. At this time, an upper limit value may be set to limit the selected scenario.

  Note that, as in the case of the story mode, all scenarios may be randomly selected in the pseudo continuous variation setting process so that all scenario effects are selected at the start of variation. The procedure for drawing a scenario effect is the same as in the story mode.

[12-2. Pseudo continuous fluctuation control processing]
Next, a description will be given of a pseudo continuous fluctuation control process executed in the decorative symbol fluctuation process. FIG. 61 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the pseudo continuous fluctuation control process according to the present embodiment. The pseudo continuous fluctuation control process is executed between the start and the stop of the display of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol, and controls the execution of the temporary stop and the execution of the scenario effect in the pseudo continuous fluctuation. The pseudo continuous variation control process is executed in the process of step S1630 of the decorative symbol variation process (FIG. 52).

  In the pseudo continuous fluctuation effect of the present embodiment, the operation input reception period of the pressing operation unit (production button) 405 is set in accordance with the timing of the temporary stop, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the operation input reception period, A scenario effect is executed. In the procedure shown in FIG. 61, when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, a normal effect is continued without executing the scenario effect.

  The effect control program first determines whether or not the press operation unit operation acceptability flag is set (step S1631). The pressing operation unit operation accepting flag is set when the operation input of the pressing operation unit 405 is in a state where the operation input can be received to execute the scenario effect. That is, if the pressing operation unit 405 is operated while the pressing operation unit operation accepting flag is set, a process for executing a scenario effect is executed.

  If the pressing operation unit operation accepting flag is not set (the result of step S1631 is “No”), the effect control program determines whether it is time to accept the operation of the pressing operation unit 405. (Step S1646). If it is not the timing at which the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be accepted (the result of step S1646 is “No”), the pseudo continuous fluctuation control process ends.

  If it is time to accept the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 (result of step S1646 is “Yes”), it indicates that the operation input of the pressing operation unit 405 has become acceptable (pressing operation). The setting for executing the effect (requesting the operation of the unit 405) is made (step S1647). Further, the press operation unit operation acceptability flag is set (step S1648), and the pseudo continuous fluctuation control process ends. The timing at which the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be accepted is set in accordance with the timing of temporarily stopping the decorative symbol. For example, it is set a predetermined time before the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped.

  On the other hand, when the pressing operation unit operation accepting flag is set (the result of step S1631 is “Yes”), the effect control program determines whether the pressing operation unit operation flag is set (step S1631). S1632). The pressing operation section operation flag is set when the pressing operation section 405 is actually operated. Specifically, the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 is obtained in the operation unit information obtaining process (step S1108) of the 1 ms timer interrupt process of the peripheral control unit, and the pressing operation unit operation flag is set in the process of turning on the power of the peripheral control unit (FIG. 42). ) Is set in the operation unit monitoring process (step S1014) included in the peripheral control unit steady-state process.

  If the pressing operation section operation flag is set (the result of step S1632 is “Yes”), the effect control program acquires a random number value within the set upper limit value and lower limit value range (step S1633). Further, a scenario to be executed as a specific effect is obtained from the effect pattern table based on the obtained random number value (step S1634). The format of the effect pattern table is the same as in the case of story reach. FIG. 62 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect pattern table for selecting a scenario in the case of pseudo-continuous fluctuation according to the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the range of random numbers is set so that a scenario having a low degree of expectation is easily selected.

  When a scenario is selected, the effect control program executes a scenario execution setting process for setting effect information related to image data, sound data, and the like necessary to execute an effect (specific effect) based on the selected scenario. (Step S1635). The effect information set in the scenario execution setting process is obtained by executing a ramp data creation process (step S1028), a display data creation process (step S1030), and a sound data creation process (step S1030) in the peripheral control unit regular process. The effect is actually executed by the data output process (step S1012), the display data output process (step S1016), and the sound data creation process (step S1018).

  Thereafter, the effect control program sets the lower limit value of the range of the random number value for selecting the scenario to be executed next based on the random number value acquired in the process of step S1633 so that the effect content does not fall. It is set (step S1636). Specifically, the lower limit value of the random number is set so that a scenario having a lower degree of expectation than the scenario selected in the process of step S1634 is not selected, that is, a scenario of at least the same degree is selected. For example, a case where the effect pattern 12 is selected will be described with reference to FIG. Assuming that the obtained random number is “450”, scenario 2 is selected. At this time, by setting the lower limit to “301”, a scenario having an expected degree equal to or higher than the scenario 2 is always selected in the next lottery. Also, by setting the lower limit value to “501” instead of “301”, it is possible to set the lower limit value so that it always rises.

  On the other hand, when the press operation unit operation flag is not set (the result of step S1632 is “No”), the effect control program determines that the press operation unit operation acceptable period measurement timer times out. It is determined whether or not there is (step S1638). If the time has not expired (the result of step S1638 is “No”), the pseudo continuous effect control process ends, and the operation input of the pressing operation unit 405 is continuously received. On the other hand, when the time of the pressing operation unit operation receivable period measurement timer has expired (the result of step S1638 is “Yes”), the processing from step S1640 is executed.

  When the operation input of the pressing operation unit 405 is received during the pressing operation unit operation receivable period, or when the operation time of the pressing operation unit 405 is not received during the pressing operation unit operation receivable period, the time is up. The effect control program ends the press operation unit operation suggestion effect (step S1640). Further, the press operation section operation acceptability flag is cleared (step S1641), and the remaining effect number is decremented by 1 (step S1642).

  Finally, the production control program determines whether or not the number of remaining productions has become 0 (step S1643). If the number of remaining effects is 0 (the result of step S1643 is “Yes”), the last specific effect has been executed, so the upper limit of the random number is set to a specified value (step S1645), and the pseudo continuous effect control is performed. The process ends.

  On the other hand, if the remaining number of effects is not 0 (the result of step S1643 is “No”), the effect control program measures the operation-possible time of the pressing operation unit in order to set the operation input timing for the next pressing operation unit. The timer is set (step S1644).

  As described above, when the pressing operation unit is operated while the pressing operation unit operation receivable time measurement timer is not timed up and the pressing operation unit operation receivable flag is set, a specific effect is produced. It is controlled to be executed. Note that the effect (specific effect) based on the scenario may be performed after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped or immediately after the operation of the pressing operation unit 405. For example, if the decoration symbol has been temporarily stopped, the control is changed so that the scenario execution setting process is executed after the time of the pressing operation unit operation acceptable time measurement timer has expired, and the pressing operation is performed after the scenario execution setting process. The section operation flag may be cleared.

[12-3. Production example of pseudo continuous fluctuation]
Subsequently, an example of the effect of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation will be described. In the pseudo continuous variation of the present embodiment, a specific effect is executed in accordance with the timing of the temporary stop of the decorative symbol before a reach occurs in the variation display of the decorative symbol. Specifically, the pressing operation unit suggestion effect is started a predetermined time before the decorative symbol temporarily stops (the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 becomes ready to be accepted), and the pressing operation unit suggestion effect is provided at the timing of the temporary stop. The process is terminated (operation acceptance for the pressing operation unit 405 is disabled). When the pressing operation unit 405 is operated in a state where the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be received (the pressing operation unit operation receivable period), after the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, until the re-change of the identification symbol is started. During the specified effect is executed.

  The specific effect is the same as the story reach. When the specific effect is executed, the decorative pattern 1910 is reduced and moved to the upper right, and an area 1912 is formed above the start storage display unit 1911. In a region 1912, words corresponding to the scenario of the specific effect to be executed are displayed.

  FIG. 63 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect in the pseudo-continuous variation of the present embodiment. First, when a special figure 1 change pattern command is received from the main control board 4100, a special figure synchronizing effect with a change display of a decorative pattern is started, and as shown in FIG. The decorative pattern stops. Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period is reached, and a pressing operation unit suggestion effect for prompting the operation of the pressing operation unit (production button) 405 is started. When the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the period in which the pressing operation unit operation can be received, as shown in FIG. 63 (C), the continuous symbol indicating that the pseudo continuous change is executed is stopped as the middle symbol, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. As shown in 63 (D), a specific effect is executed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 63 (E), the re-variation of the decorative symbol is started, and similarly to FIG. 63 (B), the press operation unit suggestion effect is started (FIG. 63 (F)). At this time, when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (FIG. 63 (G)), the re-change starts without executing the specific effect (FIG. 63 (H)). Thereafter, when the final decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (FIG. 63 (I)), a reach effect is executed (FIG. 63 (J)). In the example shown in FIG. 63 (J), the executable SP reach 3 is executed even when the pseudo continuous fluctuation is not executed. However, even if the reach executed at this time is an effect specialized for pseudo continuous production, Good. Also, the press operation unit suggestion effect may be executed before the final temporary stop, and the reach effect may be executed after the execution of the specific effect.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 63, when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated during the pressing operation unit operation receivable period, the re-change starts without executing the specific effect. It may be executed.

[12-4. Timing chart of pseudo continuous fluctuation]
Furthermore, the execution timing of the effect in the pseudo continuous fluctuation will be described. FIG. 64 and FIG. 65 are diagrams illustrating the timing of controlling the pseudo continuous fluctuation in the present embodiment.

  FIG. 64 is a timing chart corresponding to the effect example shown in FIG. 63. FIG. 64A illustrates a case where the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period.

  First, at time t10, a game ball wins in the starting ports 2101 and 2102, and a special symbol (display symbol 1185 or special symbol (identification symbol) on the lower special symbol display 1186) of the special symbol on the main control board 4100 is displayed. (Variable display, variable display game) is started. At this time, a special figure variation pattern command, a special figure design type command, and the like are transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control board 4140 receives the command and selects a variation pattern for executing a pseudo continuous effect.

  When a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the change of the decorative symbol (start of the special figure synchronizing effect), at the timing before the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, the reception period of the operation input of the pressing operation unit (production button) 405 (the pressing operation unit operation reception) A possible period) is started, and a press operation unit suggestion effect is started (time t11). The press operation unit operation acceptable period continues until time t13 when the temporary stop of the decorative symbol is completed. At this time, a scenario effect to be executed is randomly selected (step S1634 in FIG. 61).

  Then, when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the pressing operation unit operation receivable period (time t12), the lottery is performed at the timing when the temporary stop of the decorative symbol ends (timing at which the decorative symbol re-change starts, time t14). Execute a specific effect based on the scenario.

  Similarly, the specific effect of scenario 3 is executed at time t15, the specific effect of scenario 3 is executed at time t15, and the specific effect of scenario 4 is executed at time t16. After that, when the final temporary stop is completed, the reach effect is started (time t17). Then, after the end of the reach effect, the variation of the decorative symbol is finished in synchronization with the end of the variation display of the special symbol on the main control board 4100, and the fixed symbol is displayed (time t18).

  Subsequently, a case where the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated during the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period will be described. FIG. 64B shows a case where the execution of the corresponding specific effect is skipped without operating the pressing operation unit 405 during the first pressing operation unit operation acceptable period.

  In the example shown in FIG. 64 (B), the specific effect based on the scenario 1 is not executed because the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated at the timing of time t12. Note that, in the specific effect executed at the timing of time t15, since the lower limit of the random number is not reset, all of the candidate scenarios can be selected.

  Next, a modified example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a timing chart of a modified example of the pseudo continuous fluctuation in the present embodiment. FIG. 65C illustrates a case where the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period.

  In the example shown in FIG. 65 (C), even when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, the specific effect is executed at the start of the re-change of the decorative symbol. Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated, the specific effect is executed before the start of the maximum fluctuation. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute a specific effect at a timing operated by the player, and it is possible to execute an effect without a sense of incongruity.

  In the example shown in FIG. 65 (D), when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, the specific effect is skipped without executing, and the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the subsequent pressing operation unit operation receivable period. , A specific effect for the skipped portion is executed.

  Referring to FIG. 65 (D), a case where the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the third pressing operation unit operation acceptable period without operating the pressing operation unit 405 during the second pressing operation unit operation acceptable period is illustrated. Is shown. In this case, the specific effect executed at the second temporary stop is skipped, but at the third temporary stop, the skipped specific effect is also executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 65 (D), the specific effect based on the scenario 1 is executed at the first temporary stop, and the specific effect executed at the second temporary stop is skipped. When the pressing operation unit 405 is operated in the third pressing operation unit operation receivable period, the specific effect including the skipped portion is selected. After the decoration symbols are temporarily stopped, the selected specific effects (scenario 3 and scenario 4) are sequentially executed.

  As described above, in the pseudo continuous production according to the present embodiment, the range (lower limit) of the random number for drawing the subsequent specific production is set based on the random number obtained by randomly selecting the preceding specific production, so that the execution is performed in advance. It is possible to prevent a fall in which an effect with an expected degree lower than the expected degree of the specified effect is executed.

  Further, since the player can select whether or not to execute the specific effect by operating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to execute the effect according to the intention of the player.

[12-5. Modified example of pseudo continuous fluctuation]
[12-5-1. Modification of Scenario Selection Timing]
In the example of the pseudo continuous variation described above, the press operation unit operable period is set in accordance with the timing at which the decorative symbol temporarily stops, and a scenario for executing a specific effect at the timing when the press operation unit 405 is operated is selected. Was. On the other hand, a case will be described in which all the scenarios for executing the specific effect are selected at the start of the change as in the story reach described above.

  When all the scenarios are selected at the start of the change, in the pseudo continuous change setting process (step S1550, FIG. 60) executed in the effect setting process (FIG. 49), the steps from step S1533 in the story reach setting process (FIG. 53) are performed. The same processing as in S1538 is executed. With this configuration, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in a state where all scenarios corresponding to the specific effect have been set.

  As described above, when all the scenarios are determined at the start of the change, when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated in the pressing operation unit operable period, the execution of the specific effect that has not been performed is restricted (skip). May be. In this case, when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated in the subsequent pressing operation unit operable period, a re-lottery may be executed to select a scenario again. In addition, it is also possible to skip without performing a specific effect that has been regulated without executing a re-lottery, to execute a specific effect that has been set in advance, or to specify a specific effect based on a scenario that has been skipped by releasing the restriction. An effect may be performed.

  In addition, when the last specific effect is executed, even if the specific effect that should be executed in the middle is regulated, in order to notify the player of the final expectation degree, A specific effect based on the determined scenario may be executed.

  Further, even when the pressing operation section 405 is not operated, the specific effect may be executed after a predetermined period has elapsed.

[12-5-2. Modification of Specific Performance Execution Condition]
In the embodiment described above, the specific effect is executed at the timing of the temporary stop of the decorative symbol by operating the pressing operation unit 405. However, the specific effect may be executed based on other conditions. Good.

  The other conditions include, for example, a symbol that is fixed and stopped, and a symbol of a combination that does not appear at the time of a loss, in the case of stopping at a so-called chance, executing a specific effect without operating the pressing operation unit 405. (At this time, it is not necessary to request the operation of the pressing operation unit 405). Further, the specific effect may be executed when the decorative symbol is stopped in a combination including the symbol dedicated to the pseudo-sequence which appears only when the pseudo-serial is temporarily stopped, instead of the chance. In this case, the final stop symbol does not have to be the pseudo-sequence exclusive symbol, but any symbol in the displayed symbol row may be stopped at the pseudo-sequence exclusive symbol. In addition, a specific effect may be executed when the game is stopped at a symbol at the time of a normal loss (a so-called loss eye).

  Further, the timing of execution of the specific effect is when a predetermined movable body (movable character) operates, a predetermined light emitting body (a lamp, an LED, or the like) emits light, or a predetermined sound is output. Is also good.

  Further, the operation unit 400 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a dial operation unit 401 in addition to the pressing operation unit 405. As described above, the dial operation unit 401 is configured to be rotatable left and right. For example, a specific effect may be executed when the dial is rotated at a predetermined timing. Moreover, you may make it change the aspect of an effect according to the rotation direction of a dial.

  As another operation means, for example, a lever-type operation unit such as a control stick may be arranged on the front surface of the upper plate 301, and a specific effect may be executed by operating the lever at a predetermined timing.

  Further, a touch panel is mounted on the surface of the upper-panel liquid crystal display device 470, and a player can perform an operation input from the touch panel, and a specific effect is executed by operating the upper-panel liquid crystal display device 470. Good. Further, in the touch panel, in order to enable various inputs, not only the selection of the specific effect, but also the effect mode of the specific effect may be changed depending on the operation content.

  Not only the contact-type operation means as described above, but also a non-contact-type operation means such as a non-contact sensor may be used. For example, a non-contact sensor may be arranged on the front side of the gaming machine, and the specific effect may be executed by the player performing an operation such as holding his hand in front of the game board.

[13. Special figure pre-reading production]
Next, a prefetch effect that suggests the result of the variable display before the variable display of the special symbol is started will be described. The pre-reading effect in the present embodiment, the normal pre-reading effect that is executed at the timing when the game ball wins the starting opening, and the start memory to be subjected to the pre-reading effect at a predetermined timing until the start memory is exhausted. A continuous look-ahead effect in which the degree of expectation of the variable display is suggested based on the execution.

  In the normal prefetch effect, for example, a hold display of the start memory to be prefetched is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode. Further, in the continuous prefetching effect, each time the start memory that is variably displayed in advance is consumed, the form of the suspension display of the start memory to be prefetched is changed. In addition, not only the mode of the hold display of the start memory may be changed, but also a specific effect in the story reach or the pseudo continuous change may be executed at a timing at which the mode of the hold display is changed.

[13-1. Special figure prefetching effect control processing]
First, the special figure pre-reading effect control processing (step S1027) of the peripheral control unit regular processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (FIG. 42) will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special figure pre-reading effect control process according to the present embodiment. In the special figure look-ahead effect control process, a process for executing a normal look-ahead effect and a process for determining whether or not to execute a continuous look-ahead effect are executed. The special figure pre-reading effect control process may be executed when a pre-reading effect command is received in the received command analysis process.

  The effect control program first determines whether or not the special figure prefetching effect execution flag is set (step S2001). As described above, when a prefetch effect command is received from the main control board 4100, the special figure prefetch effect execution flag is set in the received command analysis process (step S1022 in FIG. 42) (step S1408 in FIG. 48). If the special figure prefetch effect execution flag is not set (the result of step S2001 is “No”), the prefetch effect is not executed, and the special figure prefetch effect control process ends.

  On the other hand, when the special figure pre-reading effect execution flag is set (the result of step S2001 is “Yes”), the effect control program normally executes the pre-reading effect command based on the content of the pre-reading effect command corresponding to the starting memory of the pre-reading target. The look-ahead effect mode is selected (step S2002). At this time, the mode of the normal prefetch effect may be changed only when the reach effect is executed in the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the start memory of the prefetch target.

  FIG. 67 is a diagram illustrating an example of a normal prefetching effect lottery table according to the present embodiment. In the normal look-ahead effect, when a game ball is awarded at the starting port, the state of the hold display is changed regardless of the progress of the change display of the special symbol currently being executed, except when the number of held start memories is 0. It is changed at a predetermined ratio.

  When the look-ahead effect is not executed, the hold display is “white”, but when the normal look-ahead effect is executed, the display color of the hold display is changed from “white” to a big hit according to the degree of expectation. With the probability (FIG. 67), the colors change to “blue”, “green”, “red”, and “rainbow”. Further, when the result of the variable display game is a big hit, the color of the suspended display is set to be changed with a higher probability than in the case of a loss.

  When the color of the hold display is selected, the effect control program executes a normal look-ahead effect setting process of performing setting for changing to the selected color (step S2003). In the normal pre-reading effect setting process, the setting for changing the display color of the hold display is performed, and the setting for outputting the sound effect, turning on the lamp, and moving the accessory is performed at the timing of the change. Thereafter, the special figure pre-reading effect execution flag is cleared (step S2004). Thereby, it is possible to prevent a plurality of normal prefetch effects from being executed for one start memory.

  The present embodiment is configured to execute the continuous look-ahead effect only when the normal look-ahead effect is executed. That is, the player has a sense of expectation due to the normal look-ahead effect at the timing when the game ball wins in the starting port, and has a greater sense of expectation when the mode of the hold display is further changed by the progress of the game. In addition, you may make it execute a continuous look-ahead effect without performing the normal look-ahead effect, for example, when the number of reserved starting memories is large, execute the continuous look-ahead effect without executing the normal look-ahead effect. You may do so. In particular, it is effective when the upper starting port and the lower starting port can always be awarded, and the starting ports can be alternately awarded so that up to eight starting memories can be held.

  The effect control program determines whether or not to execute a normal prefetch effect (step S2005). If the normal look-ahead effect is not to be executed (the result of step S2005 is “No”), that is, if the color of the hold display does not change while remaining “white”, the special figure pre-reading is not performed without executing the continuous look-ahead effect. The effect control processing ends.

  When the normal look-ahead effect is to be executed (the result of step S2005 is “Yes”), the effect control program uses the continuous look-ahead effect lottery table (based on various information included in the look-ahead effect command received from the main control board 4100). The corresponding information is acquired from FIG. 67) (step S2006), and it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous prefetching effect (step S2007). The various information includes, for example, a fluctuation pattern and hit information. Further, the number of starting memories (the number of special symbol operation reserved balls) is included in the special symbol storing command transmitted at the same timing as the prefetch effect command. As a result of the lottery, when the continuous prefetching effect is not executed (the result of step S2007 is “No”), the special figure prefetching effect control process ends.

  FIG. 68 is a diagram illustrating an example of the continuous prefetching effect lottery table according to the present embodiment. The continuous look-ahead effect of the present embodiment is executed when the number of start-up memories is three or more because the manner of the hold display changes over a plurality of changes. Further, when the result of the variable display based on the start memory is a big hit (or the possibility of a big hit is high), it is set so that the continuous prefetching effect is easily executed and the number of continuous prefetching is easily increased. .

  In addition, the lottery for determining whether to execute the continuous prefetching effect (step S2007) is performed based on the continuous prefetching effect execution probability. In addition, when no reach occurs in the start-up memory of the prefetch target, a setting is made so that the continuous prefetch effect is not executed. Note that the unit of the continuous prefetching effect execution probability in FIG. 68 is%.

  When the continuous look-ahead effect is to be executed (the result of step S2007 is “Yes”), the effect control program sets the effect selection pattern acquired from the continuous look-ahead effect lottery table (step S2008). Further, the number of continuous prefetching effects is set to the number of remaining effects (the number of remaining prefetching) (step S2009).

  Further, the effect control program sets a range of random numbers (upper limit value and lower limit value) for selecting a continuous prefetch effect to a specified value (initial value) (step S2010). Finally, the continuous look-ahead effect execution flag is set (step S2011), and the special figure look-ahead effect control process ends.

[13-2. Continuous prefetching effect setting processing]
Next, the continuous look-ahead effect setting process executed in the decorative symbol changing process will be described. The continuous look-ahead effect setting process is a process of controlling a look-ahead effect for a start memory that is a target of the look-ahead effect. In the present embodiment, as described above, the hold display of the start memory of the prefetch effect is changed at the timing when the start memory in which the variable display game is executed prior to the start memory of the prefetch effect is changed. Execute the process.

  FIG. 69 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the continuous prefetching effect setting process according to the present embodiment. The continuous look-ahead effect setting process is executed in the process of step S1524 of the effect setting process (FIG. 51).

  The effect control program first determines whether or not the continuous look-ahead effect execution flag is set (step S2101). The continuous prefetching effect execution flag is set in the process of step S2011 of the special figure prefetching effect control process (FIG. 66) when the continuous prefetching effect is executed. If the continuous look-ahead effect execution flag is not set (the result of step S2101 is "No"), the continuous look-ahead effect process is terminated because the continuous look-ahead effect is not executed.

  On the other hand, when the continuous look-ahead effect execution flag is set (result of step S2101 is “Yes”), the effect control program acquires a random value for selecting a look-ahead effect to be executed (specific effect) ( Step S2102). Further, based on the obtained random number value, a specific effect mode is obtained from the continuous look-ahead effect mode selection table (FIG. 70) (step S2103), and a specific effect setting process is executed (step S2104). In the specific effect setting process, settings for executing a continuous look-ahead effect (specific effect) are performed.

  In the continuous look-ahead effect (specific effect) in this embodiment, the shape of the hold display is changed according to the degree of expectation. In addition, since the continuous look-ahead effect is executed in the state where the normal look-ahead effect is executed, the shape is controlled so that the shape changes in a state where the color of the hold display changes. FIG. 70 is a diagram illustrating an example of a continuous look-ahead effect mode selection table for selecting a hold display mode in the continuous look-ahead effect (specific effect) of the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 70, in this embodiment, six types of specific effects are defined according to the degree of expectation, and a range of random numbers is set for each specific effect. For example, when the effect selection pattern is “pattern 2”, when the random number value is 0 to 200, the specific effect is 1, when the random value is 201 to 400, the specific effect is 2,. Is selected for the special effect 6.

  In pattern 1, specific effects 5 and 6 having high expectations are not selected. In pattern 1, all specific effects are executable. The range of random numbers is set so that the effect is not easily selected. On the other hand, in pattern 4, specific effects 1 having a low degree of expectation are not selected, and specific effects 4 and 5 having a high degree of expectation are easily selected. As shown in FIG. 68, the pattern 1 is selected as a fluctuation pattern with a low degree of expectation, while the pattern 4 is selected when the result of the fluctuation display game is a big hit.

  If the same shape as the previously executed continuous pre-reading effect is selected, the game may proceed as it is as if the continuous pre-reading effect has not been executed, or the hold display may temporarily flash. For example, the player may be notified that the continuous prefetching effect has been performed.

  Here, the description returns to the flowchart of FIG. When the specific effect setting process is performed, the effect control program subtracts 1 from the number of remaining effects (step S2105). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining effects has become 0, that is, whether or not all the continuous look-ahead effects (specific effects) have been executed (step S2106). When the number of remaining effects has become 0 (the result of step S2106 is “Yes”), all the continuous prefetch effects have been executed, and the continuous prefetch effect execution flag is cleared (step S2107). Finally, the lower limit of the random number is set to a specified value (for example, “0”) (step S2108), and the continuous prefetching effect setting process ends.

  On the other hand, when the number of remaining effects is not 0 (the result of step S2106 is “No”), that is, when all the continuous look-ahead effects have not been executed, the random number value acquired in the process of step S2102 Is set on the basis of (step S2109). For example, when the effect selection pattern is “pattern 3” and the random number value is “350”, since the specific effect 3 is selected, the specific effect 1 or the specific effect 2 is not selected. Is set, the lower limit of the random number is set to the lower limit “201” when the specific effect 3 is selected. As a result, when the next continuous look-ahead effect is executed, a random number value in the range of “201” to “1000” is extracted in the process of step S2102, and the random number value is compared with the effect executed earlier in the continuous look-ahead effect. It is possible to prevent an effect with low expectation from being executed.

  Note that, in the continuous prefetching effect, the random number extraction range may be adjusted so that the suspended display changes stepwise. For example, when the effect selection pattern is “pattern 3” and the number of consecutive prefetch executions is “3”, the lower limit value is “0” and the upper limit value is “4” so that the first specific effect to be executed is 1 to 4. 600 ". At this time, if the specific effect to be executed first is 2, the lower limit value of the random number value for selecting the specific effect to be executed the second time is set to “201”, and the upper limit value is set to “800”. That is, the specific effect is set so that any one of 3 to 5 is selected. By doing so, the specific effect is executed so that the expected degree is always high (to be established), and even if the specific effect 5 is selected, the specific effect 6 is performed in the next (last) specific effect. Is selected, and the specific effect can be executed so as to prevent the falling down and to surely increase the degree of expectation. In addition, if it is set so as to be surely established, it is possible to greatly increase the sense of expectation of the player. Therefore, control may be performed so as to be surely established only in the case of a big hit.

[13-3. Production example]
Through the above processing, it is possible to select a specific effect so that a fall-off does not occur in the continuous look-ahead effect. Next, a specific example of the continuous prefetching effect will be described. FIG. 71 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen transition of the continuous prefetching effect according to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 71 (A) shows a state in which the decorative display is displayed while the pre-reading effect is not being executed. FIG. 71 (B) shows a state in which a normal prefetch effect has been executed as a result of a game ball winning in the upper starting port 2101 in the state of FIG. 71 (A). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71 (C), the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71 (D), the held start-up memory is exhausted, and the next fluctuation display is started. At this time, the first continuous look-ahead effect is executed, and the specific effect 3 is executed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 71 (D) to 71 (G), each time the reserved start memory is exhausted and the variable display is started, the specific effect 4 and the specific effect 5 are executed, and the shape of the reserved display is changed. Change.

  Then, when the starting memory to be subjected to the pre-reading effect is exhausted and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started (FIG. 71 (H)), a reach occurs (FIG. 71 (I)). In the example shown in FIG. 71 (J), SP reach 3 is executed.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the look-ahead effect can be executed based on the progress of the game (the effect mode is changed), so that the player's sense of expectation is further increased in the process of continuing the game. Becomes possible. In particular, for a variable display game that is executed after the prefetching effect (normal prefetching effect) is executed at the timing when the game ball wins in the starting port and the starting memory targeted for the prefetching effect is consumed. Although the entertainment interest may be reduced, the state of the hold display changes each time the variable display game is executed, so that the expectation of the player can be continuously increased, and the entertainment interest is reduced. Can be prevented.

[13-4. Modified example of special figure look-ahead production]
[13-4-1. Modified example of special figure pre-reading effect control]
Note that it is not necessary to distinguish between the normal prefetching effect and the continuous prefetching effect. In the embodiment described above, in the first look-ahead effect (normal look-ahead effect), the mode (color) of the hold display changes at the timing when the game ball wins the starting port, and in the second and subsequent look-ahead effects (the continuous look-ahead effect), At the time of digestion, the mode (shape) of the hold display changes. In this case, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous look-ahead effect only at the timing when the game ball wins at the starting port, and the content of the specific effect (change of the hold display) is randomly selected at the time of holding the game.

  On the other hand, as in story reach, the contents (scenarios) of all the special effects may be randomly selected at the time of starting winning. For example, in the special figure pre-reading effect control process (step S1027 in FIG. 42, FIG. 66), all the specific effects are selected by lot. In the process (step S1408) of setting the special figure pre-reading effect execution flag of the received command analysis process (FIG. 48), the contents of all the specific effects may be randomly selected.

  In addition, when the number of retained storages is 2 or less and the variable display is being executed at the time of the start winning, the number of executions of the continuous look-ahead effect is set to 1. What is necessary is just to select the mode of the continuous look-ahead effect based on FIG. 68) (all the patterns may be covered by the continuous look-ahead effect lottery table). In this case, the color of the hold display may be changed in the first look-ahead effect (the same as the normal look-ahead effect), the shape may be changed from the beginning, or both the color and the shape may be changed. .

  In addition, when the number of prefetching effects is one, that is, when the mode of the hold display changes at the time of the start winning and thereafter, the mode of the hold display does not change, a gaseous effect with extremely low expectation may be performed. That is, the larger the number of changes in the hold mode, the higher the expectation of the big hit, but if only one, the expectation may be low.

[13-4-2. Special map 2 priority digest]
In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins in the upper starting port 2101, a first special figure variable display game in which a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the upper special symbol display 1185, and a gaming ball wins in the lower starting port 2102. In this case, the second special figure variation display game in which the special symbol is variably displayed on the lower special symbol display 1186 is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display is started in a case where a game ball has won the lower starting port 2102, in preference to a case where a game ball has won the upper starting port 2101. Therefore, when a prefetching effect is executed based on the starting memory in which the game ball has won the upper starting port 2101 and the game ball has won in the lower starting port 2102, the digestion of the starting memory of the prefetching effect target is delayed. Become.

  In this way, when the variable display of the prefetch target is interrupted, the specific effect executed immediately before may be continuously executed. In addition, a specific effect based on the selected scenario may be executed, and the specific effect executed last may be continuously executed by the interrupted amount.

  Alternatively, the scenario may be reselected for the interrupted amount. At this time, a random number range may be set in accordance with the scenario corresponding to the specific effect that has been executed, and a new scenario may be selected, or the executed scenario may be ignored, so that the content of the effect does not fall. Alternatively, a new scenario may be selected by initializing the range of random numbers.

  Further, when a game ball wins in the lower starting port 2102, the specific effect may not be executed, and only the variable display corresponding to the starting memory in which the upper starting port 2101 has been won may be executed.

  When the first special figure change display game and the second special figure change display game are configured to be simultaneously executable, for example, a specific effect is performed in accordance with the execution of the first special figure change display game. Just execute it.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol is won, the starting ball solenoid 2105 is driven to open and close the movable piece 2106, so that a game ball can be won in the lower starting hole 2102. However, when the game ball wins alternately in the upper starting port 2101 and the lower starting port 2102 and the first special figure change display game and the second special figure change display game are executed alternately, an interrupt is issued. Does not occur. In this case, the control may be performed in the same manner as when only the first special figure variable display game is executed. However, since the variable display for up to eight times can be suspended, these variable display games are not distinguished from each other. It is possible to execute a series of specific effects over a period, and it is possible to execute effects that are rich in variations.

[13-4-3. Modified example of special figure look-ahead production mode]
In the embodiment described above, the mode of the hold display is changed, but the background of the screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 may be changed. More specifically, the background color may be simply changed, or a special structure or natural object may be arranged behind a decorative pattern or a character. For example, a cloud may be displayed, the color of the cloud may be changed according to the degree of expectation of a big hit, or lightning may be generated from the cloud.

[14. Modification of random number lottery]
In the production example described above, the range in which random numbers are generated (upper limit value, lower limit value) is changed to prevent falling, but other methods may be used to prevent falling. Good. The case where pattern 1 of the effect selection pattern shown in FIG. 54 is selected will be described.

  For example, without changing the random number generation range (that is, while keeping the range of “0” to “1000”), a specific effect is selected by converting the extracted random number value by a process such as an operation. You may. Hereinafter, a specific example will be described.

  In the present invention, when “scenario 3” is selected as the specific effect, the specific effect executed immediately before is any one of “scenario 1” to “scenario 3”. To explain such an example, in order to prevent falling, it is set so that a random number is generated in a range from “0” to “600”. Here, a random number is generated in a range from “0” to “1000”, and multiplied by “600/1000” (rounded down after the decimal point) to generate a random number in a range from “0” to “600”. be able to.

  Further, when generating a random number in the range from “0” to “600”, the remainder obtained by dividing the random number generated in the range from “0” to “1000” by “600” may be used as a random number value. Good. In this case, since the values from “0” to “400” overlap, the variation of the random numbers is biased. For example, if the division result is 1 or more, the difference between the random number generation range and the overlapping range (Here, 600−400 = 200) is added to the random number value (that is, the overlapping range is changed from “200” to “600”), so that a scenario with a high degree of expectation is likely to be executed. Then, the player's expectation may be increased.

  As yet another example, when generating a random number in a range from “0” to “1000”, a random number generated in a range from “0” to “100” is generated ten times, and each generated random number is generated. May be added to generate a random number in a range from “0” to “1000”. With this configuration, it is possible to set various random number ranges while keeping the range of actually generated random numbers constant by setting and adding the number of random number generations according to the range of random numbers to be generated. it can. Further, instead of generating the random number a predetermined number of times, the random number may be multiplied by a predetermined number. For example, a random number in a range from “0” to “1000” may be generated by multiplying a random number generated in a range from “0” to “100” by ten. Although fine distribution cannot be performed, similar results can be obtained if the random numbers are uniform random numbers. The method of extracting random numbers may be changed according to the effect selection pattern, and the accuracy of the extracted random numbers may be adjusted as needed.

  Further, after extracting a random number for selecting a specific effect to be executed first, a random number for selecting a subsequent specific effect may be added to a random number for selecting a preceding specific effect. . At this time, the generation range of the random numbers may be adjusted so that the random number value after the addition does not exceed the upper limit value, or the excess of the upper limit value may be truncated.

[15. Allowance for falling (rule break)
[15-1. Production example]
In the embodiment described above, the specific effects that are continuously executed are configured so that the degree of expectation of the effect contents can be prevented from falling. However, even if the fall-off does not occur, the result of the variable display does not always become a big hit. In addition, when a specific effect with a high degree of expectation is first executed, the flow of the subsequent effects is predicted by the player, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game cannot be enhanced.

  Therefore, a modification will be described in which a fall is allowed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a change is made to a normally executed effect pattern. The condition for allowing the falling may be determined, for example, depending on the game state such as the probability state of the winning probability of the variable display or the operating state (time saving state) of the ordinary electric auditors. Specifically, if the probability of the result of the fluctuation display being a big hit is high (high probability state, probable change state), or if the state is advantageous to the player such as a time saving state, the generation range of the random number is not adjusted. May be allowed to fall. Conversely, in a state other than the probability change state or the time saving state that is not advantageous to the player, a fall may occur without adjusting the random number generation range.

  Further, only when the result of the variable display game is a big hit, the fall may be allowed. That is, the player can recognize that the big hit is decided when the effect with the low degree of expectation is executed and the player is disappointed. In this way, when an effect that is not executed in the normal flow is executed, the degree of expectation is increased. Conversely, the effect variation can be increased and the interest of the game can be increased. The fall may be allowed (with a low probability) during normal operation while controlling the fall to be less likely to occur, and the probability of the fall occurring when the result of the variable display game is a big hit may be increased.

  Further, it may be determined whether or not the fall is permitted according to the variation pattern instead of the result of the variation display game. For example, when a reach with a high degree of reliability (for example, story reach, SP reach 3 after the pseudo continuous production) is generated, a fall may occur more easily than a reach with a low degree of reliability. On the other hand, when a reach with low reliability occurs, a fall may occur more easily than a reach with high reliability. As described above, instead of the result of the variable display game, whether or not the fall is allowed may be made to correspond to the effect content.

  In addition, a fall of the reliability of the variation pattern when the result of the variation display game is a big hit may be allowed. For example, the setting is made such that the variation pattern (reach) with high reliability has a higher possibility of falling down than the case where the variation pattern (reach) with low reliability is selected. Conversely, the variation pattern (reach) with low reliability may have a higher possibility of falling down than when the variation pattern (reach) with high reliability is selected.

  In addition, when the obfuscation mode in which the probability state of the variable display game is not informed clearly of whether the probability state is the normal state or the probable change state after the jackpot game is executed is executed, a random number is used only when the actual probability state is the normal state. May be adjusted. In this case, if the probability state is the probable state, even if a fall occurs, the probability of winning the variable display game is high, so that the player is less likely to be discouraged as a result. Because of this, the discouragement of the player due to the production of the story reach is reduced. Conversely, only in the case of the probable change state, the generation range of the random number may be adjusted to prevent falling. With such a configuration, the player can recognize that the current probability state is the normal state (low probability) due to the fall.

  Furthermore, in the ambiguity mode, the probability state may be explicitly reported when the falling-down occurs without adjusting the random number generation range. Further, two types of modes, that is, a mode in which the generation range of the random number is adjusted to the unclear mode and a mode in which the generation range of the random number is not adjusted may be settable. Further, these modes may be selectable by a player. With such a configuration, the player can select whether the probability state can be recognized early or an effect with less disappointment can be executed.

[15-2. Control example]
Next, control for allowing falling will be described. In the present embodiment, the generation range of random numbers is adjusted in order to prevent falling, but a specific procedure will be described.

  For example, when falling is allowed, the upper limit or lower limit of the random number is reset to a specified value (initial value). In this case, there is a possibility that the fall does not occur. However, when the fall is generated as the jackpot notification effect, the range of the random number may be set so as to always generate the fall. Further, the upper limit or the lower limit of the random number may be set so as to be returned to a predetermined step, not to the prescribed value (initial value). With such a configuration, it is possible to adjust the falling probability and the stage.

  As described above, random numbers having a biased distribution may be generated by generating random numbers in a predetermined range in an overlapping manner. In this case, the falling probability (rising) may be adjusted by setting the overlapping range to a range in which falling occurs, or conversely, a range in which rising occurs. Furthermore, the range of the random number generated by setting the initial value, the minimum value, and the maximum value of the random number counter may be adjusted.

  Further, as described above, the counter for updating the random number is incremented by one at a predetermined timing (timer interrupt processing), but the value to be added may be changed according to the game state. For example, 1 is added in the normal gaming state, and another random number is extracted and added in the high probability state (probable change state). By changing the method of updating the random number counter in this manner, it is possible to change the frequency of occurrence of falling down according to the game state.

[16. Processing when power is turned off]
Here, a description will be given of a process performed when a power-off command or a power-on command is received in the reception command analysis process.

  As described above, the power interruption command is transmitted when power supply from the outside to the main control board 4100 is stopped. Before the power interruption command is transmitted, as described above, a power failure notice signal is output from the main control board 4100, and the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing is executed to execute processing such as command backup. Is executed.

  The peripheral control board 4140 executes a process according to the mode in which the power is turned off. Specifically, when power supply from the outside is stopped and power supply to the entire gaming machine (main control board 4100 and peripheral control board 4140) is cut off, power supply to only the main control board 4100 is cut off. In this case, supply of power to only the peripheral control board 4140 may be interrupted. Hereinafter, each case will be described.

[16-1. When only the peripheral control board is turned off]
When the supply of power to only the peripheral control board 4140 is interrupted due to a wiring contact failure or the like, the game control in the main control board 4100 is continued. At this time, if the storage content of the peripheral control RAM 4150c has not been lost, that is, if the storage content of the peripheral control RAM 4150c matches the storage content of the backup management target work area 4150ca, as described above, the hot start is performed. The effect control is resumed (continued).

  Even when the production control is restarted by a hot start, the peripheral control board 4140 may be notified that the power supply has been temporarily cut off. For example, the power supply cutoff may be displayed by displaying an initial screen when the power is turned on, or by displaying a screen notifying that the power has been cut off.

  In addition, there is a possibility that a difference between the time measurement (timer) on the main control board 4100 and the time measurement on the peripheral control board 4140 may occur due to the power cutoff. For example, the elapsed time from the start of the change of the display of the special symbol on the main control board 4100 and the change of the display of the decorative symbol on the peripheral control board 4140 may be shifted. In this case, since the variation display of the decorative symbol ends later, the special figure tuning effect may be ended when the special figure tuning effect end command is received. If it is necessary to display an initial symbol at the start of the change, a default lost symbol or a predetermined symbol is displayed. The predetermined symbol may be any symbol other than the big hit, and may be a symbol dedicated to the occurrence of a power failure.

  Further, if the power is cut off during the execution of the big hit game, the time measurement deviation may be corrected at the timing when the big winning opening closing display command, the ending command, and the like indicating the shift to the next round are received.

  When the storage contents of the peripheral control RAM 4150c have been lost, the value 0 is written to the normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the production control is restarted as a cold start.

  If an effect (fluctuation pattern) accompanied by a specific effect is being executed at the timing when the effect control is restarted as a cold start, the execution of a series of specific effects is interrupted. On the other hand, in the case of the hot start, if the progress information of the specific effect is held, the effect may be continued as it is, or the result of the lottery of the scenario may be discarded, and the scenario may be re-selected. When drawing a scenario at the time of execution of each specific production, draw a scenario for executing the subsequent specific production until the timing when all final specific productions are completed so that the contents of each specific production do not conflict. Alternatively, the specific effect may not be executed. Note that the execution of the specific effect may be stopped when the power supply of the peripheral control board is shut off regardless of the cold start or the hot start.

[16-2. When only the main control board is powered off]
When only the power of the main control board 4100 is cut off and the power of the peripheral control board 4140 is supplied, the power cutoff command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 as described above. At this time, the peripheral control board 4140 switches the effect display being executed to the screen display at the time of power interruption (the abnormality notification screen). Thereafter, when the supply of power to the main control board 4100 is restarted, a command for notifying the gaming state is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 together with the power-on command. Note that the command for notifying the gaming state may be integrated with the power-on command.

  When the gaming state notified together with the power-on command matches the content of the currently executed effect, the peripheral control board 4140 returns to the effect screen and continues the effect as it is. At this time, if it is not possible to return to the effect screen only by the information notified together with the power-on command, the effect is executed so that the player does not mistakenly recognize the effect. For example, the case where the effect cannot be returned to the effect being executed is, for example, a state in which the stop result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed, a round effect during a big hit game, and the like. The effect that the player does not misunderstand is, for example, when the decorative symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner, all the decorative symbols are fluctuated and displayed at a high speed, or a specially designed decorative symbol is displayed. If a big hit game is being played, only the fact that a big hit game is being played is displayed without displaying the number of rounds.

  In addition, if the game state is different from the display state of the current production, an abnormality notification screen is displayed. Then, when a normal command is received from the main control board 4100, an effect corresponding to the received command is performed to return to a normal state. It should be noted that the abnormality notification screen may be any display as long as the player can recognize that an abnormality has occurred. At this time, if the fluctuation display is executed in a pseudo continuous fluctuation or story reach fluctuation pattern, the execution of the specific effect is stopped, and even if the continuous look-ahead effect is ongoing, the subsequent execution of the specific effect (lottery of the scenario) ) Is aborted.

[16-3. When the power to the main control board and peripheral control board is cut off]
When the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the main control board 4100 is supplied with power from a backup power supply, and the contents stored in the RAM are held for a predetermined period. As described above, the power interruption command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140.

  Thereafter, when power is supplied to the gaming machine again, the main control board 4100 transmits a power-on command to the peripheral control board 4140. At this time, a game state is notified from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140, and if the game is not in a game stop state such as a customer waiting state, the peripheral control board 4140 provides an effect of notifying that a power cutoff has occurred. Is performed, the production is switched to an effect that does not give a false recognition to the player waiting for the customer. Thereafter, when a normal command is received from the main control board 4100, an effect corresponding to the received command is performed to return to a normal state. In this case, if the fluctuation display is being executed in a pseudo continuous fluctuation or story reach fluctuation pattern, the execution of the specific effect is stopped, and even if the continuous look-ahead effect is continuing, the subsequent execution of the specific effect (scenario lottery) ) Is aborted.

[16-4. Summary at power-off]
With the above configuration, even when the power supply to the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 is cut off, whether the execution of the variation display with the pseudo continuous variation or the story reach variation pattern is continued. It is possible to appropriately determine whether or not.

[17. Directed look-ahead direction]
Next, the normal symbol type prefetching effect (general symbol prefetching effect) will be described. In the present embodiment, when a normal symbol type prefetch effect command is received from the main control board 4100, a general symbol prefetch effect is executed. FIG. 72 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a general-purpose prefetching effect control process according to the present embodiment. FIG. 73 is a diagram illustrating an example of a general-purpose look-ahead effect of the present embodiment.

  When the general-drawing pre-reading effect control process is started, the effect control program first determines whether or not the general-purpose pre-reading effect execution flag is set (step S2201). As described above, the general figure pre-reading effect execution flag is set in the received command analysis process (FIG. 48) when the normal symbol type pre-reading effect command is received. If the ordinary figure prefetch effect execution flag is not set (the result of step S2201 is “No”), the effect control program does not execute the ordinary figure prefetch effect, and thus ends the present process.

  On the other hand, when the general figure prefetch effect execution flag is set (the result of step S2201 is “Yes”), the effect control program determines whether the general figure prefetch effect is currently being executed (step S2201). S2202). If the general-purpose look-ahead effect is being executed (the result of step S2202 is “Yes”), the process from step S2207 is executed in order to continue the general-purpose look-ahead effect being executed.

  When the general-drawing pre-reading effect is not being executed (the result of step S2202 is “No”), the effect control program determines whether the execution condition of the general-purpose pre-reading effect is satisfied (step S2203). As for the execution condition of the general-purpose look-ahead effect, for example, it is determined whether or not the condition can be established according to a game state, an execution state of another effect, and the like. When the execution condition of the general-drawing prefetching effect is not satisfied (the result of step S2203 is “No”), the effect control program clears the general-purpose prefetching effect execution flag (step S2209) and ends the process.

  In the present embodiment, the timing for executing the general-purpose look-ahead effect is not particularly limited. For example, you may make it perform independently of the execution state of the fluctuation | variation display (special figure synchronous production) of the decoration symbol corresponding to the fluctuation | variation display of a special symbol. As shown in FIG. 73 (A), even while the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol is being variably displayed, the ordinary figure pre-reading effect is executed as shown in FIG. 73 (B). The execution timing of the ordinary figure pre-reading effect may be the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 73, even during the execution of the special figure prefetching effect, the general figure prefetching effect may be executed in parallel.

  On the other hand, even when a command (ordinary symbol type pre-reading effect command) instructing execution of the pre-reading effect is received from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control board 4140 determines whether or not the pre-reading effect can be executed. Is possible. For example, when an effect that the player pays attention to (for example, a reach effect) is executed, or when a special effect is executed during the execution of the general look-ahead effect, the execution condition of the general-purpose look-ahead effect is set. As unsuccessful, the execution of the prefetching effect may be restricted. Also, in order to prevent a plurality of types of announcement effects from being executed at the same time, when the prefetch announcement effect of the special lottery is being executed, the execution of the prefetch announcement effect of the ordinary lottery is controlled by the processing on the peripheral control board 4140 side. Is also good.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (B), in the universal figure pre-reading effect according to the present embodiment, a star-shaped general figure pre-reading effect area is displayed in the upper right portion of the screen, and the symbol is variably displayed within the area. FIG. 73 (C)). As a result of the fluctuation display, the symbol corresponding to the hit (“this”, FIG. 73 (D)) and the symbol corresponding to the loss (“−”, FIG. 73 (E)) are stopped and displayed, and the result of the general drawing lottery is displayed. Will be notified. The player may fire the game ball aiming at the lower starting port 2102 provided with the movable piece 2106 when the symbol indicating the hit is stopped in the ordinary figure pre-reading effect area. Further, when the symbol indicating the hit is stopped, the player may be notified to shoot the game ball aiming at the lower starting port 2102. At this time, in order to secure time for the player to aim and fire at the lower starting port 2102, the effect control program determines whether or not the result of the general drawing prefetching effect is given a predetermined time before the movable piece 2106 is expanded in the left-right direction. Control to be displayed.

  Further, when a plurality of movable modes of the movable piece 2106 are set according to the type of the ordinary lottery, the player may set the movable piece 2106 in accordance with the degree of advantage (easiness of winning the game ball to the lower starting port 2102) for the player. You may determine whether the execution conditions of the figure look-ahead effect were satisfied. For example, as the movable mode of the movable piece 2106, the time during which the movable piece 2106 is expanded in the left-right direction is set to be long (long open), or the number of times the movable piece 2106 is moved is set to be large. At this time, the general-purpose look-ahead notice may be executed only in the case of a movable mode advantageous to the player such as long release.

  In addition, a plurality of types of symbols other than a hit and a loss may be defined, and a stop symbol may be set according to the degree of expectation that a normal lottery will be a big hit. Further, the stop symbol may correspond to the movable mode of the movable piece 2106. When the movable piece 2106 moves in the long opening mode as a result of the regular drawing lottery winning, a stop symbol that informs the player as a hit is set. May be a stop symbol.

  In addition, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is short, it is not necessary to execute the normal symbol type prefetching effect. This is because the winning probability is high, and even if the result of the ordinary lottery is announced, the profit for the player is small, and the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is short. That is, it may be determined whether or not the general-purpose look-ahead effect can be executed according to the game state.

  When the execution condition of the general-purpose prefetching effect is satisfied (the result of step S2203 is “Yes”), the effect control program displays the general-purpose prefetching effect region (step S2204). Then, in order to set the time for variably displaying the symbols in the universal figure prefetching effect, the general figure prefetching effect timer is set (step S2205), and the universal figure prefetching effect is started (step S2206). It should be noted that the time until the ordinary figure pre-reading effect timer times out may be fixed, may be in accordance with the game state, may be in accordance with the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol, or may be a combination thereof.

  Furthermore, when the general-drawing prefetching effect is being executed (the result of step S2202 is “yes”), the rendering control program determines whether the general-drawing prefetching effect timer has expired (step S2207). If the general-purpose prefetching effect timer has not expired (the result of step S2207 is “no”), the process ends to continue the general-purpose prefetching effect.

  On the other hand, when the general-drawing pre-reading effect timer has timed out (result of step S2207 is “Yes”), the rendering control program stops and displays the changing symbol to display the pre-reading result of the general-drawing lottery ( Step S2208). Finally, the ordinary figure pre-reading effect execution flag is cleared (step S2209), and the process ends.

  In addition, the general figure pre-reading effect described above is executed on the screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, but may be executed on the screen of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. The pre-reading effect is not only displayed on the display device, but also performed on multiple effect devices, such as moving movable objects, illuminating light sources such as lamps, and outputting sound from speakers. It may be possible, or a combination of a plurality of these effect devices may be used. When performing a pre-reading effect in combination with a plurality of effect devices, besides executing the pre-reading effect simultaneously with a plurality of effect devices, the pre-reading effect should be executed on one of the effect devices. You may. For example, when performing a general-purpose pre-reading effect by screen display and voice output, a state where the general-purpose pre-reading effect cannot be performed by the screen display (for example, when an error is being notified, another (pre-reading) effect is being performed, etc.) In the case of ()), the execution of the effect by the display device is restricted, and only the general-purpose look-ahead effect by voice output is executed. Also, instead of restricting the execution of the general-purpose prefetching effect, the general-purpose prefetching effect may be performed so as to overlap with another effect. In this case, the effect of the general-purpose look-ahead effect is changed. For example, the screen display may be made translucent to perform a pre-reading effect for ordinary drawings, or the volume may be reduced and audio output may be performed.

[18. Effects]
As described above, according to the present embodiment, by changing the range of the random number value dynamically according to the game state and the like, a continuous production without contradiction such as preventing a fall without complicating the control is executed. can do.

  In addition, when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied during the execution of the effect including the specific effect, the flag and the random number initial value for executing the specific effect are cleared. The predetermined initialization condition is, for example, a case where the power supply is cut off during the execution of the effect, and the effect cannot be continued.

  In addition, when there is a starting prize that generates a big hit or a small hit during the performance of the effect, or when there is a starting prize that generates a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, a rare fluctuation pattern with high expectation), Even when the state (game mode) transition condition is satisfied, the execution of the effect including the specific effect is stopped, and the flag and the random number initial value are cleared.

  For example, in the specification in which the variable display based on the game ball winning in the lower starting port 2102 described above is executed with higher priority than in the case of winning in the upper starting port 2101, the result of the variable display executed preferentially is When the above initialization condition such as a big hit is satisfied, the flag and the random number initial value are cleared, and the execution of the effect including the specific effect is stopped. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a specific effect from being interrupted by an event such as occurrence of a big hit or a change in a game state, and from being restarted halfway.

  In addition, the present invention may be applied not only to prevent falling, but also to perform effects that are executed continuously and have order.

  For example, the present invention may be applied to a case where an effect for each round is selected in a big hit game. In this case, the effect of each round may be selected at the start of the big hit game, or the effect content may be selected every predetermined number of rounds (for example, every three rounds in a 15 round big hit game). In addition, a common effect may be executed up to an intermediate round (for example, seven out of fifteen rounds), and the effect content may be selected for a subsequent round (for example, eight or more rounds). At this time, for example, when the start memory of the variable display game executed after the end of the big hit game includes a start memory that becomes a big hit, an effect pattern in which a special effect is easily executed is selected, and a continuous big hit is selected. A certain fact may be suggested (notified) to the player.

  As described above, the feature of the present invention is that by dynamically changing the range of the random number value according to the game state and the like, it is possible to execute a variety of effects without complicating the control. Become.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, it is not necessary to hold a preview lottery table that covers all selection patterns of a specific effect in the story reach, the pseudo continuous variation, and the continuous prefetching effect, so that the storage capacity increases with the diversification of the effect. Can be suppressed.

[19. Prohibition of special map look-ahead (judgment / production)
Here, the control in which the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 prohibits the special figure prefetch determination and the control in which the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140 prohibits the special figure prefetch effect will be described.

[19-1. Control on main control board side (prohibition of special figure pre-reading determination)]
[19-1-1. command]
First, FIGS. 74 and 75 show an example of a table for explaining the detailed contents of a command related to special figure pre-reading among commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. FIG. 74 is an example of a table showing a modification of the command “8-10. Others” described above with reference to FIG. 16. FIG. 75 shows the special figure 1 symbol type command of “8-1. Special figure 1 tuning effect related” and the special figure 2 symbol type command of “8-2. Special figure 2 tuning effect related” described above with reference to FIG. It is an example of a table showing details. The description of the same configuration as described above is omitted.

  The starting opening winning command instructs the start of the starting opening winning effect. Here, if a game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper starting port switch 3022, the mode value is set to “01H”, and the lower starting port is set based on the detection signal from the lower starting port switch 2109. When a game ball enters the mouth 2102, the mode value is set to “02H”.

  Next, in the above-mentioned (FIG. 16), the timing at which the number of special symbols 1 held changes (the timing of increasing the number of held symbols (starting memory number) due to the game ball winning to the upper starting port 2101) or the timing at which the upper special symbol display 1185 The special symbol 1 storage command is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 4150a at the timing of decreasing the number of holdings by the fluctuation display, and when the number of special symbol 1 holdings increases (when the game ball is awarded to the upper starting port 2101), the special symbol is used. The command for specifying 1 hold number has been sent. Therefore, the special symbol 1 storage command has 0 to 4 pieces of hold number information, and the mode values “00H” to “04H” are set accordingly. Also, as described above, the special symbol 1 hold number designation command notifies the presence / absence of a prefetch effect as well as the hold number at the time of increase. The special symbol 1 reserved number designation command indicates “pre-reading” information when the upper 4 bits of the mode value is “1”, and “non-pre-reading” information when the upper bits of the mode value is “0”. Represents. When the special symbol 1 hold number designation command is “pre-reading”, it also plays the role of instructing the start of the pre-reading effect. The special symbol 2 storage command and the special symbol 2 hold number designation command have the same configuration as the special symbol 1 except that the status value is different.

  On the other hand, in the modified example (FIG. 74), the command transmitted differs when the number of special symbol 1 reservations decreases (at the start of fluctuation) and increases (at the time of starting opening winning). The special symbol 1 storage command at the start of the change indicating the number of reserved balls at the timing when the number of special symbols 1 reserved decreases (the timing of the decrease in the number of reserves by the variable display on the upper special symbol display 1185), that is, the start timing of the variable display. Is sent. Therefore, the special symbol 1 storage command at the start of fluctuation transmitted when the number of holds is reduced has 0 to 3 pieces of hold number information, and the mode values “01H” to “04H” are set accordingly. On the other hand, at the timing when the number of special symbols 1 is increased (timing for increasing the number of retained symbols due to the winning of the game ball to the upper starting port 2101), a pre-reading special symbol 1 storage look-ahead command indicating the number of reserved balls and the presence / absence of prefetching is transmitted. You. Therefore, the pre-read special symbol 1 storage prefetch command transmitted when the number of reservations is increased has 1 to 4 pieces of reservation number information, and the mode values “* 2H” to “* 5H” are set accordingly. The upper four bits “*” of the mode value are set to “0” when “prefetching is not performed” and “1” when “prefetching is performed”. The setting of the presence / absence information of the pre-reading is performed in the process of step S242 (“no pre-reading”) and the process of step S280 (“pre-reading exists”) of the storage pre-reading process (FIG. 76) described later. The pre-reading special symbol 1 storage pre-reading command and the above-mentioned special symbol 1 reserved number designation command (FIG. 16) have the same information transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, but the status value and the mode value constituting the command are not set. different. Note that the special symbol 2 storage command at the start of fluctuation and the special symbol 2 storage prefetch command at the time of pre-reading have the same configuration as the special symbol 1 except that the status value is different.

  Also, only when there is prefetching (that is, when the head address of the mode value of the special symbol 1 (2) storage prefetching command at prefetching is “1”), the symbol type prefetching command, the variation pattern prefetching command, and the variation type A prefetch command is sent. Note that, in the modified example, a fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command is also transmitted. Therefore, in the modified example, a process of setting the transmission of the variable distribution table information prefetch command when the prefetch determination is performed is added to the above-described storage prefetch process (FIG. 24).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 76, a storage prefetch process according to a modification will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a storage prefetch process according to a modification. Note that processes common to the above-described storage prefetching process (FIG. 24) are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  In the modified example, as described above, when the pre-reading determination is made, the variable distribution table information pre-read command is transmitted. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a sets the command indicating the prefetch result (the symbol type prefetch command, the variation pattern prefetch command, and the variation type prefetch command) in the command buffer for transmitting to the peripheral control board 4140 (steps S268 to S278). At this time, the fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command is also set in the command buffer (steps S279a and S279b). The fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command will be described later with reference to FIG. The command acquired in the process of step S284 is a special symbol storage prefetch command at the time of prefetching the corresponding special figure (FIG. 74). As described above, the special symbol 1 (2) storage prefetch command at the time of prefetching has the same information as the special symbol 1 (2) reserved number designation command (FIG. 16).

  Returning to FIG. The symbol type prefetch command is determined based on the result of the special symbol jackpot determination process (step S250, FIG. 27) and the special symbol determination process (step S252, FIG. 28) of the memory prefetch process (FIG. 76). This command specifies a specific jackpot. Similarly, according to the result of the special symbol big hit determination process (step S510, FIG. 27) and the special symbol determination process (step S512, FIG. 28) of the special symbol / flag setting process (FIG. 34) executed at the start of the change. There are special figure 1 (2) symbol type commands as commands for specifying outliers, specific jackpots, and non-specific jackpots. The detailed configuration of these commands will be described.

  Loss or big hit symbol types 0 to 48 are associated with the mode values of the symbol type prefetch command (FIG. 74) and the special figure 1 (2) symbol type command (FIG. 75). For the symbol type pre-read command, the mode value “01H” is set for the loss, and the mode values “02H” to “46H” are set for the symbol types 0 to 44 indicating the special jackpot, and the non-specific The same mode value “50H” is set for the big hit symbol types 45 to 48 indicating the big hit (small hit). On the other hand, in the special figure 1 (2) symbol type command, mode values “47H” to “50H” are set for each of the large hit symbol types 45 to 48 indicating a non-specific big hit (small hit). .

  The variation pattern prefetch command is a command for specifying an effect pattern (variation pattern) as described above. The variation pattern value (variation pattern number) indicating the variation pattern is obtained by changing the variation pattern random number 1 and the variation pattern random number 2 in the variation pattern selection determination process (steps S258, FIGS. 29 and 30) of the storage prefetching process (FIG. 76). It is set using. The variation pattern random number 1 is used to set an effect mode from a plurality, and the variation pattern random number 2 is used to set detailed effect content (effect pattern) according to the set effect mode.

  The fluctuation type prefetch command is a command for designating information (added value of time) as to whether or not to perform pseudo continuous fluctuation with respect to the set fluctuation pattern. The added value of the time is set using the random number for the variation type in the variation type determination process (step S262, FIG. 31) of the storage look-ahead process (FIG. 76). When it is determined that the pseudo continuous fluctuation is not performed by the fluctuation type random number, the fluctuation time of the set fluctuation pattern is maintained. If it is determined that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation is to be performed by the random number for the variation type, the pseudo-random number corresponding to the variation type (one of types A to C) corresponding to the set variation pattern is determined by the random number for the variation type. The number of executions of the change (1 to 3 times) is determined. At this time, since the added value of time is associated with the number of times of execution of the pseudo continuous fluctuation, the added value of time is set by determining the number of times of execution for each type. Therefore, when the pseudo continuous fluctuation is performed, the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation pattern is extended.

  The fluctuation distribution table information look-ahead command is a command for specifying a fluctuation distribution table used when a fluctuation pattern is determined in the fluctuation pattern selection determination processing (FIG. 29) at the start of fluctuation. As described above, in the fluctuation distribution table, the jackpot fluctuation selection information type table (big hit distribution table) used in the case of a big hit ("yes" in step S350) is out of reach but a reach effect is performed (step S350). The reach fluctuation selection information state table (reach distribution table) used for “yes” in S372) and the deviation fluctuation selection information table (“no” in step S372) used when no reach effect is made (step S372). Non-reach distribution table). The fluctuation distribution table at the start of the fluctuation set in the fluctuation distribution table information look-ahead command includes a reach or non-reach distribution table in addition to the three distribution tables described above. The reach or non-reach distribution table has a hold (startup memory) having a reach determination random number that may change the reach determination result as to whether or not to perform a reach effect when the number of retained balls changes between the time of pre-reading and the start of fluctuation. ) Is a table set for ()).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 77, a description will be given of a merit of transmitting the variable distribution table information prefetch command as one of the prefetch commands. FIG. 77 is an example of a simplified flowchart in which (A) the fluctuation pattern selection determination processing (FIG. 29) is focused on the above-described fluctuation distribution table, and (B) is based on the correlation between the reach determination random number and the comparison value. It is an example of the reach execution availability table.

  As shown in FIG. 77 (A), in the variation pattern selection determination processing, a jackpot determination is performed using a jackpot determination random number, and if a jackpot is determined, a jackpot distribution table is set. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot determination is out of order, the reach determination is performed using the reach determination random number. In the reach determination, the reach distribution table is set when the value of the reach determination random number is smaller than the comparison value (reach threshold), and the non-reach distribution table is set when the value of the reach determination random number is larger than the comparison value. Is set. Thereafter, the effect mode is determined from the variation pattern random number 1 using the set table, and the variation pattern is determined from the variation pattern random number 2 in the effect mode.

  In the reach determination, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), the comparison value (reach threshold) fluctuates according to the number of reserved balls at the time of the determination. Here, it is assumed that the comparison value when the number of reserved balls at the time of determination is 4 is 10, and that the comparison value is added by 10 each time the number of reserved balls decreases by one. In this case, if the reach determination random number is 0 to 9, the reach distribution table is set regardless of whether the number of reserved balls is 0 to 4. However, when the reach determination random number is 10 to 49, the result of the reach determination differs depending on the number of reserved balls, so that either the reach distribution table or the non-reach distribution table is set. When the reach determination random number is 50 or more, the non-reach distribution table is always set regardless of the number of reserved balls.

  Therefore, the mode value of the fluctuation distribution table information look-ahead command is “01H” when the big hit determination result is a big hit, “02H” when the reach determination random number is 0 to 9 in the case of a big hit, and the reach determination random number Is set to "03H" when the number is 10 to 49, and "04H" is set when the reach determination random number is 50 or more.

  As described above, by transmitting the fluctuation distribution table information pre-read command from the main control board to the peripheral control board at the time of pre-reading, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can perform the pre-reading and the start of the fluctuation with respect to the suspension of the mode value “03H”. It is possible to execute the look-ahead effect control that takes into account that the result of the reach determination may be different when the number of reserved balls fluctuates. If the mode value of the fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command is “03H” in the storage prefetch process (FIG. 76), the process of setting the hold command reference value when there is prefetch in step S280 is not performed. The state in which the pending command reference value at the time of no prefetch in S242 is set may be maintained. That is, the main control MPU 4100a performs pre-read determination but does not transmit the pre-read determination result information to the peripheral control board 4140. In this case, a special symbol 1 (2) storage prefetch command of "no prefetch" is transmitted to the peripheral control board. As a result, the look-ahead effect control by the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be simplified, and the control load can be reduced.

  As described above, the special symbol 1 memory look-ahead command (special symbol 2 memory look-ahead command) transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board when a game ball is won to the upper starting port 2101 (lower starting port 2102) is held. Information on whether or not to perform a prefetch effect (“prefetch” or “no prefetch”) is included together with the ball count information. Then, only in the case of "pre-reading", the symbol type pre-reading command, the fluctuation pattern pre-reading command, the fluctuation type pre-reading command and the fluctuation distribution table information pre-reading command are transmitted, and in the case of "no pre-reading", these pre-reading commands are not transmitted. . The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140 receives the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead command (special symbol 2 memory look-ahead command) transmitted at the time of the start-up winning, and does not wait for the reception of another look-ahead command. It can be determined whether or not it is an execution target. When the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead command of "prefetch available" (special symbol 2 memory look-ahead command) (when specific game information is received), the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives another special look-ahead command or a special figure. After performing a process (first pre-process) of setting a prefetching effect execution flag (step S1408 of the received command analysis process, FIG. 48) to satisfy the execution condition of the prefetching effect, a special figure prefetching effect control process (FIG. 42, a second pre-processing), and a prefetch effect is executed. Further, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the special symbol 1 storage prefetch command of “no prefetching” (special symbol 2 storage prefetch command), the peripheral control MPU 4150a can recognize that the prefetch command is not transmitted later. Can be immediately determined without waiting for the reception of the pre-reading command (not to set the special figure pre-reading effect execution flag). That is, in this case, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the special figure pre-reading effect control processing (FIG. 66) which is the second pre-processing without executing the first pre-processing, and sets the special figure pre-reading effect execution flag. Since the prefetch effect has not been performed (“No” in step S2001), the special figure prefetch effect control process ends without executing the prefetch effect.

  If the main control board 4100 does not perform the pre-reading determination (if a “no pre-reading” command is received), the commands necessary for setting the pre-reading effect (symbol type pre-reading command, Since the pattern prefetch command, the fluctuation type prefetch command, and the fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command) are not transmitted, the command transmitted at the time of starting opening winning (prefetch) is simplified, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the prefetch effect. Such erroneous control can be prevented from occurring. In addition, as described later, the main control board 4100 having a backup function can transmit pre-reading presence / absence information to the peripheral control board 4140 with respect to a failure in the pre-reading effect that can occur in the progress of the game, so that an appropriate pre-reading effect can be obtained. Implementation can be facilitated. Note that the condition for setting “no prefetch” in the special symbol 1 (2) storage prefetch command (that is, the condition that the main control board 4100 prohibits prefetch) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The symbol type look-ahead command transmitted at the time of starting opening winning (pre-reading) is set to a different mode value for each specific big hit type for a specific big hit (first specific result) accompanied by the operation of the condition device. A non-specific big hit (second specific result), which is a so-called small hit without the operation of the device, is set to a common mode value regardless of the type of the non-specific big hit. That is, when the pre-read determination result is a specific jackpot (first specific result), the main control board 4100 transmits a command (first specific information) in which a mode value is set so that the type of the specific jackpot can be specified. If the pre-read determination result is a non-specified jackpot (second specified result), a command (second specified information) whose mode value is unified so that the type of non-specified jackpot cannot be specified is transmitted. Then, in the special figure 1 (2) symbol type command transmitted at the start of the fluctuation, a different mode value is set for each of the non-specific big hits and the non-specific big hits. As a result, the type of the small hit, which is a so-called small hit, cannot be grasped even by the peripheral control board 4140 until the start of the change. There is no risk of being read. Therefore, it is possible to provide a look-ahead effect that appropriately increases the degree of expectation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  For example, there is provided a V zone winning structure of two kinds of blades in which a big winning opening is opened upon a small hit and a big hit is generated by a game ball winning (V winning) in a specific area (V zone) in the big winning opening. In a pachinko machine, the ease of winning a game ball in a specific area varies depending on the type of small hit. That is, it is determined whether a big hit can be derived according to the type of the small hit. In addition, since the type of the big hit derived according to the type of the small hit is different, the privilege (the number of times of shortening of time, etc.) that the player can acquire is different. For this reason, the small hit type information becomes more important for the player. When a pre-reading effect that can grasp the type of the small hit is performed in such a pachinko machine, the player performs a distinction according to the type of the small hit and can easily aim at the big hit or a specific privilege. Therefore, by preventing the pre-reading effect according to the small hit type from being executed, no predictable element (information) is given to the player until the change is started. Thereby, the fairness of the game can be maintained and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

[19-1-2. Prohibition condition of prefetch judgment]
FIG. 78 is an example of a table showing conditions for prohibiting prefetching by the main control board 4100 in the modified example (A), and (B) is a diagram for explaining the effect of prohibiting prefetching when shifting to the state.

  In the above-described memory look-ahead process (FIG. 76), when the table for selecting the variation pattern is different between the timing of the starting winning of the game ball and the timing when the variation is actually started (“yes” in step S244), or If the table does not change and the pre-reading determination prohibition period is set ("yes" in step S246), the pre-reading determination is prohibited. When the pre-reading determination is prohibited, “no pre-reading” is set in the special symbol 1 (2) storage pre-reading command.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 78 (A), when the tables for selecting the variation patterns are different (“yes” in step S244), specifically, the probability state at the time of the start winning is the probability at the start of the variation. The state may be different from the state, or the time saving state at the time of the start winning may become a non-time saving state at the start of the change, and the like. This indicates that (number of games) falls within four times. In this case, the prefetch determination is prohibited regardless of the type of the special symbol.

  Also, when the period is the pre-reading determination prohibition period (“yes” in step S246), the game state when the game ball is awarded to the upper starting port (special figure 1 starting port) 2101 is the time saving state or the operation of the condition device. This shows a case where the game state is a big hitting game state, or a case where the game state when the lower starting port (special figure 2 starting port) 2102 wins a game ball is a non-time saving state or a big hitting game state. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, since the game ball winning (occurrence of the special symbol 2 hold) to the lower starting port (special figure 2 starting port) 2102 is limited to the time saving state, the lower starting port (special figure 2). If the game state when the game ball is awarded to the (starting port) 2102 is in a non-time saving state (a state not in a time saving state), the prefetch determination is prohibited. In addition, even if the pre-reading determination is made for the special symbol hold generated during the big hit game, the special (low) probability state and the non-time saving state are set during the big hit game irrespective of the previous game state. There is a high possibility that the game state is different from the game state when the hold is exhausted (the game state after the big hit game), and there is a concern that the accuracy of the prefetch determination may be reduced. For this reason, even when the gaming state to the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102 when a game ball is won (when a special symbol is held) is a big hit game, the prefetch determination is prohibited.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (B), when the state A shifts to the state B triggered by 100 times of the fluctuation digestion, at the timing when the number of times of maintaining the state A (the number of remaining fluctuations) becomes four (97 in the state A). At the time of the start of the second change), the prefetch determination is prohibited. Then, a period from the transition from the state A to the state B is defined as a prefetch determination inhibition period.

  Winning 1 that occurred immediately before the start of the 97th change in the state A is consumed as the 97th change if there is no hold in all of the hold memories 1 to 4, but the hold is stored in the hold memories 1 to 3 areas. If there is, it is stored as the second to fourth hold in the hold storage 2 to 4 areas, respectively. And it is digested as the 98th to 100th variation. If a hold is stored in all of the hold storage areas 1 to 4, an overflow prize is won and not stored.

  In this way, the prize 1 is changed in the state A even when the change is slowly completed. If there is no state transition between the time of winning and the start of change, the pre-read information (big hit determination result, change pattern, etc.) determined at the time of winning is not different from the change information determined at the start of change. However, the prize 2 that occurs after the prize 1, that is, after the start of the 97th change in the state A, may be changed in state between the time of the prize and the start of the change depending on the number of reserved balls at the time of the prize occurrence. . If the number of reserved balls at the time of prize 2 is three and prize 2 is stored as the fourth reserve in the reserved storage 4 area, state A at the time of a prize but state B at the start of fluctuation. Becomes In this case, there is a possibility that the pre-read information determined at the time of winning and the variation information determined at the start of the variation are not the same because the states assumed for various determinations are different. In particular, in the case where the state A is more advantageous for the player than the state B, in spite of the fact that a high expectation effect was performed in the prefetching effect based on the prefetching information, the expectation actually fluctuates with a low degree of expectation, An event may occur that greatly discourages the player.

  Therefore, a period during which a state transition can occur between the time of winning and the start of change depending on the number of balls reserved at the time of winning, that is, from the start of the 97th change in state A to the 100th change, and the state changes from state A to state. The pre-reading is prohibited during the period before shifting to B. In this way, the prefetch effect is not performed when the period until the table for selecting the variation pattern is changed becomes the predetermined period (here, the remaining number of maintenance times of the state is 4 variations). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being reduced due to the execution of the prefetching effect that is excessive (deviation) compared to the actual fluctuation, and it is possible to increase the reliability of the prefetching effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  The state transition includes transition from a high-probability state to a normal probability state by digestion of ST times, transition from a time-saving state to a non-time-saving state by digestion of time-saving times, state transition by an effect mode transition according to the number of times of change, and the like. Can be If it is possible that the table for selecting the variation pattern changes between the winning (the pre-reading) and the start of the variation due to these state transitions, the main control MPU 4100a wins the peripheral control MPU 4150a without performing the pre-reading determination. Only the number of reserved balls of the special symbol corresponding to the starting opening and the information without pre-reading are transmitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a performs such read-ahead prohibition control at the time of state transition, so that, for example, when a power failure occurs during a time-saving state and power is restored, the peripheral control MPU 4150a conventionally knows the number of remaining time-saving times. Since it is not possible, after the power is restored, it becomes possible to execute the forbidden look-ahead effect. Specifically, as described above, the table for selecting the variation pattern differs between the time reduction state and the non-time reduction state. The number of times of change (number of times of reduction) in the time reduction state is counted by the main control MPU 4100a, but the number of times of reduction of number of times is not transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 side. Therefore, when the power is restored, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the information of the time saving state, but cannot grasp the progress status of the time saving state (remaining number of time savings). For this reason, even if an attempt is made to prohibit the prefetching effect when the number of remaining time savings before the state transition from the time saving state to the non-time saving state becomes four or less, the determination cannot be made, and the time saving state ends after power is restored. Until then, I had to prohibit the look-ahead production. On the other hand, in the present invention, the main control MPU 4100a performs read-ahead prohibition control at the time of state transition. The main control MPU 4100a does not perform the prefetching determination when the number of remaining time savings before the state transition from the time saving state to the non-time saving state becomes four or less (a predetermined number of times). It is not transmitted to the control board 4140. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a does not perform a prefetch effect. Thus, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can execute a prefetch effect in the time reduction state in accordance with the command transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a even when the power is restored during the time reduction state and the power is restored. Therefore, the period during which the pre-reading effect is not performed can be reduced, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

  In the description of the fluctuation distribution table information look-ahead command (FIGS. 74 and 77), when the mode value is “03H”, the result of the reach determination is that if the number of reserved balls fluctuates between the time of the pre-read and the time of the fluctuation start. It was mentioned above that the table may be different, ie the table for selecting the variation pattern may be changed. Whether or not there is a possibility that the table for selecting the variation pattern may change according to the result of the reach determination can be determined by the reach determination random number and the upper and lower limit values of the comparison value used for the reach determination. The comparison value is set from the special symbol reach probability data and the number of reserved balls. If the special symbol reach probabilities are determined in advance, these values can be obtained without setting the fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command by prefetch determination. In such a case, before executing the prefetching determination (steps S248 to S280) in the storage prefetching process (FIG. 76), it may be determined whether or not to perform the prefetching. When there is a possibility that either the reach or the non-reach distribution table is selected, the main control MPU 4100a determines that the tables for selecting the variation patterns are different (“yes” in step 244).

  The pachinko machine 1 of the present invention has a configuration in which the special symbol 2 hold is preferentially digested over the special symbol 1 hold, and each of the pachinko machines 1 can hold and store up to four upper limit pieces. Prefetching is prohibited when the remaining number is four or less, but is not limited to this. The number of determination thresholds (here, four times) may be changed according to the specifications applied to the pachinko machine 1. Further, the above-described control that does not execute the special figure prefetch determination performed on the main control board side may be a control that does not perform the special figure prefetch effect on the peripheral control board side described later.

[19-2. Peripheral control board side control (prohibition of special figure prefetching effect)]
Next, a control in which the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140 prohibits the special figure prefetching effect will be described.

  In the above description, the special figure read-ahead prohibition control by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has been described. However, the pre-read prohibition control by the main control MPU 4100a alone is not enough to prevent the occurrence of a problem related to the pre-reading effect. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers power from a power cut, the main control MPU 4100a can grasp the power restoration time information (game backup information), but the peripheral control MPU 4150a cannot. When the suspension is present at the time of the power failure, the main control MPU 4100a transmits information on the number of reserved balls to the peripheral control board 4140. Command contents). Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a cannot execute the look-ahead effect for the suspension at the time of power failure that was in the suspension state at the time of power failure. In addition, the pre-read information for the suspension generated after the power recovery is transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a.

  For example, when the probability state after the power recovery is the high probability state and the suspension at the time of power interruption includes the suspension to become the low probability state, the main control MPU 4100a performs the pre-read determination of the suspension occurring after the power recovery. It is executed in the high-probability state, but the probability state is changed from the high-probability state to the low-probability state by the execution of the change of the corresponding suspension. That is, when the suspension that has occurred after the restoration of the power supply is consumed, the state is a low probability state. Therefore, even if the prefetching effect of the hold that occurred after the power restoration is a high expectation effect, the variable effect of the hold may be an unusual effect, which significantly disappoints the player's expectation. There is a possibility that the interest may be reduced.

  Therefore, in the first modification, the peripheral control MPU 4150a prohibits the prefetching effect even after receiving the special figure prefetching command until the predetermined number of times (eight times) of the change is started after the power is turned on including the time of the power recovery. The predetermined number is the upper limit of the number of special symbols 1 and the number of special symbols 2 held. Further, as described above, the prefetch effect is also prohibited when the mode value of the received prefetch variation distribution table information command is “03H”. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 79 and FIG. 80, the prefetch effect prohibition control by the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the first modification will be described.

  Further, as a second modification, if there is an unknown hold at power-on (hold at power interruption), the peripheral control MPU 4150a prohibits the prefetch effect even if it receives the special figure prefetch command until the unknown hold is exhausted. I do. Further, in the second modification, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives not only the game state but also the special pattern 1 (2) storage prefetch command at the time of prefetching of "no prefetching", the suspension of the command is treated as unknown suspension, and similarly, In this case, the look-ahead effect is prohibited until the unknown reservation is exhausted. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 81 to FIG. 84, the prefetch effect prohibition control by the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the second modification will be described.

[19-2-1. Modification Example 1 (Read-Ahead of Predetermined Number of Variations at Power-on)
First, a first modification will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a received command analysis process according to the first modification. Note that the same processes as those of the above-described received command analysis process (FIG. 48) are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 80 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a prefetch prohibition count process in the received command analysis process according to the first modification.

  As described above, in the received command analysis processing, the peripheral control MPU 4150a stores various commands from the main control board 4100 in the received command storage area 4150cac (peripheral control unit receiving ring buffer) of the peripheral control RAM 4150c provided in the peripheral control board 4140. Remember. Then, the command with the earliest reception order from the main control board 4100 is read from the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer (step S1402), and processing according to the read command is executed.

  In the first modification, when the read command is the power-on state command (Yes in step S1421), the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets a post-input eight-variation prefetch prohibition flag and a flag corresponding to other commands ( Step S1422) ends the received command analysis processing. After the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, first, when the power of the main control board 4100 is turned on, the main control MPU 4100a transmits to the peripheral control board 4140 various commands corresponding to the game backup information (instruction of start of production and game state). Therefore, after the power is turned on, the first command received by the peripheral control board 4140 is the power-on state command.

  If the read command is a special figure variation pattern command (Yes in step S1403), the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a prefetch inhibition count process (step S1430). After that, the special figure variation pattern command is stored in the variation display pattern storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140, the variation pattern reception flag is set (step S1404), and the reception command analysis processing ends.

  Here, the prefetch inhibition count processing will be described with reference to FIG. The pre-reading prohibition count process is a process for setting whether or not the special symbol fluctuation display game has been started to be executed eight times after the power is turned on, even when receiving a special figure pre-reading command.

  First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the post-insertion 8-fluctuation prefetch prohibition flag is set (step S1431). If the flag is set (Yes in step S1431), “8” is set to the subtraction type prefetch inhibition count provided in the peripheral control RAM 4150c (step S1432). Thereafter, the post-insertion 8 variable prefetch prohibition flag is released (step S1433). Thus, at the start of the first special symbol variation display game after the power is turned on, the setting of the pre-read prohibition count is completed.

  If the post-insertion 8 variable prefetch prohibition flag has not been set (No in step S1431), the peripheral control MPU 4150a proceeds to the process in step S1434 described below.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the prefetch inhibition count is “0” (Step S1434). If the prefetch prohibition count is not “0” (No in step S1434), the prefetch prohibition count is updated by subtracting 1 (step S1435), and the prefetch prohibition count process ends. On the other hand, if the prefetch inhibition count is “0” (Yes in step S1434), the prefetch inhibition count processing ends.

  The description will be given along the passage of time. After the power is turned on, the process of Yes → Step S1432 → Step S1433 is executed at the start of the first change in step S1431, and a prefetch inhibition count for counting the number of changes after the power is turned on is set. Thereafter, in step S1434, No → the processing of step S1435 is executed, and the prefetch inhibition count becomes “7”. Thereafter, at the start of the second variation, the processing of No in step S1431 → No in step S1434 → the processing of step S1435 is executed, and the prefetch inhibition count becomes “6”. The same processing is repeated at the start of the third to eighth fluctuations, and the prefetch inhibition count becomes “0” at the start of the eighth fluctuation. Therefore, when the fluctuation starts thereafter, the process of No in step S1431 and the process of Yes in step S1434 are repeated.

  As described above, in the prefetch prohibition count process, the value of the prefetch prohibition count is associated with the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on so as to be linked with each other, so that it is possible to determine whether the state is the prefetch prohibition state from the value of the prefetch prohibition count. .

  It returns to FIG. The peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether the read command is a special figure pre-reading production command (a pre-reading special pre-reading special symbol 1 (2) storage pre-reading command, a pre-reading pattern type pre-reading command, a pre-reading variable pattern pre-reading command, a pre-reading variable pattern pre-reading command). If it is a pre-reading variation distribution table information command (Yes in step S1407), the special figure pre-reading production command has an ambiguous command (reach or non-reach distribution table) of status value “69H” and mode value “03H”. Is determined (step S1441). If the ambiguous command has been received (Yes in step S1441), the pre-reading effect is not executed, and the received command analysis process ends.

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control MPU 4150a has not received the ambiguous command, that is, if it has received the pre-reading variation distribution table information command of another mode value (No in step S1441), the pre-reading prohibition count is not counted. It is determined whether it is “0” (step S1442). If the prefetch prohibition count is not “0” (No in step S1442), the fluctuation has not been started eight times after the power is turned on (prefetch prohibition state), so that the prefetch effect is not executed. Therefore, the received command analysis processing ends.

  When the prefetch inhibition count is “0” (Yes in step S1442), the peripheral control MPU 4150a instructs the execution of the prefetch effect because the start of the change eight times after the power is turned on has been completed. The figure prefetch effect execution flag is set (step S1408), and the received command analysis processing ends. When the special figure prefetching effect execution flag is set, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the special figure prefetching effect in the special figure prefetching effect control process (step S1027, FIG. 66) executed in the peripheral control unit regular process (FIG. 42). Make the necessary settings to perform

  As described above, in the prefetch effect prohibition control according to the first modification, the prefetch effect is not performed until the predetermined number of times of change, which is the suspension upper limit number, is executed after the power is turned on. For this reason, the suspension at the time of the power failure does not affect the prefetch effect of the suspension occurring after the power restoration. Therefore, it is possible to solve the above-mentioned problem, to suppress a decrease in interest in the game, and to provide an appropriate look-ahead effect. In addition, since the predetermined number of times is set as the total upper limit number of the special symbol 1 hold and the special symbol 2 hold, the look-ahead effect can be permitted after the hold at the time of the power interruption is surely exhausted (change start).

  Note that the prefetch effect prohibition control is always performed after the power is turned on, but the above-described problem occurs when the power is turned on due to the power recovery from the power failure. It does not occur at the time of normal power-on such as executing the RAM clear on the main control board 4100. The main control board 4100 sends a command that distinguishes both, but the peripheral control board 4140 does not distinguish between the two in order to simplify the processing. However, prohibiting the pre-reading effect until the time of clearing the RAM where no problem occurs may also cause a decrease in the interest of the game. Therefore, the peripheral control board 4140 may determine whether or not the RAM is being cleared, and if the RAM is being cleared, a prefetch effect may be permitted. By canceling the unnecessary look-ahead effect prohibition in this way, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game and to provide an appropriate look-ahead effect.

  For example, when the probability state after the power recovery is the high probability state and the suspension at the time of power interruption includes the suspension to become the low probability state, the main control MPU 4100a performs the pre-read determination of the suspension occurring after the power recovery. It is executed in the high-probability state, but the probability state is changed from the high-probability state to the low-probability state by the execution of the change of the corresponding suspension. That is, when the suspension that has occurred after the restoration of the power supply is consumed, the state is a low probability state. Therefore, even if the prefetching effect of the hold that occurred after the power restoration is a high expectation effect, the variable effect of the hold may be an unusual effect, which significantly disappoints the player's expectation. There is a possibility that the interest may be reduced.

[19-2-2. Modification 2 (read-ahead prohibited until unknown pending digestion)]
Next, Modification 2 will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a received command analysis process according to the second modification. Note that the same processes as those of the received command analysis process of the first modification (FIG. 79) are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 82 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the input unknown flag setting process in the received command analysis process according to the second modification. FIG. 83 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the unknown count process in the received command analysis process according to the second modification. FIG. 84 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special figure prefetch execution determination processing in the received command analysis processing according to the second modification.

  As described above, in the second modification, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs the pre-reading special symbol 1 (2) storage pre-reading without pre-reading from the main control board 4100 together with the power-on hold (power-off hold) of the first modification. The hold when the command is received is treated as “unknown hold” in which the look-ahead information for executing the look-ahead effect is unknown. Then, the prefetching effect is prohibited until the unknown reservation is exhausted.

  With reference to FIG. 81, the received command analysis processing of the second modification will be described. First, when the command read in the process of step S1402 is the power-on state command (Yes in step S1421), the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets a read-ahead prohibition (unknown flag) due to unknown suspension setting. The processing is executed (step S1450). Thereafter, a flag corresponding to the other command is set (step S1423), and the received command analysis processing ends.

  Here, the closing unknown flag setting process (step S1450) will be described with reference to FIG. First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a stores the special figure 1 reserved number (unknown reserved number) and the special 2 reserved number (unknown reserved number) in the subtraction method extra 1 unknown count and extra 2 unknown count provided for each special symbol in the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Is set (step S1451). In the case of power recovery after power failure, the number of suspensions at power failure is set as power recovery information (backup game information).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether the set special unknown count is “0” (Step S1452). When the special 1 unknown count is not “0” (No in step S1452), a special 1 unknown flag indicating prohibition of prefetching effect of special 1 reservation is set (step S1453), and the process proceeds to step S1454. I do. On the other hand, if the special 1 unknown count is “0” (Yes in step S1452), it means that there is no special 1 unknown hold at the time of power failure, or that it is an initial start, not a power recovery. Therefore, the process shifts to the step S1454 without setting the flag.

  Similarly, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the set special unknown count is “0” (Step S1454). If the special 2 unknown count is not “0” (No in step S 1454), a special 2 unknown flag indicating prohibition of the pre-reading effect of special 2 suspension is set (step S 1455), and the input unknown flag setting process is performed. To end. On the other hand, if the special 2 unknown count is “0” (Yes in step S1454), it means that there is no special 2 unknown hold at the time of power supply, or that it is an initial start, not a power recovery. Therefore, the flag is not set and the closing unknown flag setting process ends.

  As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the pre-reading effect prohibition setting (unknown flag set) is performed for each special symbol based on the presence or absence of the unknown suspension according to the state at the time of turning on. Specifically, when there is a suspension at the time of a power failure, a look-ahead effect prohibition setting of a special symbol to be held at the time of the power failure is performed.

  Referring back to FIG.

  Next, when the command read in the process of step S1402 is a special figure variation pattern command (Yes in step S1403), the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes an unknown count process (step S1460). After that, the special figure variation pattern command is stored in the variation display pattern storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140, the variation pattern reception flag is set (step S1404), and the reception command analysis processing ends.

  Here, the unknown count process (step S1460) will be described with reference to FIG. The unknown count process is a process of determining whether to cancel prohibition of read-ahead by clearing an unknown suspension (clearing an unknown flag). More specifically, the unknown count of the special symbol to be changed is subtracted, and the digestion determination of unknown reservation (release determination of prohibition effect prohibition) is performed. .

  First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the unknown flag of the special symbol to be changed is set (step S1461). If the unknown flag of the target special map is not set (No in step S1461), the unknown count process ends.

  On the other hand, if the unknown flag of the target special map is set (Yes in step S1461), the peripheral control MPU 4150a updates the unknown count of the target special map by 1 (step S1462), and updates the target special map. It is determined whether the unknown count in the figure is “0” (step S1463). If the unknown count is not “0” (No in step S1463), the unknown count process ends. On the other hand, if the unknown count is “0” (Yes in step S1463), the unknown flag of the target special map is cleared (step S1464), and the unknown count process ends.

  As described above, in the unknown count process, the unknown count value and the number of fluctuations until the unknown hold is exhausted (the number of balls held when receiving the unknown hold information) are linked and linked, and the unknown count indicating the presence or absence of the unknown hold is linked. When the value of “.” Becomes “0”, the unknown flag is released. This makes it possible to determine from the state of the unknown flag whether or not the read-ahead is prohibited, and to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect of the hold that has occurred, in the to-be-examined figure pre-read execution determination process (step S1470 in FIG. 81, FIG. 84) described later. To be able to.

  Referring back to FIG.

  By the way, in the second modification, not only the suspension at the time of power interruption but also the suspension when the pre-reading special symbol 1 (2) storage pre-read command without pre-reading is received from the main control board 4100 is treated as “unknown suspension”. Therefore, the setting of the unknown flag due to the occurrence of the unknown suspension (pre-reading effect prohibition setting) is performed not only at the time of power-on but also at the time of power-on (the game ball prize winning in the upper starting port 2101 and the lower starting port 2102). This is also performed when a command is received.

  If the command read in the processing of step S1402 is the prefetch special symbol 1 (2) storage prefetch command indicating the number of balls to be retained at the time of the start opening winning and the presence or absence of the prefetch information of the generated suspension, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines ( In step S1469, a special figure prefetch execution determination process is executed (step S1470). In the special figure pre-reading execution determination process, the setting of an unknown flag for each special symbol (pre-reading effect prohibition setting) according to the presence or absence of the pre-reading information of the received command, and the execution of the pre-reading effect according to the state of the pre-reading information and the unknown flag Set flags.

  Here, the details of the special figure prefetch execution determination processing will be described with reference to FIG. First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the received prefetch special symbol 1 (2) storage prefetch command is a command for the special symbol 1 (step S1471). If the command is the special symbol 1 (Yes in step S1471), it is determined whether or not the command is "pre-read" (step S1472a). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the head of the mode value of the received pre-read special symbol 1 storage pre-read command is “1”.

  If the received pre-read special symbol 1 storage pre-read command is not “pre-read” (No in step S1472a), the peripheral control MPU 4150a reads other pre-read commands (pre-read symbol type pre-read command, pre-read variation pattern). Since the pre-reading command, the pre-reading fluctuation type pre-reading command, and the pre-reading fluctuation distribution table information command) are unknown pending that are not transmitted from the main control board 4100, the special 1 unknown flag for prohibiting the special 1 pre-reading effect is set (step S1473a). At this time, the number of reserved balls in the special symbol 1 storage prefetch command at prefetching is set to the special 1 unknown count (step S1474a), and the special figure prefetch execution determination processing ends. If the special 1 unknown flag has already been set, the setting state is confirmed in the processing of step S1473a, and the processing of rewriting the value of the special 1 unknown count to a new value of the number of reserved balls in the processing of step S1474a. Do. It is always updated so that the digestion of the new unknown pending in the memory order becomes the condition for canceling the look-ahead production prohibition.

  On the other hand, if the received prefetch special pattern 1 storage prefetch command is “prefetch available” (Yes in step S1472a), the peripheral control MPU 4150a transmits another prefetch command from the main control board 4100. Then, it is determined whether or not “6903H” (ambiguous command) has been received as the pre-reading fluctuation distribution table information command (step S1475a). This is the same as the process in step S1441 of the received command analysis process (FIG. 79) of the first modification. If an ambiguous command has been received, that is, if a pre-reading variation distribution table information command of “6903H” has been received (Yes in step S1475a), the special figure pre-reading execution determination process ends.

  If the peripheral control MPU 4150a has not received the ambiguous command, that is, has received the pre-reading variation distribution table information command of a mode value other than “03H” (No in step S1475a), It is determined whether the 1 unknown flag is set (step S1476a). If the special 1 unknown flag is set (Yes in step S1476a), the special 1 prefetch effect execution is prohibited, and the special figure prefetch execution determination processing ends.

  When the special 1 unknown flag is not set (No in step S1476a), the peripheral control MPU 4150a is in the process of permitting execution of the special 1 prefetching effect, so the special figure prefetching effect of instructing execution of the special 1 prefetching effect is performed. The flag is set (step S1377a), and the special figure prefetch execution determination processing ends. When the special figure prefetching effect execution flag is set, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the special figure prefetching effect in the special figure prefetching effect control process (step S1027, FIG. 66) executed in the peripheral control unit regular process (FIG. 42). Make the necessary settings to perform

  In the process of step S1471, if the received prefetch special symbol 1 (2) storage prefetch command is not for the special symbol 1, that is, the command is for the special symbol 2 (No in step S1471). The processing of steps S1472b to S1277b to be executed is the same as the processing of steps S1472a to S1777a for the special symbol 1 described above, except that the target is changed to the special symbol 2.

  In the special figure pre-reading execution determination process, when the pre-reading special pattern 1 (2) storage pre-reading command without pre-reading is received, the unknown flag of the special pattern of interest is set, and the target unspecified flag is set until the corresponding unknown pending is exhausted. Prohibit the prefetching of special symbols. Therefore, even if the pre-reading special symbol at pre-reading 1 (2) storage pre-fetch command is received, the pre-reading effect is not executed while the unknown flag of the target special symbol is set. Also, when the received prefetching fluctuation distribution table information command is an ambiguous command, the prefetching effect is not executed.

  As described above, in the prefetch effect prohibition control according to the second modification, the suspension at the time of power failure received as power restoration information when the power is turned on is set to “unknown suspension”, and even if the power is restored, the prefetch effect is not performed. In addition, when there is an unknown hold (that is, when there is a hold for which the pre-reading information (specific game information) is not transmitted and the peripheral control MPU 4150a cannot specify the pre-reading determination result), the special symbol to be processed until the unknown hold is exhausted. Does not perform a look-ahead effect. Then, if the unknown reservation is exhausted, the prefetching effect is permitted. For this reason, the suspension at the time of power interruption (unknown suspension) does not affect the pre-reading effect after the power is restored. Further, since the prohibition period of the pre-reading effect is set for each special symbol according to the number of unknown reservations, more appropriate pre-reading effect prohibition control can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a pre-reading effect and a decrease in interest in the game.

  Also, when a prefetched special symbol 1 (2) storage prefetch command without prefetching is received from the main control board 4100, the corresponding hold is set to “unknown hold”, and the prefetch in the target special symbol until the unknown hold is exhausted. Since the effect is prohibited, by executing the pre-reading effect prohibition control together with the pre-reading judgment prohibiting control at the time of the state transition by the main control board 4100, a more appropriate pre-reading effect can be provided to the player. For example, when shifting from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state at the time of the above-described state shift, if the number of times the time-saving state is maintained becomes four or less remaining, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits the prefetch determination. For this reason, the special symbol 2 suspension generated during the prefetch determination prohibition period is not prefetched, and is recognized as unknown suspension by the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Therefore, until the special symbol 2 suspension (upper limit of four) generated during the time-saving state with the remaining four fluctuations is exhausted, the pre-reading effect in the special symbol 2 is prohibited in the non-hour-saving state after the state transition. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 of the special symbol 2 preferential digestion, after the state shift, the special symbol 2 of unknown reservation is digested before the special symbol 1. In this way, the hold that occurred during the four changes immediately before the transition state is not set as the target of the prefetch determination on the main control board 4100 side, and the peripheral control board 4140 also receives the hold that can be prefetched until the hold is exhausted. Also, by not making the target of the prefetching effect, the execution of the prefetching effect during a period in which a malfunction is likely to occur can be surely prohibited. Note that the hold that occurs in the non-time saving state after the state transition is mainly the special symbol 1 hold. At this time, since the prefetch effect prohibition control is executed for each special symbol, it is for the special symbol 2 suspension. Therefore, the execution of the prefetching effect on the special symbol 1 side in the non-time saving state is not prevented.

  Further, in the second modification, the look-ahead effect prohibition control for the unknown hold other than the hold at the time of power interruption is performed at a timing when the number of holds changes. Specifically, the pre-reading effect prohibition is started at the timing of receiving a pre-reading special symbol 1 (2) stored pre-reading command (unknown command) without pre-reading, and the unknown hold corresponding to the unknown command is exhausted and the fluctuation start is started. It is released at the timing of performing. In this manner, when an unknown hold occurs in the hold storage area, the look-ahead effect is prohibited, and at the same time as the last unknown hold is consumed, the look-ahead effect is permitted. Therefore, more accurate pre-reading effect prohibition control can be executed, and the pre-reading effect and a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed.

  Further, as described in the first modification, the pre-reading effect prohibition control at the time of turning on the power may not be performed when the RAM is cleared. In this case, a judgment process for confirming the reception of the RAM clear command is added before the process of S1451 in the above-described insertion time unknown flag setting process (FIG. 82). The process of setting the unknown flag at the time of closing may be ended without executing the process of (1). Normally, the peripheral control board 4140 receives the RAM clear command, but does not read it from the received command storage area 4150 cac in order to share the control when the RAM is cleared and when the power is turned on. In this way, by controlling to permit the prefetching effect when the RAM is cleared, unnecessary prohibition effecting prohibition can be eliminated, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game and providing an appropriate prefetching effect. .

  In the first and second modified examples, an ambiguous command (a pre-reading fluctuation distribution table information command with a mode value “03H” indicating a reach or non-reach distribution table) is received for the occurrence of a pre-ready hold. If it is, it is not a target of the prefetching effect, but it is not limited to this. For example, in the second modification, the prefetch effect may be prohibited when a non-specific hit (small hit) is held in the high probability state. Specifically, in the above-described special figure prefetch execution determination processing (FIG. 84), when a special pattern 1 storage prefetch command at prefetch with prefetch is received (Yes in step S1472a), a small hit (mode value “50H )), A process of determining whether or not the symbol type look-ahead command (status value “66H”) has been received, and a process of determining whether or not the current probability state is the high probability state when received. When the command is received and the command is received and the state is in the high probability state, the processes in steps S1473a and S1474a may be performed. Here, at the stage of pre-reading, the small hit type information is not transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140. The small hit types include those that return the high probability state to the low probability state (normal probability state). If the pre-reading effect is performed even after a small hit holding that induces the transition to the low probability state occurs, it occurs after the small hit holding and a big hit determination occurs at the time of pre-reading in the high probability state. At the start of the change in the low probability state in which the suspension has been triggered by the small hit, an event of determining a deviation may occur. At this time, if a winning determination effect is performed in the look-ahead effect, the actual fluctuation result (outlier) not only remarkably discourages the player's expectation but also may cause a distrust of the game effect. Therefore, even if the prefetch command with prefetch is received, if the symbol type prefetch command “6650H” of the small hit is received in the high probability state, at the start of the fluctuation that the result of the small hit is determined (holding digestion) Prohibition of pre-reading production until). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being reduced and the player to be distrusted with the effect due to the execution of the excessive (wrong) prefetching effect with respect to the actual fluctuation result, and the prefetching effect. Reliability can be increased.

[19-2-3. At the start of the big hit game (pre-read information clear)]
By the way, the hold that occurs during the big hit is prohibited because the main control MPU 4100a does not perform the prefetch determination, but the prefetch effect is prohibited. However, the hold that has already occurred and stored at the start of the big hit depends on the game state at the time of occurrence. The peripheral control MPU 4150a can perform a prefetch effect by having prefetch information by the prefetch determination. However, since the game state after the jackpot that has been used up at the start of the big hit (change start) may be different from the game state at the time of the pre-reading determination (the change pattern table is different), the hold at the start of the big hit is On the other hand, there is a possibility that an appropriate look-ahead effect may not be obtained. Thus, the peripheral control MPU 4150a holds the hold information of the prefetch command received from the main control board 4100 for the hold at the start of the big hit, and clears the prefetch effect information set based on the hold information at the start of the big hit. In this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem in which an appropriate prefetch effect is not performed. Hereinafter, the control processing by the peripheral control MPU 4150a will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit display process. The big hit display process is a process (step S1700) executed in the above-described effect control process (FIG. 49).

  First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a jackpot opening display process according to the jackpot start command (step S1710). Next, a display indicating that the big winning opening 2003 is opened is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and a big hit display process for performing a display effect (for example, a round display or the like) during the big hit game state is executed (step). S1720). After that, a big hit ending display process for performing an end effect of the big hit gaming state is executed (step S1730), and after the process selection flag is updated to “0” (step S1740), the big hit display process is ended.

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit opening display process. The big hit opening display process is a process (step S1710) executed in the above big hit display process (FIG. 85).

  First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the start flag is set (Step S1711). The start flag is a flag that is set when the jackpot opening command transmitted from the main control board 4100 is received in the processing of step S1411 of the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 48). If the start flag has not been set (No in step S1711), the big hit opening display process ends.

  On the other hand, when the start flag is set (Yes in step S1711), the peripheral control MPU 4150a reads the effect information (pre-operation) corresponding to the prefetch command from the schedule data storage area 4150cae (predetermined storage area) in the peripheral control RAM 4150c. The notification mode is cleared (step S1712). The schedule data storage area 4150cae is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the command received from the main control board 4100 are set. The peripheral control MPU 4150a is based on the effect information stored in the schedule data storage area 4150cae. Production control is performed. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the pre-reading effect information (advance notification mode) in a predetermined storage area to be identifiable (advance notification mode identifiable setting means) and the pre-notification mode on condition that the jackpot game is executed. It also has a function of setting to be unspecified (preliminary notification mode unspecified setting means). The effect information that is cleared here is set based on the effect mode and the effect pattern selection table when the prefetch command is received.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the effect information corresponding to the look-ahead command in the schedule data storage area 4150cae again based on the effect mode and the effect pattern selection table that are switched and set in response to the current big hit (step S1713). .

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a clears the start flag (step S1714), executes a display setting process for setting an opening display such as a fanfare effect (step S1715), and ends the big hit opening display process. Thereafter, when the big hit symbol display command transmitted from the main control board 4100 is received when the big winning port 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened, the next big hit display process (step S1720 in FIG. 85) is executed.

  As described above, in the big hit opening display processing, the effect display indicating the start of the big hit is performed, and the prefetch effect information of the hold stored at the start of the big hit is changed from the game state at the time of the occurrence of the hold to the big hit game state. Is rewritten. Specifically, for example, the peripheral control MPU 4150a deletes the prefetch effect information selected under the normal probability state at the time of occurrence of the hold, and re-reads the prefetch effect information under the high probability state that can be switched at the opportunity of the big hit. Select again. The target of the effect information clearing process in step S1712 is the look-ahead effect information, and the hold information of the look-ahead command received from the main control board 4100 (the number of reserved balls, the presence / absence of the look-ahead, the symbol type, the variation pattern, the variation type) , Distribution table), it is possible to reset the effect information based on the suspension information in the effect information setting process in the next step S1713. Note that the timing of resetting is not limited to the start of the big hit. For example, it is sufficient that the setting is reset before the jackpot round finalizing effect. This makes it possible to execute a prefetching effect appropriate for the situation with respect to the suspension at the start of the big hit, and to suppress a decrease in the prefetching effect and the interest of the game.

  The target of the above-described effect information clearing process (step S1712) is not limited to the hold stored at the start of the big hit. Even when a special symbol 1 (2) memory prefetch command with prefetch with a prefetch is received from the main control board 4100 and other prefetch commands are received, an abnormal change in the number of reservations (the last reception When the number of pieces of hold information of the current reception is increased to four even though the number information is 0, the hold effect information stored at this time may be cleared. If an abnormality determination condition is provided and the hold stored when the condition is satisfied is targeted for the effect information clearing process (step S1712), it is possible to prevent in advance the problem of the look-ahead effect for the hold, and to ensure proper look-ahead. It leads to the provision of directing.

  Note that the above-described control that does not execute the special figure prefetch effect performed on the peripheral control board side may be control that does not perform the special figure prefetch determination on the main control board side.

[20. Transition to production mode]
By the way, in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 48, FIG. 79, FIG. 81), when the command read in the processing of step S1402 is a special figure change pattern command (Yes in step S1403), step S1404 The variation pattern reception flag is set in the processing of (1). Then, when the variation pattern reception flag is set, a decoration symbol variation start process (FIG. 52) for starting a special figure tuning effect including the variation display of the decoration symbol is performed. Then, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, based on the effect mode corresponding to the game state among the plurality, the effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern and the hit information received from the main control board 4100 (stop design of decorative symbol, type of reach effect, The determination of whether or not to execute a notice effect, a notice effect mode, the presence or absence of an extended effect, etc.) are determined, and the effect of the effect pattern is executed as a special figure synchronized effect.

  Specifically, with reference to FIG. 87, an example of the effect transition in the probable change time saving state in which the number of time savings is given 64 will be described. FIG. 87 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect transition in the probable change working hours state. When the game state enters the probable changing time saving state, the special figure synchronizing effect (time saving time effect) of the specific A effect mode is executed from 1 to 30 times of time saving, and the special figure of the specific B effect mode after 31 times of the time saving time. Synchronized production (probable change confirmation production) is executed. In the special figure synchronizing production in the specific A production mode, a continuous production is performed to determine whether or not the time reduction state is continued in fluctuations in which the number of time savings is 10, 20, or 30, and a normal production is performed in other fluctuations. Is done.

  At this time, the main control MPU 4100a manages the number of time savings, and sets a variation pattern (a normal effect pattern, a continuous effect pattern, and a certain variation confirmation effect pattern) according to the number of time savings in the variation pattern command. Specifically, the main control MPU 4100a first selects one table from a plurality of tables according to the number of times of saving time (the number of times of executing the lottery game in the time saving state). At this time, the table to be selected differs depending on the number of times saved. Then, a variation pattern (game pattern) corresponding to the lottery game is selected from the selected table. As shown in FIG. 87, the variation patterns of 1 to 9 times, 11 to 19 times, and 21 to 29 times in the probability change time reduction state are selected from a table in which a normal effect pattern is set, and the number of times of time reduction is 10 times. , 20 times and 30 times are selected from the table in which the continuous effect pattern is set, and the change patterns after 31 time reductions are selected from the table in which the probable change confirmed effect pattern is set. The continuous effect pattern includes a successful effect pattern in which the time-saving state continues and a failure effect pattern in which the time-saving state ends. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can determine and execute an effect corresponding to the number of time savings (number of times of variation) by following the received variation pattern even if the peripheral control MPU 4150a does not manage the number of times of time saving (number of times of variation). Thereby, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can execute an appropriate effect at the time of power restoration even if data on the peripheral control board 4140 side is cleared, such as at the time of power failure. The effect mode of each effect differs depending on the effect mode set by the peripheral control MPU 4150a. In FIG. 87, the peripheral control MPU 4150a selects the effect mode in the specific A effect mode when the number of times of saving is 1 to 30, and selects the effect mode in the specific B effect mode after the number of times of saving 31.

  In the following, with reference to FIG. 88, a description will be given of the effect mode transition processing in which not only the effect determination but also the effect mode transition are executed based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a.

  FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect mode transition process executed by the peripheral control MPU 450a. The effect mode transition process is executed, for example, when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 4100 at the start of variation is received in the above-described decorative symbol variation start process (FIG. 46). The transition of the effect mode is exemplified by the transition from the specific A effect mode of FIG. 87 to the specific B effect mode.

  First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the effect mode is the specific A effect mode (step S1751). Here, the specific A effect mode is a time saving state, in which a continuous effect (success or failure) is executed at a predetermined number of times, and the continuous success effect is executed three times. This is a production mode. If the current mode is not the specific A effect mode (No in step S1751), the peripheral control MPU 4150a ends the effect mode transition process.

  If the current mode is the specific A effect mode (Yes in step S1751), the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives a success command (variation pattern command) indicating a successful effect pattern among the continuous effect patterns from the main control board 4100. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (step S1752). If the success command has not been received (No in step S1752), the effect mode transition processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the success command (Yes in Step S1752), the peripheral control MPU 4150a adds 1 to the count of the number of successes and updates it (Step S1753). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of successes after the update is three (step S1754). If the number of successes is not three (No in step S1754), the effect mode transition processing ends. If the number of successes is 3 (Yes in step S1754), the effect mode is shifted from the special A effect mode to the special B effect mode (step S1755). After that, the effect mode transition processing ends. Note that the count of the number of successes can be added during the special A effect mode, and is cleared when the special A effect mode ends.

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a switches the effect mode when receiving the specific change pattern command a predetermined number of times from the main control MPU 4100a, and in response to the change pattern command received from the main control MPU 4100a, the specific game state (here, ), It is possible to appropriately determine the transition effects (normal effects, continuous success effects, and continuation failure effects) in a series of effect modes (specific A effect modes) without knowing the number of times of change. The peripheral control MPU 4150a can determine an appropriate effect based on a command received from the main control board 4100 side where the game information is always backed up. It is possible to execute the appropriate effect at the time of electricity.

[21. Switching control of special figure prefetching effect]
In this case, if a start memory with a high expectation of a big hit is newly generated during the execution of the special figure look-ahead effect, the previously executed special figure look-ahead effect is newly added to the newly generated start memory. The control for switching (overwriting) to the special figure look-ahead effect based on is described. Note that description of contents overlapping with the above description is omitted.

[21-1. Control on main control board side (switch control of special figure prefetching effect)
As described in the memory look-ahead process (FIG. 24), in the present embodiment, a command (special symbol) required to execute the special figure look-ahead effect is not a pre-read determination prohibition period when a game ball is started and won. Command for specifying the number of hold, special figure variation pattern command, etc.). Even in the case of performing the switching control of the special figure pre-reading effect, similar to the storage pre-reading process shown in FIG. Judgment is performed, and a command necessary for execution of the special figure prefetch effect is generated and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. In this way, the main control board 4100 constitutes the first look-ahead determining means for first determining whether or not to execute the special figure look-ahead effect after the start winning.

[21-2. Control on peripheral control board side (switch control of special figure prefetching effect)]
When the peripheral control board 4140 receives the command for executing the special figure prefetch effect from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control board 4140 executes the special figure prefetch effect based on the content of the command and the execution state of the special figure prefetch effect.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in addition to the special figure look-ahead effect that suggests a start-up memory with a high expectation, such as the normal look-ahead effect that changes the hold display, the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is also displayed. Special figure look-ahead effects such as changing the background (background look-ahead effect) and causing a character to appear independently of the effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (a character look-ahead effect) can be executed. The background look-ahead effect does not have to execute the effect by explicitly indicating a specific hold display, and one of the currently held start memories (which may include the start memory being executed) has a high expectation of a big hit. May be indicated. In the present embodiment, a look-ahead effect that changes the hold display of the look-ahead target (normal look-ahead effect, continuous look-ahead effect, and “hold-ahead look-ahead effect” together) and a background look-ahead effect that changes the background are executed. An example of the background prefetch effect will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Subsequently, control by the peripheral control board 4140 for executing the special figure prefetch effect will be described. Specifically, a special figure prefetch effect setting process for setting a special figure prefetch effect is described. Other processes are the same as those described above.

[21-2-1. Special figure pre-reading effect control processing (switch control of special figure pre-reading effect)]
FIG. 89 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special figure prefetch effect control process including the control of switching the special figure prefetch effect according to the present embodiment. This process is a process executed in step S1027 of the peripheral control unit regular process in the peripheral control unit power-on process (FIG. 42), similarly to the special figure pre-reading effect control process shown in FIG.

  In the special figure look-ahead effect control process including the control of the special figure look-ahead effect, the process for executing the normal look-ahead effect that changes the hold display shown in FIG. 66 and the display mode of the hold display for each variable display can be changed. In addition to the process for determining whether or not to execute a continuous prefetching effect, a process for executing a background prefetching effect is included. In the process for executing the background look-ahead effect, it is possible to switch (overwrite) the background look-ahead effect executed in advance to the background look-ahead effect based on the newly generated start memory. Hereinafter, a specific procedure will be described, but a description of a process common to the flowchart illustrated in FIG. 66 will be appropriately omitted.

  The effect control program first determines whether or not the special figure prefetching effect execution flag is set (step S2001). As described above, when a prefetch effect command is received from the main control board 4100, the special figure prefetch effect execution flag is set in the received command analysis process (step S1022 in FIG. 42) (step S1408 in FIG. 48). If the special figure prefetch effect execution flag is not set (the result of step S2001 is “No”), the special figure prefetch effect control process ends because the special figure prefetch effect is not executed.

  On the other hand, if the special figure prefetch effect execution flag is set (result of step S2001 is “Yes”), the effect control program performs the prefetch based on the content of the prefetch effect command corresponding to the start memory of the prefetch target. The type and mode of the effect are selected (step S2020). Specifically, either a normal look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the hold display of the start memory or a background look-ahead effect that changes the background of the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is selected, and the selected feature is selected. The effect form of the figure look-ahead effect is determined.

  Next, the effect control program determines whether or not the normal prefetch effect has been selected (step S2021). When the normal prefetch effect is selected (the result of step S2021 is “Yes”), the processing after step S2005 is executed. The processing after step S2005 is as described with reference to FIG. Note that the timing for clearing the special figure prefetching effect execution flag is different from the processing shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, if the normal look-ahead effect is not selected (the result of step S2021 is “No”), that is, if the background look-ahead effect is selected, the effect control program determines whether to actually execute the background look-ahead effect. Is determined (step S2022). Whether or not the background prefetch effect is actually executed is determined, for example, by determining whether or not the expected degree of the variation pattern corresponding to the starting memory is equal to or higher than a predetermined expected degree. Further, it may be arranged to randomly determine whether or not to execute the prefetching effect according to the degree of expectation, such as making it easier to execute the special figure prefetching effect when the degree of expectation is high.

  Although the special figure pre-reading effect can be basically executed in all the variation patterns, the allocation of the lottery data for determining whether or not the execution is possible is made different depending on the variation pattern. For example, in the case of normal deviation fluctuation, the winning (execution) probability of the reserved look-ahead effect is 1/100 (the deviation is 99/100), whereas in the case of normal reach, it is 25/100 (the deviation is 75/100), and the super reach is obtained. The determination is made based on a lottery table set to be 50/100 (the loss is 50/100) in the case of a loss and 99/100 (the loss is 1/100) in the case of a super reach.

  Further, the actual effect mode (scenario) is determined based on a table in which another scenario table is made to correspond to the number of times of the effect. For example, when the number of productions is two, a table in which a lottery probability is set for each scenario is provided. The effect contents, the number of scenarios, and the lottery probabilities of the scenario selected according to the scenario table are different.

  FIG. 90 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between a scenario in which the color of the hold display changes and the variation pattern when the number of effects of the special figure prefetching effect (holding prefetching effect) is two. Scenarios are, for example, scenario 1 (blue → blue), scenario 2 (blue → green), scenario 3 (blue → red), and scenario 4 (red → gold). It becomes a high special map pre-reading effect. Note that the scenario 4 is set so that the lottery is performed only at the time of the big hit, and is a scenario dedicated to the big hit. Further, the number of continuous productions is not limited to two, but may be three or more, for example, and a table showing a correspondence between a scenario and a variation pattern may be prepared according to the number of continuous productions.

  In the present embodiment, a scenario to be executed is determined based on a table in which scenario lottery probabilities are set. In addition, in addition to the fluctuation pattern, in the case of a big hit, a table for scenario lottery may be provided according to the type of the big hit. In the case where the variation pattern and the big hit symbol are uniquely determined, only a table based on the variation pattern needs to be provided, and there is no need to provide a table determined according to the big hit type.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the special figure look-ahead effect for changing the hold display (hold-ahead look-ahead effect), and similarly includes a lottery table and a scenario table for a background look-ahead effect. FIG. 91 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the scenario and the variation pattern when the number of effects of the background prefetching effect is two. Each scenario is, for example, scenario A (light cloud → light cloud), scenario B (light cloud → rain cloud), scenario C (rain cloud → thunder cloud), and scenario D (rain cloud → clear). It will be a high special map pre-reading effect. Note that the scenario D is set so as to be drawn only at the time of the big hit, and is a scenario dedicated to the big hit. Further, the number of continuous productions is not limited to two, but may be three or more, for example, and a table showing a correspondence between a scenario and a variation pattern may be prepared according to the number of continuous productions.

  When the background look-ahead effect is not to be executed (the result of step S2022 is “No”), the effect control program clears the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag (step S2027), and ends the present process.

  On the other hand, when performing the background look-ahead effect (the result of step S2022 is “Yes”), the effect control program determines whether or not the background look-ahead effect is currently being executed (step S2023). The determination as to whether or not the background look-ahead effect is being performed is made, for example, by setting a flag at the timing when the execution of the background look-ahead effect is started (or determined / selected), and at the timing when the background look-ahead effect is completed (for example, the background look-ahead effect). It is sufficient to provide a flag that is cleared at the timing when the fluctuation display based on the start memory for executing the effect is started (terminated)) and based on the value set in this flag.

  As an example of the flag, a flag (prefetch expectation flag) may be prepared for each degree of expectation of the prefetch effect (pre-reading or background prefetch). For example, in a case where the degree of expectation to be a big hit differs according to the production mode such as high, medium, or low, a look-ahead expectation flag corresponding to each degree of expectation is prepared (for example, a high expectation look-ahead notice flag, Like a medium expectation look-ahead flag and a low expectation look-ahead flag). Further, instead of dividing the flag according to the degree of expectation, the degree of expectation may be divided according to information set in one flag (for example, when the value of the flag is "1", the degree of expectation is low; When it is "2", it is medium expectation, and when it is "3", it is high expectation). These examples are merely examples, and the degree of expectation need not be limited to three types, but may be three or more types, or may be only two types. In other words, any method can be used as long as it is possible to determine (determine) whether or not to execute the prefetching effect mode (background prefetching) in accordance with the degree of expectation.

  When the look-ahead expectation flag is provided, the look-ahead expectation flag of the special figure look-ahead effect that is being executed when the special figure look-ahead effect is switched is held and compared with the flag of the special figure look-ahead effect that is newly executed. do it. For example, if the look-ahead expectation flag of the currently running special figure look-ahead effect is in the expectation degree, if the look-ahead expectation degree flag of the newly executed special figure look-ahead effect has a high degree of expectation, a new special figure look-ahead effect is created. Switch. The flag of the special figure pre-reading effect to be newly executed may be information (numerical information or the like) set for each scenario described above.

  When the background prefetch effect is being executed (the result of step S2023 is “Yes”), the effect control program determines whether to switch the currently executing background prefetch effect to the newly executed background prefetch effect. (Step S2024).

  In the present embodiment, the degree of expectation of the newly executed background look-ahead effect is compared with the degree of expectation of the background look-ahead effect being executed. Switch. The “expectation” is basically the expectation at which the result of the change display of the special symbol is a big hit, but may be the expectation of the type (symbol) of the big hit or the expectation of the gaming state after the big hit. Furthermore, instead of the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, the degree of expectation as an effect (for example, out of normal, normal reach, SP reach, etc.) may be included. For example, the variation pattern may be specified from the variation pattern prefetch command, and the determination may be made based on the variation pattern. More specifically, “expectation” may be added to the items of the variation pattern table (FIG. 47) to define the expectation for each variation pattern in advance, or the reach effect to be executed (normal reach, SP reach) Etc.), the degree of expectation may be set. Since a reach effect having a high degree of expectation such as SP reach has a long fluctuation time, it may be determined that the degree of expectation is higher as the fluctuation time is longer. In addition, when the degree of expectation is the same, any starting memory may be given priority, and may be determined by lottery. If both of the hits are a big hit, the special figure pre-reading effect cannot be executed during the big hit game.

  In addition, in the case where a great profit can be obtained by the player, such as a jackpot, a special prefetching effect display mode that does not appear in a single prefetching lottery may be used. It is not necessary to limit the degree of expectation to only the big hit, and the expectation may be divided according to the type of big hit. For example, the amount of profit that can be obtained at the time of a big hit and the number of times after a big hit, such as the number of rounds of a big hit game, the probability of winning a special lottery after the big hit, and the number of times the player has an advantageous game state (probable change state, time saving state). The degree of expectation may be divided according to a game state.

  Furthermore, a priority may be set for each determined scenario, and the determination may be made based on the priority set for each scenario. For example, numerical information is set for each scenario, and the higher the numerical value, the higher the degree of expectation. When the scenario information is set and stored in the RAM, since the scenario information is stored as numerical information, the value itself can indicate the degree of expectation. The numerical information corresponds to, for example, information (numerical value) for determining the presentation mode and information (numerical value) indicating the degree of expectation, and numerical information may be set based on these pieces of information. In this case, by holding the numerical information of the scenario until the special figure look-ahead effect ends, by comparing with the numerical information corresponding to the newly executed special figure look-ahead effect scenario, it is determined whether to switch the special figure look-ahead effect What is necessary is just to judge.

  The effect control program clears the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag when the ongoing background pre-ahead effect is not continued and switched to a new background-ahead effect (“No” in step S2024) (step S2027). Then, the present process ends. In this case, the special figure pre-reading effect being executed is continuously executed without interruption.

  On the other hand, when the background prefetch effect being executed is switched to a new background prefetch effect (the result of step S2023 is “Yes”), the effect control program changes the setting information of the background prefetch effect being executed to a new background prefetch effect. (Step S2025). Note that the setting information of the background look-ahead effect is also initialized when the background look-ahead effect being executed is executed to the end. The timing of the initialization of the setting information is, for example, the timing at which the starting memory related to the background prefetch effect being executed is exhausted.

  After initializing the setting information of the background look-ahead effect that is being executed (step S2025), or when the background look-ahead effect is not being executed (the result of step S2023 is “No”), the effect look-ahead effect. A setting process is executed (step S2026). Since a plurality of background prefetch effects cannot be executed in parallel, background prefetch effect setting information may be unconditionally initialized in the background prefetch effect setting process. Finally, the effect control program clears the special figure pre-reading effect execution flag (step S2027), and ends this processing.

  In the process of step S2025, instead of initializing the setting information of the background prefetch effect being executed and executing a new background prefetch effect, a new background prefetch effect is performed following the background prefetch effect being executed. You may make it. At this time, the player may be able to recognize that the background prefetching effect has been continued (extended), or may not be able to recognize (it is difficult to recognize). For example, if the player cannot recognize that the background prefetching effect has been continued (extended), it is felt that the state of high expectation has continued for a long time, so that the expectation can be maintained for a long time. At this time, the state of high expectation is maintained even after the variation display of the start memory corresponding to the special figure look-ahead effect that was originally executed is lost, and further, the variation display that is executed later has a higher expectation. Since the effect based on the fluctuation pattern is executed, it is possible to make the player less discouraged.

  Further, when the special figure pre-reading effect is switched, an effect for notifying that the effect has been switched may be executed. For example, the player may be able to recognize by performing an effect (display, sound, light emission, driving body, etc.) that is not executed in the normal effect at the time of switching the special figure prefetch effect. Further, an effect indicating that the switching of the special figure prefetch effect may occur may be executed. In this case, instead of executing the effect at the start of the fluctuation after it is determined that the special figure look-ahead effect is to be switched, even if the switching occurs, the running of the special figure look-ahead effect is continued while the special figure pre-reading effect is being executed. (A screen flash, the color is different only around the display screen, the decorative design itself changes (color, shape), subliminal effect, etc.), and the special look-ahead for the player The effect may be any effect as long as it can be recognized that the effect switching has occurred.

  In the present embodiment, the normal prefetch effect can be executed in parallel with respect to a plurality of start memories, but the background prefetch effect cannot be executed in parallel. Therefore, the process of step S2021 may determine whether or not to execute a prefetch effect that can be executed in parallel, instead of determining whether to execute the normal prefetch effect. For example, a prefetching effect that can be executed in parallel is a first group, and a prefetching effect that cannot be executed in parallel is a second group. Whether the prefetching effect selected in the process of step S2020 belongs to the first group, The process may be branched depending on whether the process belongs to a group. In addition, even if it is a prefetch effect which can be performed in parallel, you may make it switch (overwrite) the prefetch effect under execution to the prefetch effect based on the newly generated start memory.

  In addition, the background prefetching effect and the normal prefetching effect (holding prefetching effect) may be executed simultaneously. FIG. 92 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a special figure prefetching effect control process capable of simultaneously executing the background prefetching effect and the normal prefetching effect (holding prefetching effect).

  When the background pre-reading effect and the reserved pre-reading effect are simultaneously executed, the normal pre-reading effect and the background pre-reading effect or both of them can be selected in the process of step S2020. This point is different from the processing in step S2020 of the special figure prefetch effect control processing shown in FIG. Further, the process of step S2021 in FIG. 89 is deleted, and after the setting process of the hold look-ahead effect is completed, the process of setting the background look-ahead effect is executed. That is, after the process in step S2011, the processes in steps S2022 to 2026 may be performed.

  Further, only in a specific state, a plurality of normal prefetch effects may be executed in parallel. For example, a plurality of normal look-ahead effects may be executed in parallel only when the expectation degree of the previously executed normal look-ahead effect is lower than the newly executed normal look-ahead effect.

  In addition, information indicating whether or not to execute the special figure prefetching effect included in the received special symbol hold command and the current game state stored on the peripheral board side (the game state referred to here is limited to probable change and time reduction. Priority, based on the consistency of the game, such as fluctuating, reaching, jackpot (opening, ending, winning opening, etc.), waiting for customers, etc.) It may be determined whether or not to execute the special figure prefetching effect. In the case of giving priority to the special symbol hold command, regardless of the gaming state, priority is given to the information indicating whether or not the special figure look-ahead effect can be executed, which is included in the special symbol hold command, and the game state (probability state or special figure look-ahead effect being executed) , Etc.), the special figure hold command may not be executed even if the special symbol hold command includes information permitting execution of the special figure prefetch effect.

  If the special symbol hold command does not execute the special figure prefetching effect even though the information for permitting the execution of the special figure prefetching effect is included, for example, a dedicated prefetching lottery table (mismatch only table) is provided. Whether to execute the special figure pre-reading effect may be randomly selected based on the non-matching table. At this time, in the inconsistency-only table, the probability of selecting a scenario that returns to the normal mode (a state in which the special figure prefetching effect has not been executed) is set to be high, and the expectation is gradually lowered. As described above, the effect mode changes, or an effect of a mode that is not executed in the normal special figure look-ahead effect is executed. If the information indicating whether or not the special figure look-ahead effect is included in the special symbol hold command does not match the current game state stored on the peripheral board, be careful not to mislead the player. , May be forcibly returned to the normal effect mode.

  In addition, if the information indicating whether or not to execute the special figure prefetching effect included in the received special symbol hold command does not match with the game state, there is a possibility that a malfunction of the program such as a bug or electrostatic noise may occur. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to find the occurrence of abnormalities by executing an effect that cannot be executed normally, rather than simply controlling not to execute the special figure look-ahead effect, debugging during development, endurance test Etc. can be used for inspection of gaming machines.

  As described above, after the main control board 4100 (first look-ahead determining means) determines whether or not the execution of the special figure pre-reading effect is possible, the peripheral control board 4140 sets the special figure based on the game state or other start-up memory. A second look-ahead determination unit capable of determining whether or not to perform a look-ahead effect and the contents of the effect.

[21-3. Production example]
Subsequently, a specific example of the special figure prefetching effect (background prefetching effect) executed by the above-described control will be described. FIG. 93 is a diagram illustrating an example of a special figure prefetching effect (background prefetching effect) in the present embodiment. The special figure look-ahead effect described in FIG. 93 is a background look-ahead effect in which the background changes, and the background can further change at a predetermined timing according to the degree of expectation. Hereinafter, a specific example of the background prefetch effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 93 (A) shows a state before the background prefetch effect is executed, and shows a point in time when the variable display of the decorative symbol (special symbol) 1910 ends and the special symbol is determined. In the state shown in FIG. 93 (A), the starting memories of the special symbol 1 are held for four pieces.

  After the stop of the special symbol, the reserved start memory is consumed, and the display of the change of the special symbol is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 93 (B), a state in which the background prefetch effect has been started is shown. At this time, the starting memory to be subjected to the background prefetching effect is any one of the three held starting memories. The player may be able to specify the starting memory that is the target of the special figure prefetching effect at the timing when the background prefetching effect is started, or may be notified at the timing when the starting memory that is the target of the background prefetching effect is consumed. You may make it. If a variation pattern having a high degree of expectation is selected in the start memory, which is the target of the background prefetching effect, the fluctuation is displayed in the background prefetching effect during the variation display of the decorative symbol (for example, when a reach occurs). The player can know that the game is targeted.

  In the background look-ahead effect of the present embodiment, a cloud appears in the background. Further, the background is changed so as to progress in a step-by-step manner by the background prefetching effect, and the appearing cloud changes in a stepwise manner. The pattern in which the background (cloud) changes may be determined according to the degree of expectation of a big hit. Specifically, the change of the decorative pattern is stopped (FIG. 93 (C)), the reserved start-up memory is exhausted, and when the next change is started, as shown in FIG. It changes to rain clouds as the color deepens. After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (E), the cloud changes to a thundercloud, and further lightning occurs, resulting in a great storm. At this time, the hold display is reduced or hidden with the occurrence of the reach. In the present embodiment, the deeper the color of the cloud, the higher the expectation, and the highest when a thundercloud occurs, the higher the expectation, but as a special effect (for example, a big hit decision), the cloud disappears and the sun appears. (FIG. 93 (F)).

  The timing at which the background first changes may be the timing at which the game ball wins the starting winning opening (the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102), or the timing at which the decoration symbol starts to change. In the present embodiment, the start of the change of the decorative symbol is displayed. Further, even if a plurality of starting openings are won in a predetermined state (for example, a normal game state), a display is made such that winning in the plurality of starting openings can be determined. However, in a state different from the predetermined state, even if the player wins a plurality of starting openings, it is determined that winning in the plurality of starting openings is indistinguishable or difficult, and when the state is different from the predetermined state, the decorative pattern fluctuates. Since a plurality of game balls are started during the game, it is difficult for the player to recognize which of the start memories has a high degree of expectation.

  Further, when the number of suspensions is equal to or more than a predetermined number (for example, 3 or more), there is a certain delay from the occurrence of a highly expected start-up memory to the start of fluctuation, and a plurality of execution timings of the background prefetch effect are set. If possible, the background prefetch effect may be started after a certain period of time. For example, with respect to the special figure pre-reading effect that occurs when the number of reservations is three or more, no special effect is executed when the reservation 1 and the reservation 2 are exhausted, and the special figure pre-reading effect may be started at the timing when the reservation 3 is completed. In this case, a scenario such as “no change → no change → prefetch A” may be set as a scenario of the special figure prefetch effect, and a lottery may be selected for each change. When lottery is performed for each change, as described above, by preventing the falling down from occurring, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing.

  By configuring as described above, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the starting memory that was the target of the special figure look-ahead effect, and all the fluctuations executed until the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern with high expectation is started. It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the display, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

  Further, the timing at which the background changes stepwise may be changed every time the decoration symbol starts to change, or may be changed every predetermined time regardless of the timing at which the decoration symbol starts to change. This makes it possible to change the background in a plurality of stages even when the number of starting memories to be consumed in advance is small. In addition, when a reach occurs in the variation display of the decorative symbol, a reach effect may be executed in parallel with the background prefetch effect, or the reach effect may be executed by stopping the background prefetch effect.

  Subsequently, when a start memory having a high expectation of a big hit is newly generated while the background prefetch effect is being executed, the background prefetch effect executed in advance is based on the newly generated start memory. An example of an effect in the case of switching to a background prefetch effect (overwriting) will be described. FIG. 94 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the special figure prefetching effect (background prefetching effect) being executed is switched to the special figure prefetching effect based on the newly generated start memory.

  FIG. 94 (A) shows a state before the special figure pre-reading effect (background pre-fetching effect) is executed, similarly to FIG. 93 (A), and the variable display of the decorative symbol (special symbol) 1910 ends. , The time when the symbol is determined. Four start memories of the special symbol 1 are reserved.

  Also, FIG. 94 (B) shows a state in which the reserved starting memory is newly digested, the special symbol variation display is started, and the background prefetch effect is started, as in FIG. 93 (B). . After that, the display of the change of the decorative pattern is stopped (FIG. 94 (C)), the start-up memory which has been reserved is consumed, the change of the decorative pattern is started, and the background is gradually changed (FIG. 94 (D)). The change display of the decorative pattern is stopped (FIG. 94 (E)). At this time, the background may be changed independently of the change display of the decorative symbol.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 94 (E), two new game balls are awarded in the starting winning opening during the change display of the special symbol, and the number of reserved special symbols 1 is again four. Then, if the expectation that the newly generated start memory will be a big hit is higher than the expectation of the background prefetching effect started in FIG. 94B, that is, the background prefetching effect being executed, The background prefetch effect is interrupted, and the background prefetch effect based on the newly generated start memory is executed.

  For example, during the execution of the special figure prefetch effect, a lottery of the special figure prefetch effect based on the newly generated start memory may be enabled. This lottery may be always possible, or specific conditions (for example, the content of the pre-reading effect currently being produced, the variation of the decorative pattern or the stop pattern, and the determination of the possibility of the lottery by random number lottery, etc.) are established. May be possible. When the lottery of the special figure pre-reading effect based on the newly generated start memory is won, the display mode of the special figure pre-reading effect is determined. When the determined display mode is compared with the display mode of the special figure pre-reading effect being executed, and the display mode of the special figure pre-reading effect based on the newly generated start memory is a display mode with a higher expectation. At a predetermined timing (start of next fluctuation, occurrence of reach, stop of symbol, etc.), the display mode is switched to the display mode of the special figure prefetching effect to be newly executed. In addition, when the display mode of the newly-executed special figure look-ahead effect is lower in expectation than the display mode of the currently executed special figure pre-fetch effect, the display mode is switched to the display mode of the newly-executed special figure pre-fetch effect. Alternatively, the display mode of the running special figure prefetching effect may be continued, or the running special figure prefetching effect may be stopped.

  In the background look-ahead effect of the present embodiment, the effect mode is related to “weather”, but the subsequent special figure look-ahead effect that is newly executed may not be directly related to “weather”. For example, when the special figure look-ahead effect that is being executed is related to “weather”, it may be related to a car race in which the contents of the subsequent special figure look-ahead effect are not related at all. By performing a special-lookup look-ahead effect that is related to a running special-lookahead look-ahead effect, the player can feel as if a series of scenarios are being executed and feel that the look-ahead effect period has been extended. it can.

  In addition, in the newly executed special figure look-ahead effect scenario, the scenario of the special figure look-ahead effect that is currently being executed is compared. New scenarios may be combined. For example, when the scenario of the special figure look-ahead effect being executed is “cloudy → rain cloud → cumulonimbus”, and the subsequent scenario of the special figure look-ahead effect is “light cloudy → snow cloud → large storm” (the jackpot expectation degree is light cloudy <cloudy <rain cloud) When the display mode of the running special figure look-ahead effect is “rain cloud”, the scenario is switched to a subsequent special figure look-ahead effect scenario, and the overall flow of the look-ahead effect mode is “cloudy”. → Rain cloud → Light cloud → Thunder cloud → Great storm ”, and although the degree of expectation once decreases at the time of switching, the degree of expectation once lowered in the subsequent display mode becomes higher. In this case, by preparing a scenario that changes in the order of "cloudy weather → rain cloud → light cloudiness" as a special figure look-ahead effect of false (gase), "thunder cloud" appearing after light cloudy will cause the player to hit the big hit Expectation can be further increased.

  In addition, when executing a special figure look-ahead effect of a scenario that is not related as a scenario of a subsequent special figure look-ahead effect, it is possible to indicate to the player that a newly expected start-up memory has occurred. Even if the result of the lottery corresponding to the special figure prefetching effect in the middle is incorrect, the player's expectation can be maintained until the result of the lottery corresponding to the special figure prefetching effect based on the subsequent start memory is known.

  FIG. 94 (F) shows a state in which the background prefetch effect based on the newly generated start memory has been started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94 (G), the color of the cloud changes so as to become darker, and as shown in FIG. 94 (H), lightning appears from the cloud which has become darker.

  In FIG. 94 (F), the color of the cloud is lighter than in FIG. 94 (E), and the progress of the background prefetch effect has returned to the previous stage. In this way, when the progress of the background look-ahead effect returns to the previous stage, the player can recognize that the start memory having a higher degree of expectation has been added, and the sense of expectation can be further increased. . In addition, in the effect of the change of the cloud, the effect form is set in advance as a scenario, and a plurality of scenarios may be combined or a scenario combined in advance may be prepared.

  On the other hand, a subsequent background prefetching effect may be started so as to continue the interrupted background prefetching effect without returning the progress of the background prefetching effect to the previous stage. By performing such control, the player can maintain a state where the expectation of the big hit is continued for a longer time.

  Reach also occurs in the fluctuation display corresponding to the interrupted background look-ahead effect, but in this case, the reach effect is executed, and the background pre-fetch effect is continuously performed even after the next fluctuation display is started. do it.

  It should be noted that the special figure look-ahead effect for changing the background (background look-ahead effect) is performed in parallel with the above-described special figure look-ahead effect (normal look-ahead effect) for changing the display mode of the hold display of the start memory having a high degree of expectation. It may be. In some cases, the player may recognize the starting memory corresponding to the background look-ahead effect. In this case, the expectation is higher than when the display mode of the hold display is changed, and the player's Expectation may be further increased.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, if a start memory with a higher expectation of a big hit occurs during the execution of the special figure look-ahead effect, the previously executed special figure look-ahead effect is executed. By switching (overwriting) to the special figure look-ahead effect based on the newly generated start memory, it becomes possible to give the player a sense of expectation of a big hit, and to maximize the effect of the look-ahead effect. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing.

  Lastly, a description will be given of an example of an effect in the case where the suspended prefetching effect and the background prefetching effect are executed in parallel. FIG. 95 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect in which a pending prefetch effect and a background prefetch effect are executed in parallel, and the currently executing background prefetch effect is switched to a background prefetch effect based on a newly generated start memory. In the effect example shown in FIG. 95, a background prefetch effect related to the reserved prefetch effect is executed.

  FIG. 95 (A) shows the state before the pre-reading effect is executed, and shows the point in time when the variable display of the decorative symbol (special symbol) ends and the lost symbol is determined. In the state shown in FIG. 95 (A), three startup memories are held. FIG. 95 (B) shows a state in which the reserved start memory is exhausted, the reserved number is changed from 3 to 2, and the change display of the special symbol is started.

  Thereafter, during the change of the special symbol of FIG. 95 (B), one game ball wins in the starting winning opening, and the lottery of the prefetching effect in the starting winning is won. FIG. 95 (C) shows a state in which the fluctuation of the special symbol is continued and the reserved look-ahead effect is executed. At this time, the hold display of the hold 3 changes from a normal round shape to a “cumulonimbus” shape. In the start memory in which the hold look-ahead effect is executed, the background look-ahead effect is executed in parallel with the hold look-ahead effect. In the background look-ahead effect, the background changes from “cloudy” to “rain cloud”, and finally changes to “thunder cloud (cumulonimbus)”. As described above, the hold display changes to “cumulonimbus” due to the hold look-ahead effect, and the background finally changes to “thundercloud” related to “cumulonimbus”.

  FIG. 95 (D) shows a state in which the special symbol change display has been completed. Next, FIG. 95 (E) shows a state in which the next hold start memory is exhausted and the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. At this time, a cloud indicating “cloudy” is displayed on the background as a background prefetch effect. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 95 (F), the special symbol change display ends. At this time, the cloud displayed on the background may be left as it is, or may be deleted once. It is only necessary that the player can recognize that the background look-ahead effect has been executed.

  FIG. 95 (G) shows a state in which the next hold start memory is exhausted and the special symbol is variably displayed. At this time, the hold display shows that the hold 1 is “cumulonimbus”, the hold 2 is “normal”, the hold 3 is “storm”, and the hold 4 is turned off. Further, the background changes from "cloud" to "rain cloud" as a background prefetch effect. Also, during the special symbol change display, two game balls win the start winning opening, and the second start memory (hold 3) wins the lottery of the look-ahead effect, and as a result, the hold display shows "storm". It changes to the shape shown. Further, a background look-ahead effect is executed based on the start memory corresponding to the hold 3. At this time, a scenario in which the background changes from “light cloudy” to “thundercloud” and finally changes to “large storm” is selected. The start memory of the "Storm" hold display has a higher expectation of a big hit than the start memory of the "cumulonimbus", so the background prefetch effect is switched (overwritten). FIG. 95 (H) shows a state in which the change display of the special symbol has been completed, and rain clouds are continuously displayed in the background.

  FIG. 95 (I) shows a state in which the start memory for which the suspension display is “cumulonimbus” is exhausted, and the special symbol is variably displayed. If the background look-ahead effect is continued, a cumulonimbus (thundercloud) should be displayed. However, since the hold display is switched to the background look-ahead effect based on the starting memory of "storm", the background is "light cloudy". Is changed to At this time, the hold display indicates that the hold 1 is “normal”, the hold 2 is “storm”, the hold 3 and the hold 4 are turned off.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 95 (J), a reach is generated based on the start memory in which the hold display is “cumulonimbus”, and a reach effect is executed. At this time, the background and the hold display remain unchanged.

  When the reach fluctuation of FIG. 95 (J) is completed, as shown in FIG. 95 (K), the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol becomes incorrect. At this time, the background remains lightly cloudy.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 95 (L), when the next fluctuation starts, the background changes to a thundercloud. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 95 (M), the change of the special symbol ends. At this time, the background and the hold display are the same as the state shown in FIG. 95 (L).

  Further, when the hold display has exhausted the start memory of "storm", the fluctuation display of the special symbol is started as shown in FIG. 95 (N). At this time, all the hold displays are turned off, and the background changes to “large storm (lightning + storm)”. Then, as shown in FIG. 95 (O), the change display of the special symbol is fixedly stopped, and a big hit occurs.

  In the present embodiment, by associating the hold look-ahead effect with the background look-ahead effect and performing it in accordance with the display at the final stage of the scenario, how the background finally changes when the hold display changes (What scenario is selected (occurs)) can be determined in advance. Further, the display mode corresponding to the hold display does not need to correspond to the final stage of the scenario, and may be the first or middle stage. If it is an intermediate stage, there is a possibility that the display mode will change to a display mode having a higher degree of expectation at the final stage, and the player's sense of expectation can be increased.

[22. Modified example of effect control by level management]
As described above, the control for preventing the falling-down at the time of executing the effect has been described. However, when the effect is executed at a predetermined timing for each variation pattern, if the effect variation is increased, the effect data becomes enormous and management becomes difficult. . In addition, the effect control such as the above-described fall prevention processing is complicated, and, for example, when a rare effect is executed, even if there is an error in the effect data, it may be difficult to find out. Furthermore, performing a test for all patterns requires a great deal of man-hours.

  Therefore, as a third modification of the present embodiment, a gaming machine that makes it possible to manage effect data easily by managing effects in a hierarchical manner is proposed. Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to reduce the amount of data required for executing the effect and prevent an error in setting the effect data.

  In the third modification of the present embodiment, the “level” corresponding to the content of the effect that can be executed in response to the look-ahead command transmitted from the main control board 4100 at the time of the start winning or the special figure synchronous effect start command transmitted at the start of the change. (Staging reference information). " The production content is determined based on the level. Hereinafter, an example of selecting a notice effect or an effect at the time of change based on the level will be described.

[22-1. Fluctuation pattern]
First, in order to simplify the following description, a simplified variation pattern is defined. FIG. 96 is a diagram illustrating an example of a type of a variation pattern according to Modification 3 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 96, the variation pattern command includes a status (STS) and a mode (MODE), and these are combined to form a variation pattern command.

  Further, the fluctuation pattern 1 is “normal out”, the fluctuation pattern 2 is “normal reach”, the fluctuation pattern 3 is “normal reach”, the fluctuation pattern 4 is “SP reach”, and the fluctuation pattern 5 is “normal reach”. SP reach ". The branch number added to each variation pattern corresponds to the number of pseudo runs. Specifically, when the branch number is 1, the number of pseudo runs is 1,..., When the branch number is 4, the number of pseudo runs is 4. In the third modification of the present embodiment, up to four pseudo continuous changes can be performed. Therefore, in the third modification of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 96, the status (STS) corresponds to the number of pseudo runs, and the mode (MODE) corresponds to the fluctuation pattern.

  Regarding the reach mode, the SP reach has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach, and in the case of pseudo continuous fluctuation, the expectation of the big hit increases as the number of pseudo runs increases.

[22-2. scenario]
A corresponding scenario (variation scenario) is defined for each variation pattern. The variation scenario in the present variation is an effect that is performed while a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and defines whether or not a notice effect can be executed, a timing at which the notice effect is executed, a type of the notice effect, and the like. is there. Hereinafter, a variation scenario according to the present modification will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 97 is a diagram illustrating an example of a change scenario corresponding to the execution pattern of the notice effect in the change display of the special symbol according to the third modification of the present embodiment. Scenario 1 corresponds to fluctuation pattern 1, scenario 2 corresponds to fluctuation pattern 2 and fluctuation pattern 3, and scenario 3 corresponds to fluctuation pattern 4 and fluctuation pattern 5. Further, scenario 4 corresponds to the fluctuation pattern 1-1, and scenario 5 corresponds to the fluctuation patterns 2-1 to 2, the fluctuation patterns 3-1 to 3, the fluctuation patterns 4-1 to 3, and the fluctuation patterns 5-1 to 4 Corresponding. As described above, in the third modification of the present embodiment, the fluctuation scenario is associated with the fluctuation pattern. Note that a plurality of scenarios may be set in one variation pattern and selected by lottery, or a common scenario may be set in a plurality of variation patterns. Hereinafter, the contents of each variation scenario will be described.

  For each variation scenario, whether or not each notice can be executed and the execution timing are set. In this modified example, when the execution flag indicating whether or not the notice can be executed is set to ON, the notice effect can be executed at the corresponding execution timing. The notice effect includes four kinds of notice effect A to notice effect D. One or more effects are associated with each of the notice effects A to D for each type, and a notice effect executed at the corresponding notice timing is determined by lottery. In addition, in the announcement effect A, the effect content is set in the corresponding announcement A flag, and at the execution timing, the set announcement effect is executed with reference to the announcement A flag. At this time, a selection may be made from a plurality of effects by lottery and executed. The notice effects B to D also correspond to the notice B flag to the notice D flag, and are similarly controlled.

  Hereinafter, the execution timing of the notice effect for each variation scenario will be described. FIG. 98 is a diagram for describing the timing of executing a notice effect for each variation scenario of the third modification of the present embodiment. In the present modified example, the timing of executing the notice effect can be set from period 1 to period 4, and each period corresponds to notice effect A to notice effect D. As described above, the period in which the notice effect can be executed is determined for each variation scenario by the execution flag and the execution timing. Hereinafter, each variation scenario will be specifically described.

  Scenario 1 ends normally only in period 1 because it is an unusual case where no reach occurs. Period 1 is a period from the start of the change of the special symbol to the stop of the change. When Scenario 1 is selected, at the time when 2000 ms has elapsed from the start of the change of the special symbol, the user refers to the notice A flag indicating the contents of the notice effect A, and executes the corresponding notice effect. At this time, the effect determined when the notice A flag is set may be executed, or a notice effect to be executed by lottery may be selected from one or a plurality of effects corresponding to the notice effect A. Further, it may be possible to select not to execute the notice effect. In addition, the selection of the announcement effect may be always performed by a lottery with a specific probability, or may be performed based on a level (effect standard information) described later. Note that the timing of executing the notice effect A may be any time within the period 1, and the timing may be changed according to the selected effect, or may be constant. Further, the timing of referring to the notice A flag (the timing at which 2000 ms has elapsed from the start of the change of the special symbol) is the timing within the period 1. For example, the entire period 1 is 5000 ms, and at the timing when 2000 ms elapses from the start of the period 1 (the start of the change of the special symbol), the notice A flag is referred to and a lottery effect is selected.

  Scenario 2 is a case where normal reach occurs. The fluctuation time of the special symbol includes a period 1 (first half fluctuation) until the reach occurs and a period 2 from the start of the reach generation to the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol. Then, at a timing of lapse of 2000 ms from the start of the fluctuation, the notice effect A is executed by referring to the notice A flag indicating the contents of the notice effect A. Similarly, at the timing when 7500 ms has elapsed, the notice effect B is executed with reference to the notice B flag indicating the contents of the notice effect B.

  Scenario 3 is a case where SP reach occurs. The SP reach of the present modified example is constituted by the first half and the second half, and evolves into the SP reach after a predetermined time has elapsed after the occurrence of the reach. Scenario 3 includes a period 1 until the reach occurs, a period 2 from the occurrence of the reach to the SP reach, a period 3 in the first half of the SP reach, and a period 4 in the second half of the SP reach. Then, at a timing of lapse of 2000 ms from the start of the fluctuation, the notice effect A is executed by referring to the notice A flag indicating the contents of the notice effect A. Similarly, at the timing when 7500 ms has elapsed, the notice effect B is executed with reference to the notice B flag indicating the contents of the notice effect B. Further, at the time when 20,000 ms has elapsed, the notice effect flag C indicating the content of the notice effect C is executed to execute the notice effect C. At the time when 30,000 ms have elapsed, the notice effect D indicating the content of the notice effect D is referred to, and the notice effect D is indicated. Execute

  Scenario 4 is a case where a pseudo-running gas occurs. The pseudo continuous gaseous change is a change in which the variable display is temporarily stopped after the change display of the special symbol is started, and then the change display ends without a reach even if the change is performed again. Scenario 4 is composed of a period 1 from the start of the change of the special symbol to a temporary stop and a period 2 from the end of the change display of the special symbol. Then, at a timing of lapse of 2000 ms from the start of the fluctuation, the notice effect A is executed by referring to the notice A flag indicating the contents of the notice effect A. Similarly, at the timing when 8000 ms has elapsed, the notice effect B is executed with reference to the notice B flag indicating the contents of the notice effect B.

  Note that a period from the start of the temporary stop of the pseudo continuous display to the end of the pseudo continuous display (change stop or occurrence of reach) corresponds to the period 2. In this case, the temporary stop of the special symbol is executed one or more times in the period 2. For example, when the number of the temporary stops is 3, the temporary stop period from the first temporary stop to the second temporary stop is set as the period 2-1. The notice effect performed at this time is referred to as notice effect B-1. Similarly, the second temporary stop period to the third temporary stop (reach) period are set to a period 2-2, and the announcement effect B-2 is executed. The execution timing of each announcement effect is determined according to the effect content with reference to the timing (8000 ms) shown in FIG.

  Scenario 5 is a case where the pseudo continuous fluctuation evolves into SP reach. In this case, the period 1 is the time until the special symbol is temporarily stopped, and the period 2 is the time from the temporary stop to the occurrence of the SP reach. The period 3 and the period 4 are the same as when the normal SP reach is generated.

  Scenario 5 is a case in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation evolves to SP reach, in which period 1 from the start of the special symbol fluctuation to temporary stop, period 2 in which the reach occurs, and evolves from the occurrence of the reach to the SP reach. A period 3 in the first half of the SP reach and a period 4 in the second half of the SP reach. In the period 2, as described in the scenario 4, the period is divided according to the number of temporary stops. Also in period 3, the period from the occurrence of the reach to the development of the SP reach may be divided into the first half of the SP reach.

  In the scenario 5, the notice effect A is executed at a timing of lapse of 2000 ms from the start of the change, with reference to the notice A flag indicating the contents of the notice effect A. Similarly, at the timing when 7500 ms has elapsed, the notice effect B is executed with reference to the notice B flag indicating the contents of the notice effect B. Further, at the timing when 30,000 ms have elapsed, the notice effect flag C indicating the content of the notice effect C is executed, and the notice effect C is executed. At the time when 40,000 ms elapses, the notice effect D indicating the content of the notice effect D is referred to, and the notice effect D is indicated. Execute

  In the drawings, only typical examples of each scenario are shown, and a plurality of types of each scenario can be defined. For example, in the case of the normal reach, not only one type of scenario 2 is defined, but a plurality of scenarios according to variations such as staging such as scenario 2-1, scenario 2-2, and scenario 2-3. It can be defined. Similarly, a plurality of scenarios are defined for each type of SP reach, or a plurality of scenarios are defined according to variations such as staging even for the same type of SP reach having the same variable time.

[22-3. Lottery points]
In the third modification of the present embodiment, as described above, the effect contents are randomly selected based on the fluctuation scenario corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (lottery point). At the lottery points, levels (production reference information) corresponding to the degree of expectation of the special symbol change display are set in stages, and the corresponding change scenarios are drawn by lot. FIG. 99 is a diagram illustrating an example of the content of a preliminary announcement of a lottery point according to Modification 3 of the present embodiment. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 99, there are “look-ahead”, “first-half variation”, “pseudo-sequence”, “tempering”, “SP first-half”, and “SP second-half”.

  "Prefetching" selects lots of pending prefetching, background change, availability of other prefetching notices, and the degree of expectation. More specifically, the lottery is also possible when only the prefetching is executed or when the prefetching and the background change are executed at the same time, and the type (high or low) of the prefetching notice to be executed is determined.

  Further, as described above, when a game ball wins in the starting winning opening, the main control board 4100 determines a hitting determination, a variation pattern type (reach category) or a variation pattern (final variation pattern) based on the obtained random number value, These are sent as commands to the sub-board as pre-read information. The method of determining a hit at the time of pre-reading, the method of determining the variation pattern type or the variation pattern is processed in the same manner as when the variation of the special symbol is started, and the program capacity is compressed by using the same processing routine.

  The peripheral control board 4140 determines, based on the look-ahead information received from the main control board 4100, whether or not to perform a look-ahead effect, a look-ahead mode (a hold look-ahead, a background change, a zone look-ahead), and an effect mode in the determined look-ahead mode. Note that the pre-reading is a notice effect in which the display mode of the hold display is changed, and the display color and the change order of the display color (for example, blue → green → red) are defined as the effect mode. In the case of a background change, the type of the background image and the change order of the background image (for example, rain cloud → thunder cloud → thunder) are defined. In the case of zone look-ahead, the type of zone effect is defined. These effect modes are switched at each variation start timing, but are not limited thereto, and may be switched by achieving an elapsed time from the variation start, a specific achievement condition (mission), or the like.

  The “first half fluctuation” is a period from the start of the change of the special symbol to the occurrence of the reach or the temporary stop of the special symbol. .

  In the “pseudo ream”, a pattern in which the notice mode is changed every time the special symbol is temporarily stopped and the re-change is repeated is selected. The change pattern of the notice mode is randomly selected at the start of the change. The pattern for changing the notice mode includes a pattern in which the expectation of the executed notice is gradually increased or the expectation is made constant. At this time, these patterns may be defined so as to prevent the expected degree from decreasing in accordance with the progress of the pseudo run. The lottery may be performed at predetermined timings (for example, a change timing of the precedent mode) without performing the lottery at the start of the change. With such a configuration, it is possible to exclude in advance from the lottery range a notice mode in which the degree of expectation is low, and it is possible to prevent a drop-down from occurring. Further, the player may be informed of some useful information (for example, a game state) by intentionally causing a fall. For example, in the case of a probability state in which it is not possible to determine whether the player is in a low-probability state, which is a high-probability state, a fall may occur to indicate that the player is in a high-probability state. Even if the sense of expectation of the jackpot is reduced, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by suggesting useful information to the player.

  “Tempai” is a specific event (tempai) that occurs during the change display of the special symbol, and the lottery is performed to determine whether or not a notice effect to be executed when this event occurs and the degree of expectation. "SP first half" draws the degree of expectation of the preview production performed in the first half of SP reach, "SP second half" draws the degree of expectation of the preliminary production performed in the second half of SP reach I do.

[22-4. Level (staging standard information)]
Next, the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the level (production reference information) will be described. In the third modification of the present embodiment, the higher the level is, the higher the expectation of the jackpot is set. Therefore, the level is set corresponding to the expectation of the fluctuation pattern. FIG. 100 is a view for explaining the relationship between the variation pattern and the level in the third modification of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 100, a basic level is set for each variation pattern, level (LV) 1 for variation pattern 1, LV2 for variation pattern 2, LV3 for variation pattern 3, and LV3 for variation pattern 4. LV3 and LV4 are set in the fluctuation pattern 5, respectively.

  In the third modification of the present embodiment, the basic level is set, but the level is actually set based on the fluctuation pattern and the number of pseudo runs. For example, as shown in FIG. 100, in the case of the variation pattern 3, LV3 is set as the basic level, but when the number of pseudo runs is three, LV4 higher than the basic level is selected. Is set. The fluctuation pattern 3 is a case where a normal reach is executed and a big hit occurs, but by performing an effect that should not be executed in the normal reach, the player's sense of expectation can be increased. On the other hand, in the variation pattern 4, when the number of pseudo runs is small, LV2 lower than the basic level is set. In the variation pattern 4, SP reach is executed, but the result of the variation display is lost. Therefore, by lowering the degree of expectation of the effect, it is possible to prevent the sense of expectation from being excessively excited.

  As described above, since the level is set based on the variation pattern and the number of pseudo runs, in the third modification of the present embodiment, the level corresponds to the variation pattern command. Further, when determining the variation pattern, a lottery may be performed to determine whether to set a basic level or a level corresponding to the number of pseudo runs.

  In the third modification of the present embodiment, it is possible to set the level based on the fluctuation pattern and the game state. FIG. 101 is a view for explaining the relationship between the variation pattern and the game state in Modification 3 of the present embodiment. In this modification, as described above, the probability display state of the variable display (low probability state (normal state), high probability state) and the operating state of the normal electric auditorium (time saving state) are set as the gaming state. Specifically, there are a low-probability non-reduction state, a low-probability reduction state, a high-probability non-reduction state (so-called latent probability change), and a high-probability reduction time state (so-called probability change state).

  When the level is set to a level different from the basic level according to the game state, for example, when the player does not know the game state, the game state may be suggested. Specifically, when the player cannot know whether the player is in the high-probability state or the low-probability state in the high-probability non-saving time state, a level different from the basic level is set as shown in FIG. For example, when the variation pattern 1 is selected in the high probability non-time saving state, a level (LV2) higher than the basic level (LV1) is set, and in the case of the variation pattern 4, a level lower than the basic level (LV3) is set. By setting (LV1), control is performed to execute an effect that is not normally executed, and it is suggested to the player that the player is in a high probability state.

  Although the high-probability non-saving time state (so-called latent probability change) has been described, a level different from the basic level may be set for game characteristics. For example, when the gaming state is the high probability time saving state and a normal jackpot that does not shift to the high probability state occurs in the variation pattern 5, a level lower than the basic level is set, and an effect with a low degree of expectation is executed. This can indicate that the user falls from the high probability state.

  Also, the level may be changed as the pseudo-run progresses. Thereby, even if a fluctuation pattern with a low degree of expectation is selected, if the result of the fluctuation display is a big hit, it is possible to execute a high expectation effect by increasing the level according to the progress of the effect. Therefore, the interest of the player can be gradually increased. Specifically, the level of the effect performed when the special symbol is temporarily stopped may be set to be higher in the latter half.

  Further, the selection of the level may be determined based on the big hit symbol (big hit type). For example, if it is a big hit with a large amount of prize balls after shifting to the probable change state, the level is set high, and if it is a big hit without shifting to the probable change state or a big hit without (small) prize balls, it is relatively high. Set to a lower level. Taking the game state into account, set the level low in the case of a big hit that transitions to the normal state while in the probable change state, or set a high level to shift to the probable change state or maintain the probable change state May be set.

  In the third modification of the present embodiment, whether or not an effect is performed and the type of effect to be performed differ depending on the set level. FIG. 102 is a diagram illustrating an example of a table for setting whether or not to execute a notice effect for each level in Modification 3 of the present embodiment. FIG. 102 shows whether or not an effect (notification effect) indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit in the special symbol change display is executable.

  Explaining in detail with reference to FIG. 102, as an example of a notice effect, a movable accessory (accessory A, accessory B) and a background of a display screen (background image A, background image B) can be executed. This suggests that the effect of the accessory B has a higher degree of expectation than that of the accessory A, and also that the display of the background image B than the background image A has a higher degree of expectation.

  As described above, the higher the level, the higher the expected effect of the jackpot is, the lower the level 1, the lower the expected effect of the accessory A is only executed. On the other hand, in the case of level 4, all the announcement effects can be executed, and any of the announcement effects may be executed, or the announcement effect by the movable character and the announcement by changing the background of the display screen. It may be possible to allow overlapping execution of the effects, or if the operations of the movable characters do not interfere with each other, the effects by the movable characters are executed in duplicate, such as performing each announcement effect in parallel Is also good.

  Even if the notice effect is executable (“○”), the execution may or may not be executed by lottery, and whether or not the effect may be determined may be determined by lottery. The higher the level, the higher the probability of executing the notice effect is set, and the lottery probability according to the level is set because the higher the level, the higher the expectation of the jackpot than when the notice effect is not performed ing.

  In addition, the table shown in FIG. 102 may be referred to at the time of execution of each announcement effect, and it may be determined whether or not to actually execute the announcement effect. Thus, it is possible to prevent the execution of a notice effect that should not be executed. As in the case of the level 4, when all the operations can be performed, such determination need not be performed.

  Note that the announcement effect by the accessory and the announcement effect by the background image may indicate the result of the fluctuation display (the fluctuation) being executed, or may be a notice (pre-reading) for the hold storage in which the fluctuation display is not started. (Notice).

[22-5. Notice production lottery]
Next, a procedure for selecting a notice selected at each lottery timing will be described. FIG. 103 is a diagram illustrating an example of a table for selecting the content of a notice effect in Modification 3 of the present embodiment. FIG. 103A illustrates a case where the first half changes, FIG. (C) shows the first half of the development after the reach or the first half after the occurrence of the pseudo-sequence, and (D) shows the lottery probability and the set value of the effect flag of the announcement effect in the second half of the development after the reach or the second half of the reach after the occurrence of the pseudo-sequence.

  FIG. 103 (A) shows the lottery probability of the notice A executed in the first half of the change of the special symbol. At the level 1, the notice A is not executed with a probability of 50%, and the notice A-1 is executed with a probability of 50%. When the notice A is not executed, the flag setting value of the notice A flag is set to 0. Similarly, when the notice A-1 is executed, 1 is set, and when the notice A-2 is executed, 2 is set. When the notice A-3 is executed, 3 is set, and when the notice A-4 is executed, 4 is set. The expectation of the big hit increases in the order of the notices A-1 to A-4, and the setting is made such that the notice effect with the higher expectation is more easily selected when the level with the higher expectation is selected. In addition, you may add the notice effect (for example, A-5) in which the flag setting value is set to 5 as a jackpot determined effect.

  The notice A is not necessarily one kind of notice effect, but includes, for example, a plurality of kinds of effects performed in the first half of the change. At this time, a plurality of notice A tables are defined according to the type of effect. More specifically, there are a dialogue notice described later with reference to FIG. 104, a character group notice in which a plurality of characters are displayed, a step-up notice in which an image having a high degree of expectation is displayed in a stepwise manner, and the like. To define the notice A table. In addition, if these notice effects can be executed in duplicate, a plurality of notice effects may be executed in parallel. On the other hand, when it cannot be performed in parallel, a priority may be set for each type of notice, and a notice effect with a high priority may be executed, or an effect to be executed may be determined by lottery. Note that a plurality of effects can be similarly defined for notices B to D described later.

  FIG. 103 (B) shows a notice B executed after reaching or at the time of occurrence of a pseudo-ream, (C) shows a notice C executed at the first half of development after reaching or after reaching a pseudo-ream, and (D) shows a development after reaching. It shows the lottery probability and the setting value of the effect flag of the notice D executed in the latter half or the latter half of the reach after the occurrence of the pseudo-run. Generally, each announcement effect is set in the same tendency as in the case of announcement A, and when the expectation of the jackpot is high at the time of execution as in announcement D, the announcement effect with higher expectation is more likely to be executed. Is set to increase the expectation of the player. Note that at the level 1, the notice D is not executed, so that 100% is set to “none”.

[22-6. Dialogue]
Next, a description will be given of a speech effect in which words indicating the degree of expectation are displayed and voice-outputted by displaying a character on the liquid crystal display device 1900 among the announcement effects performed during the change display of the special symbol. Note that only the voice output may be performed without displaying the character or the like. In addition, in the example illustrated in FIG. 103, the speech effect can correspond to the notice A of the first half variation.

  FIG. 104 is a view for explaining an example of a dialogue announcement effect of Modification 3 of the present embodiment. FIG. 104 (A) is a conventional dialogue announcement effect selection table, and FIG. 104 (B) is a dialogue announcement effect selection table of the present invention. It is. In the example shown in FIG. 103, the selection of the effect contents is indicated by the lottery probability, but in FIG. 104 (B), it is indicated by the random value.

  In the conventional dialogue announcement effect, whether or not execution is possible and the content of the dialogue are determined based on the variation pattern notified by the main control board 4100. Specifically, when the change pattern is notified, a random number value is obtained, and a line to be output is selected by lot. In the example shown in FIG. 104 (A), random numbers from 0 to 1000 are acquired, and the dialogue corresponding to the notified variation pattern and the acquired random number value is selected, and a speech effect is executed. More specifically, in the variation pattern 3, the dialogue 2 is selected when a random value from 0 to 750 is extracted, and the dialogue 3 is selected when a random value from 751 to 1000 is extracted. . For example, if the extracted random number value is 500, the line 2 is selected.

  On the other hand, in the dialogue announcement effect according to the present invention, when the variation pattern is notified, the level is selected based on the notified variation pattern as described above. Further, a random number value is obtained, and a line is selected based on the obtained random number value and the selected level.

  Since the conventional speech notice had to be selected for each variation pattern, when the number of variation patterns was large, a selection table having an enormous data amount was required as shown in FIG. 104 (A). On the other hand, in the third modification of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 104B, the content of the dialogue notice is selected for each level corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, so that the data amount can be significantly reduced. .

[22-7. Notice production control]
Next, control for performing a lottery for selecting a notice effect will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a level setting process of performing a lottery for selecting a notice effect according to the third modification of the present embodiment. This processing is executed in the peripheral control unit regular processing (FIG. 42) based on commands (pre-reading effect start command, special figure synchronous effect start command) transmitted from the main control board 4100. The execution timing of this process is executed, for example, before the effect contents of the prefetch notice and the effect contents of the fluctuation are determined, that is, before the effect control process (step S1026) and the special figure prefetch control process (step S1027). This may be performed, or may be executed inside the effect control processing (step S1026) or the special figure prefetch control processing (step S1027).

  When the level setting process is started, first, the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) determines whether or not a prefetching effect start command transmitted at the time of starting winning is received (step S3000). When the level setting process is executed after the received command analysis process, it can be determined whether or not a prefetch effect effect start command has been received, based on whether or not a prefetch effect effect flag has been set.

  When the prefetching effect start command is received (result of step S3000 is “Yes”), peripheral control MPU 4150a randomly selects a scenario of a prefetching advance notice effect (prefetch level scenario) (step S3001). The look-ahead level scenario is determined based on a variation pattern corresponding to the content of the look-ahead effect start command. Further, the level may be determined based on the number of times of the pseudo continuous fluctuation, the game state, and the like.

  In this modification, the pre-reading notice effect includes a reservation notice and a background notice. The pre-read level scenario of the suspension notice includes information on whether or not execution is possible, whether or not there is a gradual change in suspension display, timing, and the like. Similarly, the pre-reading level scenario of the background notice includes whether or not execution is possible, whether or not there is a gradual change in the background image, timing, and the like. Further, a level is set in the look-ahead level scenario, and when the level changes stepwise, the level is set for each changing timing. Note that the notice effect related to the look-ahead effect may be based on the operation of the movable accessory.

  If the game state at the time of receiving the pre-reading effect start command and the game state at the start of the variable display corresponding to the pre-reading effect start command are different (for example, when a high-probability state that continues a predetermined number of times ends), the notice effect is performed. Since there is a possibility that inconsistency may occur in the result of the variable display, setting the level to 1 can prevent the player from being discouraged due to the execution of an unreasonably high performance.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a randomly selects an effect mode of the suspension notice based on the selected level (step S3002). The hold notice is an effect that suggests the expectation degree of the jackpot of the hold to the player by changing the mode of the hold display of the special symbol change on the display screen. Specifically, the display color or the shape of the hold display is changed. The above-described normal prefetching effect corresponds to the suspension notice. In the lottery of the suspension notice, a random number value is extracted, and the mode of the suspension display is specified from a predetermined table based on the extracted random numbers. Further, a flag setting value corresponding to the hold display mode is obtained. Then, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the acquired flag setting value as a suspension notice flag indicating whether or not the suspension notice can be executed and the type (step S3003). When the holding notice is not executed, the lottery of the holding notice is skipped, and 0 is set to the holding notice flag.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a randomly selects an effect mode of the background notice based on the selected level (step S3004). The background notice is an effect that suggests the expectation degree of the jackpot of the hold to the player by changing the display mode of the background of the display screen. In the lottery of the background notice, a random value is extracted, and a background image is specified from a predetermined table (FIG. 103) based on the extracted random number. Further, a flag setting value corresponding to the background image is obtained. Then, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the acquired flag setting value as a suspension notice flag indicating whether or not the background notice can be executed and the type (step S3005). When the background notice is not executed, the lottery of the background notice is skipped, and 0 is set to the background notice flag.

  On the other hand, if the pre-reading effect start command has not been received (result of step S3000 is “No”), peripheral control MPU 4150a has received the special figure synchronous effect start command transmitted at the start of the change of the special symbol. Is determined (step S3010). When the level setting processing is executed after the reception command analysis processing, it can be determined whether or not the special figure synchronous effect start command has been received, based on whether or not the fluctuation pattern reception flag has been set. If the special figure synchronous effect start command has not been received (the result of step S3011 is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 4150a ends this processing.

  When the special figure synchronous effect start command is received (result of step S3010 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 4150a randomly selects the fluctuation level scenario based on the content of the special figure synchronous effect start command (step S3011). ). Specifically, the lottery is performed based on the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the special figure synchronous effect start command. Further, the change level scenario may be randomly selected based on the look-ahead level scenario corresponding to the change. Further, as shown in FIGS. 100 and 101, the level may be determined based on the number of times of pseudo-continuous fluctuation, the game state, and the like. In the fluctuation level scenario, a level is set for each point at which the effect is executed.

  Here, the level set in the fluctuation level scenario selected based on the special figure synchronous effect start command is the same as the level set in the prefetch level scenario selected by lottery at the time of the start winning (when receiving the prefetch effect command). It may be determined whether or not a contradiction occurs, and if a contradiction occurs, the level determined at the time of the start winning may be selected. Thus, when a plurality of levels can be selected according to the variation pattern, it is possible to prevent inconsistency with the effect content at the time of pre-reading. If the result of the variable display is determined to be a big hit, the level may be set higher. In this case, even if the degree of expectation of the effect in the fluctuation becomes higher than the look-ahead effect, the expectation of the player is not spoiled.

  When the variation level scenario is selected, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets a notice A to be executed in the first half of the variation of the identification symbol in the special figure synchronous effect (step S3012). The execution timing of the notice A is before the reach occurs when the pseudo continuous fluctuation is not executed and before the pseudo continuous fluctuation is started. In the lottery of the notice A, a random number value is extracted, and the type of the notice A to be executed is specified from a predetermined table (FIGS. 103A and 104B) based on the extracted random numbers. Further, a flag setting value corresponding to the type of the notice A is acquired. Then, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the obtained flag setting value as the notice A flag (Step S3013).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets a notice B to be executed after the occurrence of the reach or at the start of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (Step S3014). In the lottery of the notice B, as in the case of the notice A, the type of the notice B to be executed is specified from a predetermined table (FIG. 103B), and the flag setting value is acquired. Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the obtained flag setting value as the notice B flag (Step S3015).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets a notice C to be executed in the first half of the development effect after the reach or the first half of the reach effect after the start of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (step S3016). In the lottery of the notice C, as in the case of the notice A, the type of the notice C to be executed is specified from a predetermined table (FIG. 103 (C)), and the flag setting value is acquired. Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the acquired flag setting value as a notice C flag (Step S3017).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets a notice D to be executed in the latter half of the development effect after the reach or the latter half of the reach effect after the start of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (step S3018). In the lottery of the notice D, as in the case of the notice A, the type of the notice D to be executed is specified from a predetermined table (FIG. 103 (D)), and the flag setting value is acquired. Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the obtained flag setting value as the notice D flag (Step S3019). When all the notice flags are set, the process ends.

  Next, a description will be given of the execution control of the pre-reading notice (holding notice, background notice) in Modification 3 of the present embodiment. In the prefetch announcement effect according to the third modification of the present embodiment, the execution of the prefetch effect is controlled by referring to the hold announcement flag and the background announcement flag in the prefetch effect control process (step S1027). FIG. 106 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the prefetching effect control process in Modification 3 of the present embodiment.

  First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the suspension notice flag is set (step S3021). If the suspension notice flag has not been set (the result of step S3021 is “No”), the processing from step S3024 is executed.

  On the other hand, when the suspension notice flag is set (the result of step S3021 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a suspension notice setting process (step S3022). In the suspension notice setting process, the mode of the suspension display displayed on the screen is changed based on the set value of the suspension notice flag. After the end of the suspension notice setting process, the suspension notice flag is cleared (step S3023).

  If the hold notice flag is not set (result of step S3021 is “No”), or after the setting of the hold notice is completed, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the background notice flag is set ( Step S3024). If the background notice flag has not been set (the result of step S3024 is "No"), the present process is terminated.

  If the background notice flag is set (the result of step S3024 is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires a background image corresponding to the background notice flag from the image ROM and sets it (step S3025). Finally, the background notice flag is cleared (step S3026), and the process ends.

  If the power is cut off before the start of the change after the level of the prefetch notice effect has been set, the information on the level of the prefetch notice effect is initialized by the power interruption process, and the information of the predetermined number of changes ( Within the upper limit of the number of suspensions (maximum of eight), a preliminary lottery is performed with the level of the fluctuation as the lowest level (level 1).

  Specifically, when the power is turned on, if the number-of-holds command is received following the power-on command, the level of the fluctuation is determined by the number of holds based on the received number-of-holds command (total number for two special figure types) Is the lowest level. When the power-on command is not received after the power-on command, the level of the variation is set to the lowest level by a predetermined number (eight for the two special figure types).

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to manage effect data hierarchically by setting a level (effect effect information) corresponding to a variation pattern. As a result, it is possible to reduce errors in setting the effect data. In particular, since it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an error that is difficult to find, such as a rare effect pattern, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the operation test of the gaming machine. By providing a gaming machine that operates stably, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, by drawing lots of the effect contents based on the level, it is possible to prevent the contents of the notice (pre-reading) and the contents of the effect of the special figure synchronous effect (the fluctuation) from being inconsistent. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing due to the player's sense of expectation that has increased at the time of occurrence of the notice being reduced after the start of the change.

[23. Another example]
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment at all, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be implemented in various modes as long as it belongs to the technical scope of the present invention.

  For example, in the embodiment described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described as an example, but the gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, and a gaming machine other than the pachinko gaming machine, for example, a slot machine or The present invention can also be applied to an integrated gaming machine in which a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine are integrated (a slot game is performed using a game ball).

1 Pachinko machines (game machines)
2 outer frame 3 main body frame 4 game board 5 door frame 192 handle relay terminal plate 400 operation unit (operation unit)
470 Upper-panel-side liquid crystal display device 650 Hitting and launching device 740 Award ball device 784 External terminal board 851 Power supply board 860a Operation switch (error clearing section)
860b Error LED display 1100 Game area 1900 Game board side liquid crystal display 4100 Main control board (game control board, game control unit, special game state generating means)
4100a Main control MPU
4110 Payout control board (payout control board, payout control unit)
4120 payout control unit 4120a payout control MPU
4140 peripheral control board (effect control unit, effect execution means, effect determination means, effect storage means, effect generation information selecting means, effect content selecting means, effect selection information changing means, effect execution timing determining means, effect reference information selecting means, Direction selection means)
4150 Peripheral control unit 4160 Liquid crystal and sound control unit 4165 RTC control unit 4170 Lamp drive board 4180 Motor drive board

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that obtains a random number value as start information from a generated random number based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition, executes a lottery based on the obtained start information, and can execute dynamic display. ,
First dynamic display means for starting dynamic display upon passage to the first starting port,
Second dynamic display means for starting dynamic display upon passage to the second starting port,
First holding storage means for storing the start information up to a predetermined number until the dynamic display is started upon passage to the first start port ,
Second holding storage means for storing the start information up to a predetermined number until the dynamic display is started upon passage to the second start port,
Wherein the first holding memory means and the second holding memory means a memory unit that different, a starting information storage means for storing the start information,
During dynamic display of the start of the first dynamic display unit, wherein remembers the start information storage means start information from said first holding storage means for starting a dynamic display, stored in the start-up information storing means First dynamic display-time lottery determination means for executing the lottery based on the start information;
During dynamic display of the start of the first dynamic display unit, wherein remembers the start information storage means start information from said first holding storage means for starting a dynamic display, stored in the start-up information storing means First dynamic display type variation type determination means for selecting a type of dynamic display from the dynamic display pattern table based on the start information;
During dynamic display of the start of the second dynamic display means, wherein remembers the start information storage means starting information from the second holding storage means for initiating the dynamic display, stored in the start-up information storing means A second dynamic display time lottery determination means for executing the lottery based on the start information;
During dynamic display of the start of the second dynamic display means, wherein remembers the start information storage means starting information from the second holding storage means for initiating the dynamic display, stored in the start-up information storing means A second dynamic display time variation type determining means for selecting a type of dynamic display from the dynamic display pattern table based on the start information;
With
Before dynamic display of the first dynamic display unit is started, remembers the start information in the start-up information storing unit, executes the lottery on the basis of the start-up information stored in the start-up information storing means includes a first pre-lottery determining means,
The start information used in the first preliminary lottery determination unit is stored in a predetermined area of the first hold storage unit before the first preliminary lottery determination unit is executed,
Before dynamic display of the first dynamic display unit is started, the dynamic display pattern table based the start information to the remembers the starting information storage means, starting information stored in the start-up information storing means First variation type determination means for selecting the type of dynamic display from
The start information used by the first prior variation type determination unit is stored in a predetermined area of the first suspension storage unit before the first prior variation type determination unit is executed,
Before dynamic display of the second dynamic display unit is started, it remembers the start information in the start-up information storing unit, executes the lottery on the basis of the start-up information stored in the start-up information storing means a second pre-drawing judgment means,
The start information used in the second preliminary lottery determination unit is stored in a predetermined area of the second hold storage unit before the second preliminary lottery determination unit is executed,
Before dynamic display of the second dynamic display unit is started, the dynamic display pattern table based the start information to the remembers the starting information storage means, starting information stored in the start-up information storing means A second prior variation type determining means for selecting the type of dynamic display from
The start information used by the second prior variation type determination unit is stored in a predetermined area of the second suspension storage unit before the second prior variation type determination unit is executed,
The first dynamic display time lottery determination means and the first preliminary lottery determination means have a common process of executing the lottery based on the start information stored in the start information storage means, and The target display time lottery determination means and the second preliminary lottery determination means share a process of executing the lottery based on the start information stored in the start information storage means,
The first dynamic display variation type determining means and the first preliminary variation type determining means are configured to select the type of the dynamic display based on the start information stored in the start information storage means, The table is common, and the second dynamic display time variation type determination means and the second pre-variation type determination means determine the type of the dynamic display based on the start information stored in the start information storage means. A gaming machine characterized in that the processing to be selected and the dynamic display pattern table are common.